Loading...
Operations Center - 8777 SW Burnham Street - Specifications „ S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 0 R T H E C O N S T R U C T I O N O F N E W O P E R A T I O N S C E N T E R OFFICE BUILDING - 8,456 SO. FT. FIELD OPERATIONS BUILDING - 9,496 SO. FT. jw 8777 S.W. Burnham Street Tigard, Oregon LFOR r ARC�� TIGARD WATER DISTRICT 8841 S.W. Commercial St. RUSSELL L. H Tigard, Oregon 97223 gELLEVUE,W H Phone: 1-503-639-1554 Z) OF OF 0 JUNE 1988 r F 0 R E W A R D The specifications in their entirety are prepared in parts, numbered I thru V. Parts I ,II, III are bound to- gether in a separate folder. Parts IV and V are bound together herein. All parts are hereby made a part of the complete documents with the same force and effect as though all parts and plans referred to therein were under one binding, together with detailed drawings. The documents and proposals which appear herein or for which provisions are made must be used in submitting proposals for construction of the Operations Center for Tigard Water District, Washington County, Oregon as defined by the plans and specifications therefore. The general classification of each part is as listed below: r PART I. . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTICr, TO CONTRACTORS, PROPOSAL FORMS, AND ALLIED DOCUMENTS PART II . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART III. . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL CONDITIONS PART IV. . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART V. . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Should addenda to the specifications become necessary, they shall be deemed a part of the designated section and shall be issued in numerical order. SPECIAL NOTE TO ALL CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS: YOU ARE ADVISED TO READ VERY CAREFULLY PAGES SP-16 THROUGH SP-19 OF PART IV WHICH PERTAINS TO WORK AND MATERIALS TO BE FURNISHED BY OWNER. PART IV SPECIAL PROVISIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Description Page SP-01 PREQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-01 SP-02 OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF OREGON LAW. . . . . . . . SP-01 1. Payment of Liens, Withholding Taxes, Contribution to Industrial Accident Fund, Labor & Materials. . SP-01 2 . Payment of Claims by the Owner. . . . SP-02 3. Working Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-02 4. Nondiscrimination of Labor. . . . . . . . SP-02 5. Minimum Wage Rates on Public Works SP-02 6. Forfeiture of Contract. . . . . . . . . . . . SP-03 7. Payment of Medical Care and Attention to Employees. . . . . . . . . . . . SP-04 S. Any and all other of the laws of Oregon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-04 SP-03 SPECIFICATION BY STANDARD DESIGNATIONS. . SP-04 SP-04 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. . . . SP-05 SP-05 PATENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-05 SP-06 GENERAL STATEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-06 SP-07 SCOPE OF WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-06 SP-08 PLANS. . SP-06 SP-09 TIME OF COMPLETION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-09 SP-10 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-10 SP-11 SITE INVESTIGATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11 SP-12 COST DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11 SP-13 ACCESS TO WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11 SP-14 INCLUSION IN SUBCONTRACTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11 SP-15 "OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-12 SP-16 SAFETY STANDARDS AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION SP-13 SP-17 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-13 SP-18 RIGHT-OF-WAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-13 SP-19 INTERFERENCES AND OBSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . SP-13 ' SP-20 PROGRESS REPORTS AND SCHEDULES. . . . . . . . . . SP-14 SP-21 POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION. . . . . . . . . . SP-14 SP-22 PAYMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-14 SP-23 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS. . . . . SP-15 SP-24 ACCESS TO WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-16 SP-25 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR. . . SP-16 SP-26 WATER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-16 SP-27 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STORAGE. . . . . . . . . . SP-16 SP-28 WORK AND MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER. . . SP-16 wr Irr SPECIAL PROVISIONS SP-01 PREQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER The laws of Oregon require that all prospective bidders on public works construction must qualify therefor to the satisfaction of the owner of such works before the forms or other documents which are essential in the preparation and filing of a proposal may be issued. Prequalification of bidders on public contracts must be accomplished on forms prescribed by the Department of Commerce. It therefore will be presumed that each bidder will have applied to the owner for approval of his qualifications and will have received such approval before requesting that said forms or documents be issued to him. Prospective bidders who heretofore may have qualified with the owner and whose evidence of such qualifications is still acceptable may upon request receive the necessary approval without filing new proof thereof -- all subject to the discretion of the owner. All prospective bidders requesting forms or documents for preparation of proposals shall be prequalified with the owner ten (10) days prior to proposal submission. SP-02 OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF OREGON LAW 1. Payment of Liens, Withholding Taxes, Contributions to Industrial Accident Fund, Labor, and Materials. The con- tractor shall make payment promptly as due to all persons supplying to the contractor labor or materials for the prose- cution of the work provided for herein, and shall pay all contributions or amounts due the State Industrial Accident Fund (SIAF) from the contractor or subcontractors incurred in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall permit no lien or claim to be filed or prosecuted against the owner on account of any labor or material furnished, and shall pay to the Department of Revenue all sums withheld from employees pursuant to ORS 315. 575 or ORS 316.711 and ORS 316. 714, as amended, and ORS 316. 167. rr SP-01 2. Payment of Claims by the Owner. In the event the contractor shall fail, neglect, or refuse to make prompt payment of any claim for labor or services furnished to the contractor or subcontractor by any person in connection with this contract as such claim becomes due, whether said services and labor be performed for the contractor or a subcontractor, then, in such event, the proper officer or officers represent- ing the owner may pay such claim to the person furnishing the labor or services and charge the amount of the payment against funds due or to become due the contractor by reason of his contract in accordance with the provisions of ORS 279. 314 . The payment of a claim in the manner authorized herein shall not relieve the contractor or his surety from his or its obligation with respect to any unpaid claims. 3. Working Hours. No person shall be employed more than eight (8) ours in any one day or forty (40) hours in any one week, except in cases of necessity, emergencies, or where the public policy absolutely requires. In such cases, the laborer shall be paid at least time and one-half pay for all overtime in excess of eight (8) hours a day and for work performed on Saturdays and on any legal holiday as specified in ORS 279. 334 . 4 . Nondiscrimination of Labor. The attention of the contractor is directed to the provisions of Chapter 659, Oregon Revised Statutes, relative to unlawful employment practices and discrimination by employers against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, or national origin. Particular reference is made to Section 659. 030 ORS, which states that it is an unlawful employment practice for an employer, because of the race, religion, color or national origin of any individual, to refuse to hire or employ or to bar or discharge from employment such individual or to discriminate against such individual in compensation or in terms, conditions or privileges of employment. 5. Minimum Wage Rates on Public Works. The contractor shall comply fully with ORS 279. 348 through 279. 356, which provides in part that "the hourly rate of wage to be paid by any contractor or subcontractor to workman upon all public works shall be not less than the prevailing rate of wage for an hour' s work in the same trade or occupation in the locality where such labor is performed. When a contractor or subcon- tractor is a party to a state-wide agreement in effect with SP-02 any labor organization the rate of wages� g as established in the agreement shall be considered to be the prevailing rate in the locality. " The provisions of the statute do not apply to workmen or other persons regularly employed on monthly or per diem salary. The Commissioner of Oregon Bureau of Labor is responsible for the determination of prevailing rates of wages and minimum hourly rates of wages. The minimum hourly rate of wage, not less than the pre- vailing rate of wage, which may be paid to workmen in each trade or occupation required for the work under the contract employed in the performance of the contract either by the contractor or subcontractor or by other persons doing or con- tracting to the whole or part of the work contemplated by the contract shall be as set forth in the Schedule of Minimum Hourly Wage Rates bound with the proposed ?agreement and the workmen employed in the performance of the contract, shall be paid not less than the applicable specified minimum hourly rate of wage as such is set forth in said schedule. The con- tractor shall keep the prevailing wage rates for this project posted in a conspicuous & accessible place in or about project. In case of conflict between any of the minimum hourly wage rates set forth in the schedule above referred to and other pertinent minimum hourly wage rates, as such other rates may have been set forth in the contract provisions in accord- ance with federal regulations, the higher of the conflicting wage rates shall be applicable under the contract. There is no representation on the part of the owner that labor can be obtained at the hourly rates bound with the special provisions. It is the responsibility of bidders to inform themselves as to local labor conditions and prospective changes or adjustments of wage rates. No increase in the con- tract price shall be allowed or authorized on account of the payment of wage rates in excess of those listed. r 6. Forfeiture of Contract. This contract may be can- celled at the election of t e owner for any willful failure or refusal to faithfully perform the contract according to its terms as herein provided. SP-03 r �j 7 . Pa ent of Medical Care and Attention toes. The contractor shall promptly, as due, ma a payment to any person, co-partnership, association, or corporation furnish- ing medical, surgical, and hospital care, or other needed care and attention incident to sickness or injury to the employees of such contractor, all of sums which the contrac- tor agrees to pay for such services, and all monies and sums which the contractor has collected or deducted from wages of his employees pursuant to any law, contract, or agreement for the purpose of providing or paying for such service. 8. Any and All Other of the Laws of Oregon, which are applicable to work ot the nature contemplated shall be ob- served in all respects. SP-03 SPECIFICATIONS BY STANDARD DESIGNATIONS Whenever practicable, specifications ecifications will be made herein by designating certain public standards of recognized organi- zations. Abbreviation ASTM will be used to indicate American Society for Testing Materials and this will be followed by the official published designation number for the particular specifications to which the reference applies. Other stan- dards will be indicated by the full name of the sponsoring organization or by clearly recognized abbreviations. In all cases, it shall be understood that such references mean the designated specifications or the latest revision thereof . Specifications so defined shall have full force and effect as though they were repeated in full in these speci- fications. All material, equipment and devices not specifically covered by such standards as indicated above, these specifi- cations, by the plans or by addenda shall be subject to the approval of the architect to determine the suitability for the service intended. SP-04 SP-04 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS Whether or not there appears here or elsewhere herein specific reference to guarantees of all items of material, equipment, and workmanship, they nevertheless shall be so guaranteed against mechanical, structural, or other defects for which the contractor is responsible that may develop or become evident within a period of one (1) year from and after acceptance of the work by the owner. Such guarantees shall include care of backfilling of ditches or at struc- tures should the fill settle to such extent as to require refilling or resurfacing roadway surfaces to restore the original or intended condition or grade. This guarantee shall be understood to imply prompt attention to any remedy of such defects as those mentioned above if and as they occur after the contractor shall have written notice of their existence. If the defect, in 'the opinion of the owner, if of such nature as to demand immediate repair, the owner shall have the right to make them, and the cost thereof shall be borne by the contractor. To support the above guarantee, the contractor's per- formance bond shall remain in full force and effect forone(1) year following the acceptance of the project by the owner. The bond shall be executed by a surety company authorized to do business within the State of Oregon, and it shall be sub- ject to the approval of the attorney for the owner. SP-05 PATENTS The contractor' s attention is called to the General Conditions requirement on patents, and the hold harmless clauses thereof. In addition to the requirements stated therein, the contractor shall pay all royalties and assume all responsibilities for the infringement of any patent required by any process or items of equipment required for the project. The costs to the contractor of all royalty pay- ments for use of patented processes or equipment shall be absorbed in the prices named for the work in the Proposal form. SP-05 SP-06 GENERAL STATEMENT These Special Provisions supplement and amplify certain sections of the General Provisions .for the project. The General Provisions shall apply except as herein modified. SP-07 SCOPE OF WORK The work to be performed under these specifications and plans consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equip- ment necessary for the construction of a new Operations Center, except for work to be performed, and materials supplied, by Tigard Water District as specifically described in specifications. No attempt has been made in these specifications or plans to segregate work covered by any trade or subcontract under one specification. Such segregation and establishment of subcontract limits will be solely a matter of specific agreement between the contractor and his subcontractors and shall not be based upon any inclusion, segregation, or arrange- ment in or of these specifications. The contractor and sub- contractor in each case is warned that work included in any subcontract may be divided between several general specifica- tions and that each general specification or subhead of the Technical (Provisions) Specifications may include work covered by two or more subcontracts in excess of any one subcontract. The above general outline of principal features of the work does not in any way limit the responsibility of the con- tractor to perform all work and furnish all plant, labor, and materials required by the specifications and the plans and drawings referred to therein. SP-08 PLANS The plans are designated by name, number and title. Where reference is made to the drawings, the "Drawing Number" of the sheet will be used. Each drawing bears the general title: SP-06 TIGARD WATER DISTRICT NEW OPERATIONS CENTER DRAWING NUMBER CONTENT - Title Page Project Information Index to Drawings Vicinity Map A-1 Site Plan M-1 Site Utilities Details A-2 Office Building 1/8" Floor Plan 1/8" Foundation Plan A-3 Maintenance Building 1/8" Foundation Plan Foundation Details A-4 Office Building 1/8" Roof Framing Truss Diagrams A-5 Office Building 1/8" Roof Plan A-6 Maintenance Building 1/8" Floor Plan � s 1/8" Roof Framing A-7 Maintenance Building 1/8" Roof Plan 1/4" Building Section A-8 Office Building 1/4" Elevations A-9 Office Building 1/4" Elevations A-10 Maintenance Building 1/4" Elevations 1/4" Building Sections A-11 Maintenance Building 1/4" Elevations SP-07 A-12 office Building 1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical Plan. A-13 office Building 1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical Plan. A-14 Maintenance Building 1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical Plan. A-15 Maintenance Building 1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical Plan. A-16 office Building 1/4" Partial Reflected Ceiling and Lighting Plan. A-17 office Building 1/4" Partial Reflected Ceiling and Lighting Plan. A-18 Maintenance Building 1/4" Reflected Ceiling and Lighting Plan. A-19 Maintenance Building 1/4" Reflected Ceiling and Lighting Plan. A-20 Wall Sections and Details 1-4. A-21 Wall Sections and Details 5-9. A-22 Wall Sections and Details 10-13 . A-23 Wall Sections and Details 14-17 . A-24 Miscellaneous Structural Details and Connections. A-25 Interior Elevations and Miscellaneous Architectural Details. A-26 Room Finish Schedule. Door Schedule. Window Schedule. Light Fixture Schedule. M-2 Office Building 1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C. Plan. M-3 Office Building 1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C. Plan. SP-08 M-4 Maintenance Buildina 1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C. M-5 Maintenance Buildina 1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C. L-1 Partial Landscape Plan (by owner) L-2 Partial Landscape Plan (by owner) SP-09 TIME OF COMPLETION After Notice to Proceed has been issued by the owner, the contractor shall complete all work as specified within the following time frame: Project complete and in service, ready for occupancy, including all utilities installed and connected: 210 consecutive calendar days. The work shall be completed within the time period specified by the contractor in his proposal. Work shall be started within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed. " It is believed that a target date of not later than July 1, 1988 is realistic for start of construction. Should the owner cause delay in completion of the work by reason of requirements on extra work or otherwise provided for by the plans or these specifications, the contractor will be granted an extension of time for completion equal to the amount of such delay and no charge will be made against him for the extension of time so granted; provided, however, that all such extension requested by the contractor shall be made to the owner in writing on or before the fifth day of the month following that in which the alleged delay is said to have occurred and such claim for extension of time shall state explicitly the reason therefor. Should the contractor fail to file such written claim for extension of time within the period provided therefor, he thereby shall have abandoned any claim therefor. No claim for delay will be considered by the owner except that alleged to have been caused by extra work or special order of the owner acting through the architect. SP-09 In naming the price for the work and for its completion within the time quoted in the proposal, it shall be understood and agreed that the work shall be completed within that time. If, however, said work is not completed within the time named in the contract as extended to cover the total days of delay allowed in the paragraph above, the owner may deduct and retain out of any sum then due or that may become due the contractor at the time of such delinquency or later the sum of $100.00 for each and every calendar day that the date of final completion of the work is delayed. In submitting the proposal and signing the contract, the contractor hereby shall have agreed to these provisions and furthermore that the sum deducted and retained is not a penalty but reimbursement to the owner for damages that the owner will have sustained by reason of such delayed completion. The damages so liquidated are understood to include the additional cost to the owner for architectural supervision, interest charges and overhead, of which damages would be difficult or impossible to ascertain accurately. It is further understood that should the contractor not complete the work within the time specified, the owner may discontinue any further progress payments until the work is completed and accepted by the owner. SP-10 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT The owner reserves the right to require that any bidder before being awarded a contract shall execute a noncollusion affidavit in such form as will satisfy the owner that the bid offered is genuine, is not a sham or collusive, and in no respect or degree is made in the interest or on behalf of any person, firm or corporation not named in the proposal contain- ing such bid. SP-10 SP-11 SITE INVESTIGATION The contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, including but not restricted to those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of water, roads and groundwater. Information and data furnished or referred to herein is furnished for information only. Any failure by the contractor to acquaint himself with the available infor- mation will not relieve him from responsibility for estimat- ing properly the difficulty or cost of successfully perform- ing the work. The owner assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the contractor on the basis of the information made available. SP-12 COST DATA If so requested by the Owner, the contractor shall furnish full information as to the pay of employees and the cost of materials or other items which are parts of the finished work or will become so. SP-13 ACCESS TO WORK Access to the work shall be provided as may be required by the owner or his representatives. Also, the contractor shall provide access to the work for representatives of the appropriate local governmental agency, city, county, or state, as well as the Federal Government for inspection of the work and the methods of construction or for any other required inspection. SP-14 INCLUSION IN SUBCONTRACTS The contractor shall include all applicable provisions PP of this section of the specifications in all subcontracts for work to be performed under this contract. SP-11 SP-15 "OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE In order to establish a basis for quality, certain processes, types of machinery and equipment, or kinds of material may be specified on the plans or herein by desig- nating a manufacturer by name and referring to his brand or product designation. It is not the intent of these specifications to exclude other processes, equipment or materials of a type and quality equal to those designated. Whenever a manufacturer' s name, brand or item designa- tion is given, it shall be understood that the words "or approved equal" follow such name or designation whether in fact they do so or not. If the contractor desires to furnish items of minor equipment by manufacturers other than those specified, he shall secure the approval of the architect prior to placing a purchase order. Certain items of major equipment, however, are speci- fied in the Technical Provisions of these specifications. The contractor may bid upon the use of approved alternate equipment. In either case, the contractor shall state in the proposal and list in the space provided the manufacturer of the major equipment he proposes to furnish. No extras will be allowed the contractor for any changes required to adopt the substitute equipment, therefore, the contractor's proposal including the approved alternate shall include all costs for any modifications to the plans, such as structural and foundation changes, or any other modifica- tion which may be necessary or required for approval and adaptation of the proposed alternate equipment. Approval of alternate and equal major equipment will be only by addenda issued at least five (5) days prior to bid opening. Requests for approval of this major equipment must come from the manuMW - facturer or his representative at least ten (10) days prior to bid opening. All such requests must be accompanied by drawings and specifications in sufficient detail to allow the owner to determine whether or not the equipment proposed is equal of that specified. The determination as to whether or not the proposed substitute equals that specified shall rest solely with the owner. Regardless of the major equipment furnished or alternate equipment thereto, the contractor shall furnish the services of a manufacturer's representative to place the equipment in operation and to test the equipment after installation. No substitutions shall be permitted after a proposal has been accepted by the owner without written approval by the architect. SP-12 r SP-16 SAFETY STANDARDS AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION The contractor shall exercise every precaution at all times for the prevention of accidents and the protection of persons (including employees) and property, and comply with applicable safety regulations. SP-17 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS Prior to construction the Owner will locate and stake all points of intersection and angle points. Once these points are established, it will be the contractor's responsibility to reference and maintain them. The architect may at his discretion or at the request of the contractor re-establish these points but such additional surveys may be at the contractor's expense. L SP-18 RIGHT-OF-WAY The owner will provide the necessary right-of--way or easements for the work. Information regarding the width, status and special conditions attached to right-of-way or easements can be obtained from the owner in advance of the date when bids are received; the contractor shall confine his operations to the designated areas and observe all restrictions. Special occupancy and use of the streets are subject to and limited by permit from the proper officials, which must be obtained before the streets are obstructed in any way. Reasonable occupancy and use will be supported by wthe owner's certification if necessary. SP-19 INTERFERENCES AND OBSTRUCTIONS At certain places, power, light and telephone roles may interfere with excavation and the operation of the con- tractor's equipment. Necessary arrangements shall be made with utility companies for moving or maintaining such poles. The utility company effected by any such interferences shall be notified thereof so that the necessary moving or proper care of poles and appurtenances may have appropriate attention. f All costs resulting from any other interferences and obstructions, or the replacement of such, whether or not herein specifically mentioned, shall be included and absorbed in the contractor ' s bid. SP-13 SP-20 PROGRESS REPORTS AND SCHEDULES The contractor shall, within ten (10) days after the date of commencement of the work, prepare and submit to the Architect for approval a practicable schedule showing the order in which the contractor proposes to carry on the work, the date on which he will start the several salient features (including the procurement of materials, plant and equipment) and the contemplated dates for completing the same. SP-21 POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION The owner shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially complete part of the work. Such possession or use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the contract. If such prior possession or use by the owner delays the progress of the work or causes additional expense to the contractor, an equitable adjustment in the contract price, and/or the time of completion, will be made and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. SP-22 PAYMENTS The Tigard water District will make progress payments and final payment as defined in the General Conditions herein in cash. The following with regard to the amounts to be retained from the contract price modify the General Conditions GC-09 (MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT) , Section 91 Partial Payments. The amount to be retained from any given partial payment will be such that when added to the sum of amounts previously retained will bring the total of amounts retained to an amount equal to 5% of the value of completed work except that upon substantial completion of the work under the contract which will be understood to be not less than 97h% of the work, the owner may, at his discretion, reduce the retained amount to an amount equivalent to not less than 200% of the contract value or estimated cost, whichever is greater, of the work remaining to be done. SP-14 The amount to be retained in protection of the owner 's interest as above set forth will be reduced in conformance with the following: A. If the contractor deposits with the owner bonds and securities of a value equal to at least 5% of the amount of the contract at the time he signs the contract for the project, no amount will be retained from partial payments. B. If the contractor deposits bonds and securities with the owner during the life of the contract, any retained amounts will be reduced by an amount equal to the value of the bonds and securities. This reduction in retainage will be made in the partial payments made subsequent to the time the contractor deposits the bonds and securities with the owner. C, The value of the bonds and securities will be peri- odically determined by the owner and amount retained on par- tial payments will be adjusted accordingly. D. The bonds and securities deposited by the contractor shall be of a kind approved by the State Treasurer. E. At the time the owner determines that all require- ments for protection of the owner's interest have been ful- filled, all bonds and securities will be returned to the contractor. SP-23 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS The contractor under these specifications shall cooperate �w fully with all other contractors and carefully fit his own work to such other work as may be directed by the architect. The contractor shall not commit or permit any act to be com- mitted which will interfere with the performance of work by any other contractor. SP-15 SP-24 ACCESS TO WORK SP-25 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR The contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and plant necessary to complete the project in accordance with the plans and specifications . However, note that the owner (TWD) will furnish, at its expense, some material required for the project (See paragraph SP-28) . SP-26 WATER SUPPLY Potable, fresh water will be available on jobsite at 70 psi via a 2-inch meter. SP-27 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STORAGE Contractor will be authorized to store equipment and material on the construction site. The site is partially enclosed with a 6-foot cyclone fence. Owner will remove and dispose of existing fence upon completion of project. SP-28 WORK AND MATERIALS TO BE FURNISHED BY OWNER Tigard Water District, the Owner, provides as its normal operations, labor, equipment and supervision of contracts to a variety of construction projects. Therefore, for several differ- ent reasons, it is the intent of the district to accomplish cer- tain improvements with "in-house" labor and equipment and to contract directly with others for work listed on the next few pages. The work provided by the district and by other contractors will require cooperation and coordination with the general con- tractor. It is believed that any conflicts will be minimal . SP-16 r List of material, work and equipment to be furnished by Owner (or to be contracted separately with others) A. Fees and permits to City of Tigard 1. Building permit 2. Plan check fee 3. Fire safety plan check 4 . SDC parking 5. Sewer fees 6 . Sewer inspections B. Site work w 1. Gravel fill material. Because of the demands on ensuring an adequate soils base it is impossible in advance to specify the exact amount of gravel fill necessary for the job. (See para. D on page SP-19) . TWD will provide on job site all gravel deemed necessary by the contractor at district' s expense. This applies to all gravel backfill necessary for refilling ditches, sub- concrete base for sidewalks, curbs, etc. Contractor need merely advise inspector on jobsite of his requirements and it will be delivered to him. Contractor shall provide all grading and compaction. Contractor shall also provide the following, but not limited to, all standing concrete curbs, concrete walks, concrete aprons at driveways, underground utilities (except as noted in next para- graph) , brick wall, trenching and backfill, underground power conduits to designated locations, concrete pads for condensers, patios, mailbox, sign, etc. 2. Fresh water pipelines. TWD will perform all tasks re- lated to furnishing and installation of ductile iron (fresh) water pipelines including fire hydrants and appurtenances to within five' (5) of buildings. TWD will also install, at its expense, copper service lines and three (3) meters to serve this project. 3. Asphalt paving. Any and all asphalt paving will not be a part of this contract. TWD will request competitive bids by separate contract for this work later in the construction phase of this project. SP-17 4 Landscaping,Landsca in , to soil, irrigation system, etc. TWD will request competitive bids by separate contract for this work. Contractor shall provide water and power stubs to selected locations, outside of buildings, as specified on drawings. 5. Remote fuel station in service yard. Time is of the essence in preparing these specifications and new very stringent regulations on installation of fuel tanks make it impossible to prepare such detailed plans and acquire approval for same on short notice. Therefore, TWD will prepare plans and request competitive bids for this work by separate contract at a later date. Contractor shall provide power stubs as designated on the drawings. 6. Cyclone fencing. A minimum of additional 6-foot cyclone fencing with redwood slats will be required for this job. TWD will contract separately for this work. This includes the cyclone gate at the vehicular entrance via the brick wall. 7. Lettering for sign. The brick sign structure with lights shall be installed by contractor. Bronze lettering for same will be purchased and installed by TWD. 8. Flag poles . Contractor shall provide concrete curbs as noted in paragraph-2 above and appropriate power thereto, but the two flag poles will be installed by separate contract with others. C. Building equipment and fixtures 1. Smoke detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed ME by contractor throughout the buildings as designated on the drawings and any additional per NFAP STD. 72A & E. 2. Emergency generator and telemetry equipment. TWD will purchase these items at some distant future date. 3. Free-standing appliances. TWD will purchase and install two refrigerators, one dryer and one washing machine. 4. Built-in appliances. TWD will purchase two electric cook top ranges, two microwave ovens with exhaust fan combina- tions. Contractor shall provide one dishwasher and two garbage disposal units, color to be determined later for the former. Contractor will provide and allow spacing for same. (See Division 11 - Equipment) . 5. Window coverings, including curtains for stage. TWD will purchase the items by separate contract at later date. MO SP-18 D. Pre-construction work and soils testing A soils investigation was conducted at the site by Carlson Testing, Inc. , as evidenced by the attached letters dated April 5 and 6, 1988. During the month of May, Tigard Water District personnel and equipment, along with rented heavy equipment and operator (s) , performed the recommended corrections to soil conditions as described below: i LO "That all structural loads be placed on the medium stiff brown clayey silts underlying the soft, saturated clays. Structural fill placed to correct for over- excavation shall be 3/4" - 1h" minus crushed rock placed in 8 inch lifts with fills over 18" in depth compacted to 92% density per AASHTO T-180. rills placed under foot- ings shall have a width equal to twice their depth plus the width of the footing. " As this work progressed, frequent additional testing was conducted by Carlson Testing, Inc. A final satisfactory report must be received prior to beginning construction of the Operations Center. Upon completion of this preliminary work, gravel fill will be close to the finished grade below the proposed concrete slab. It is proposed that the finished grade on top of the concrete slab will be at elevation 161 feet above sea level. Note that all gravel will be provided and paid for by Tigard Water District for the entire project, however, final grading and compaction shall be the responsibility of the con- tractor. L r L w SP-19 Cawtrucoiott Inspeeoion dr Related Tests Carlson Testing, Inc. P.O.Box 23814 Ap r i 1 5, 1988 Tigard,Oregon 97223 #CP-3808 Phone(503)684-3460 Tigard Water District 8841 S.W. Commercial St. Tigard, Oregon 97223 Attn: Mr. John Miller Re: New Tigard Water District Facility S.W. Hall Blvd. 8 S.W. Burnham St. Gentlemen: At your request, a soils investigation was conducted for two proposed structures to be located on a vacant parcel of land at the northwest corner of S.W. Hall Blvd. and S.W. Burnham Street in the City of Tigard, Oregon. The investigation was conducted at about 10:00 a.m. on April 1 , 1988. Using a backhoe, five (5) test pits were dug to the medium stiff brown clayey silts underlying the area at about 5 feet below the surface. The results of the test pits are shown on the attached soils logs. The building area is covered with +/- one foot of crushed rock followed by a +/- 4 foot layer of soft black to blue black saturated silty clay. The test pit at the west end of the proposed field office was the exception with a four foot layer of hard, dry blue silty clay. A water table is presently located at about four feet below the surface. �r It is recommended that all structural loads be placed on the medium stiff brown clayey silts underlying the soft, saturated clays. Structural fill placed to correct for over-excavation shall be 3/4" - 1 1/2" minus crushed rock placed in 8 inch lifts with fills over 18" in depth compacted to 926 density per AASHTO T-180. Fills placed under footings shall have a width equal to twice their depth plus the width of the footing. Footings placed as indicated above may be designed for a soil bearing pressure of 2000 pounds per square foot. Engineering or consolidation testing were neither requested nor performed. If there are any further questions on this matter, please do not hesitate to contact our office. Very Y tru) yours, Ci� TING, INC. CJIS� 0985 � DOZ: llo Attachment o;tr D. T4A2� G(/AT E,4e (�Si RrtT SOIL LOGS Ti�,o,eo, rr E•Q S� ,Gs,Np of fLD O'CF SavTN 4-vo NO 1 o f�oP.vs o� fin afF .4 �4 _ NZ NO 3 GrZUSNtD �k � � t i 'a A GNvsN6D /Pcc�c GR�sp�n 2ouc, �rw 3 R�5 aF J' ,Q/„�uc, 2 o ,4"IC- \ SBFT 91..aci� Z \ H140120OrtY 3 E f p S'Lus,c.TY t \ \ 5— I \ S(�Tp «a- 4 f3/Law ti. S. 7 CLAY S M *'01u'- s T/r-)= 11 I II BR�owN y�y s r`--J 1 M f O/lJM S III Fr= G"YiY f rc 1 s 10 to to 1 3 CT r2 o i= NO fF L T2 OFr�goNS 4 NO 5 � NO qJ11 SoFi gLv£ t2oc-kY z tFA RL0r_ of=i t3l.uE� 2 3 SF� l�"'" 13lLo�•uiv �£o,u.,.� _, f3Rown,� M�sV�uM S rr F,= CLh`14.t( S ri F,= cr.. v I !s J Carlson Testing, Inc . � P.O. Box 23814 . Tioard Oromm 07)'w i 4"•S'a 8 Carlson Testing, Inc. �cOuede-Itt on&Related Tests P.O.Box 23814 April 6. 1988 Tigard,Oregon 97223 #CP-3808 Phone(so3)684-3460 Tigard Water District 8841 S.W. Commercial Street Tigard, Oregon 97223 Re: Tigard Water District Future Facility California Bearing Ratio (CBR Testing) Gentlemen: As requested, we have performed two (2) in-place CBR (California Bearing Ratio) tests sampled on April 1 , 1988 at the above referenced project at locations as indicated by our representative. Following are the test results: CBR No. 1 (ASTM D1883) - South Parking Area @ -8" Below Rock Elevation Sample Condition: Soaked Dry Density Before Soak: 102.2 lbs./cu. ft. Moisture Content Before Soak: 17.66 Moisture Content After Soak: 21 .8% Bearing Ratio of Sample @ 0. 1" Pen. 10.0 Swell (Percentage of Initial Height) : 0.20% Surcharge: 15 lbs. Sample Type: Organic Black Stiff Clay rr CBR No. 2 (ASTM D1883) - North Parking Area @ -1 ' Below Rock Elevation Sample Condition: Soaked Dry Density Before Soak: 100.3 lbs./cu. ft. Moisture Content Before Soak: 21 .4% Moisture Content After Soak: 26.4% Bearing Ratio of Sample @ 0. 1" Pen. 13.0 Swell (Pecentage of Initial Height) : 0.506 Surcharge: 15 lbs. Sample Type: Black Stiff Clay The stiff black clay soils described in this report are a suitable material for pavement subgrade. Care should be taken not to pump or otherwise disturb soils during construction operations. If, during actual pavement construction, subgrade soils other than stiff black clays are encountered, then additional CBR testing should be done and pavement section design should be re-evaluated. If there are any further questions on this matter, please do not hesitate to contact our office. Very truly yours, CfLSON ESTJNG, INC Douglas W. Leach President +Yw rrr PART V TECHNICAL PROVISIONS �Yr fir 1r rr rr PART v TECHNICAL PROVISIONS TE... - INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01511 Temporary 01512 Temporary LightinglecElectricity 01011 Work Covered by 17 Contract Documents 01513 Temporary Heat & 01013 Owner Furnished Ventilation { Items & Services 01514 Temporary Telephone 01014 Future Work Service 01016 Contractor's Use of Premises 01515 Temporary Water 01090 Abbreviations 01516 Temporary Sanitary 01210 Preconstruction Conference Facilities 01310 Construction Schedule 01562 Dust Control 01340 Shop Drawings & Samples 01563 Water Control 01341 Manufacturer's Instructions 01580 Project Identification 01342 Material Orders 01590 Temporary Field Offices 01343 Evidence of Subcontracts 01700 Project Closeout & Other Contracts 01710 Cleaning Up & 01400 Quality Control Custodial Services 01720 Project Record Document 01725 Operating & Maintenance Data IVISION 2 - SITE WO K 02200 General Earthwork Requirements DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 02210 Site Grading 02220 Excavating & Backfilling 04001 General Masonry 02230 Soil Compaction Control 04100 Mortar & Grout 02510 Catch Basins 04220 Structural Clay Unit I 02520 Culverts (None) Masonry INI� 02612 Asphalt Concrete Paving (Owner) s 02620 Curbs & Pads pIVISION 5 - METALS Er : 02630 Walk & Exterior Slabs 05120 Structural Steel Framing 02635 Pavement Marking (Owner) 05500 Metal Fabrication 02710 Fences & Gates (Owner) 02750 Irrigation System (Owner) VISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 02810 Soil Preparation (Owner) -; 06110 Framing & Sheathing 06181 Glue-Laminated Structural Units DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 06190 Roof Trusses 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 06200 Finish Carpentry 03310 Standardweight Concrete 06201 Wood Trim 03356 Floor Slab Compound Curing, 06220 Millwork Cleaning & Surface Hardner 03370 Drypack & Grout t r r. DIVISIOq 7 - �RECT7AN - ECTAT OT 07171 Colorless Dam roofin CONSTRUCTION + 07210 Flexible Blanket Insulation None this Specification 07400 Metal Roofing Structural Clay DIVISION 14 - CO vnu 07500 Metal Soffit System SYSTEMS 07600 Sheet Metal Work None this Specification 07900 Sealants DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS See Division 15 for Index 08100 Hollow Metal Doors & Hollow Metal Frames DIVISION - 16 - ELECTRICAL 08120 Aluminum Doors & Aluminum Frames See Division 16 for Index 08150 Wood Doors 08330 Coiling Doors 08520 Aluminum Windows 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Glass & Glazing ++�+ DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09270 Gypsum Drywall Finishing 09280 Gypsum Plaster 09310 Ceramic Tile 09500 Acoustical Treatment „ 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring 09680 Carpeting 09900 Painting rr DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10110 Fire Extinguishers 10120 Folding Stairway 10130 Entrance Mats 10162 Metal Toilet Partitions 10441 Plastic Relief Signs 10810 Toilet Room Accessories rr, DIVISION 11 - EOUIPMENT 11000 Appliances DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12310 Prefabricated Plastic Laminate Casework 12510 Drapery Track w DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 01011 The work to be performed under these Contract Documents constitutes the whole of The Project except those excluded portions of the work of The Project specifically noted in the Contract Documents to be by Owner. OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS & SERVICES SECTION 01013 A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Owner will do following work of Project: ' a. Provide items indicated by Symbols "BO" and "NIC" and items indicated as "By Owner". Items thus indicated may or may not be purchased or installed before time of completion of Contract. b. Employ and pay for services for independent testing labora- tory to make compressive strength tests of concrete cylinders, per ASTM, of jobsite cast concrete work and precast structural concrete cast at jobsite or plant cast thus: (1) Each test will consist of 4 standard cylinders. In general, one test per 100 cubic yards of concrete and minimum of one test per days pour for each class of con- crete will be made. (2) For each test, 2 cylinders will be loaded to failure at 7 days and 2 cylinders loaded to failure at 28 days. (3) Furnish cylinder molds, shipping boxes and pay all shipping costs. (4) Compute compressive strength per ASTM. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing additional quality control by Contractor per Section 01400, Quality Control. b. Providing assistance to testing laboratory personnel for compressive strength tests per Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete. B. INSPECTION AND TEST RESULTS: 1. Testing laboratory will mail 4 copies of compressive strength test results of cylinder failure tests described per 01013-A. One of these copies to go to Contractor and 3 copies Architect. 2 . Conformance with or deviation from specified requirements will • be indicated in each laboratory and Inspector's report. 3 . Testing agency and Inspector will report to Architect deviations or conditions which may lead to deviations as soon as possible by telephone and Architect will take such timely action as he may deem appropriate. FUTURE WORK SECTION 01014 Owner requires the cooperation and coordination with Owner provided contract work at the site which will run concurrently with the work of r. the Contract. l-! CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES SECTION 01016 A. The term "site", as used in Paragraph 4 . 14, Use of Site, of General Conditions, means the area bounded by Work Limits shown. B. The term "premises" means the entire area within the fenced pro- perty lines shown bounding the Tigard Water District Operations Center. C. Drawings show the site to be an area smaller than the premises. D. Confine operations and storage of materials on the premises to area of site except as otherwise noted below. E. Protect premises beyond site areas and other adjacent property as required by Article 10 of General Conditions and as follows: 1. Carry out pumping, draining and control of surface and ground water so as to avoid endangering any adjacent portion of premises, facility or property or interrupting, restricting or otherwise infringing or interfering with the use thereof. 2. Notwithstanding the designation of work limits or the indication of temporary fences or barricades, provisions of Contract Documents governing certain portions of phases of work require that certain operations be carried out beyond such designated limits. Schedule trenching, utility work and all other work required beyond such designated limits in such a manner as to cause or occasion a minimum of inconvenience or disturbance to or interference with the normal operations of Owner, abutters and the public. Prosecute such operations expeditiously and restore affected area to original condition immediately upon completion of such operations. r ABBREVIATIONS SECTION01090 Reference to technical institutions, associations and similar organi- zations is made in the specifications in accordance with the following abbreviations: AA. . . . . Aluminum Associations AAMA. . . . Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association I ON AASHO . . . American Association of State Highway Officials ACI . . . . American Concrete Institute AGC . . . . The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. AIA . . . . American Institute of Architects. ++ AIA . . . . American Insurance Association (Formerly National Board of Fire Underwriters) AIEE. . . . American Institute of Electrical Engineers AIMA. . . . Accoustical and Insulating Materials Association AISC. . . . American Institute of Steel Construction AITC. . . . American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI. . . . American National Standards Institute (Formerly USASI) APA . . . . American Plywood Association ASHRAE. . . American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Condition- ing Engineers rw ASME. . . . American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM. . . . American Society for Testing and Materials AWI . . . . Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA. . . . American Wood Preservers Association AWS . . . . American Welding Society BHMA. . . . Builders Hardward Manufacturer's Association CBM . . . . Certified Ballast Manufacturers CS. . . . . Commercial Standard of U.S. Dept. of Commerce CSI . . . . Construction Specifications Institute ETL . . . . Electrical Testing Laboratories Fed. Spec . Federal Specifications FGMA. . . . Flat Glass Marketing Association ICBG. . . . International Conference of Building Officials IES . . . . Illuminating Engineering Society MLA . . . . Metal Lath Association MS. . . . . Military Specification NEMA. . . . National Electrical Manufacturers Assocations NFPA. . . . National Fire Protection Association NSF . . . . National Sanitation Foundation NWMA. . . . National Woodworking Manufacturers Association PS. . . . . Product Standard of National Bureau of Standards SCR . . . . Structural Clay Research SDI . . . . Steel Deck Institute SJI . . . . Steel Joist Institute SSPC. . . . Steel Structures Painting Council TECO. . . . Timber Engineering Company UBC . . . . Uniform Building Code of the International Conference of Building Officials UL. . . . . Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. WCLB. . . . West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WWPA. . . . Western Wood Products Association �-3 �a ALTERNATES OF PROJECT SECTION 01100 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES - None Proposed 01100-01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SECTION 01210 Preconstruction conference will be arranged as to exact time by Architect and shall be held within 7 days after award of Contract, or shortly thereafter. x CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE SECTION 01310 A. Within 30 days following award of Contract, provide Architect with a Time and Sequence Schedule outlining each phase of work. Make provisions in schedule for proper installation work of sub- contracts; indicate dates shop drawings and lists required per Section 01340 are to be submitted for Architect's review; and indicate dates and areas where permanent electrical subdistribution system and permanent heating and ventilating systems will be operative. JA B. If during construction it becomes evident that actual construction is not meeting construction schedule, Contractor shall, when directed by Architect in writing, furnish additional workmen and/or materials in order that construction schedule will be met. SHOP DRAWINGS & SAMPLES SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01340-01 A. Submit shop drawings, equipment lists and materials lists, in accordance with Subparagraphs 4.13.3 and 4. 13.4 of General Conditions, for checking by Architect. Submit four (4) copies containing all pertinent data and indicating name of project, supplier and manufacturer. Drawings to specifically relate to this project and show all pertinent relationships of items to place in which each is to be installed. Reference details to detail re- ference system on contract drawings. Drawings for any one classification of work, for example prefabricated casework or millwork, to be on one size sheet. Bind and index all submittals for equipment, materials and hardware items into brochure form. Submittals which Architect finds illegible or in poor order will be returned prior to Architect's checking. Drawings & Lists Required Metal Fabrications Finish Hardware Wood Trusses Toilet Compartments Glue Laminated Members Toilet Room Accessories Millwork & Custom Woodwork Prefabricated Casework Sheet Metal Work Automotive Lift 1-4 �, �r 01340-01 Aluminum Doors & Frames Electrical Distribution Plan Coiling Doors Metal Soffit Layout In addition to drawings and items listed above, see sections in Divisions 2 thru 14, Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, „ Electrical, for additional drawings and lists required for Architect's "shop drawing" approval. B. Satisfactory shop drawings and equipment brochures will be so identified by Architect and returned to Contractor. C. One copy of unsatisfactory submittals will be so identified and returned to Contractor. Required corrections shall be made and four (4) corrected copies resubmitted until Architect's approval is obtained. Only corrected and Architect approved copies shall be on project site. D. Approval of shop drawings and equipment brochures by Architect is general and does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for accuracy, dimensions, proper fitting of work, furnishing of materials or labor required by Contract and not shown on shop drawings or in brochures. Such approval shall not be construed as approval to depart from Contract requirements. SAMPLES 01340-02 A. Provide samples as indicated below and as required by other sections. B. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS: Size, shape and detailed instructions for production of samples are noted in sections relating to materials listed below. C. PLACE OF SUBMITTAL AND QUANTITY: Section Place of Material Number Submittal Number of Samples Machine staining of wood 06202 Owner's Office 3 Hardware 08710 Owner's Office 1 of each item requested by Architect Acoustical tile & board 09500 Owner's Office 1 of each type Carpeting 09680 Owner's Office 1 of each color Paint, stain & varnish 09900 Owner's Office 3 sets of each material on each substrate i; ka I-5 y 01340-02 jA D. SEQUENCE FOR SUBMITTAL: Samples of materials which are not factory finished are subject to adjustment in appearance by Architect. Submit such samples (or sample sets) in sequence of one at a time $ to permit Architect to state adjustments before submittal of additional samples. Allow minimum of one week for Architect's review of each sample from time of Architect's receipt of notifi- cation of readiness for examination of jobsite sample. E. CORRECTION OF WORK: Architect will compare work with approved samples and if, in Architect's opinion, product is not as good as sample, corrections shall be made per General Conditions, Article 13. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 01341 Where job specifications require products to be stored, mixed, handled, conditioned, applied, installed or cleaned in accordance with t,. manufacturer's instructions when job specifications do not cover all recommendations and instructions covered by manufacturer's printed product instructions or are contrary to them, submit four (4) copies of these product instructions and recommendations to Architect minimum of 21 days prior to product use. Indicate name of project and specifica- tion section number to which product relates. MATERIAL ORDERS SECTION 01342 A. Place orders for all materials not available from dealers stock and those which cannot be delivered to jobsite within 14 days of place- ment of order. Require subcontractors to do same. B. If requested by Architect, furnish evidence of above satisfactory to Architect. EVIDENCE OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS SECTION 01343 A. Furnish evidence satisfactory to Architect that Contractor has made direct contracts with Owner-Architect approved persons or organi- zation subcontracting, supplying materials and manufacturing items listed on proposal form. B. Present above required evidence, as nearly as possible, all at one time and promptly following award of Contract. QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01400 A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide quality control, in addition to obligations relative to quality control per General Condition Subparagraph 4.7 .2 (regarding laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of public authority bearing on performance of work) , as follows: I- (o Wr 01400 rr a. If laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested or approved, Contractor shall give Architect timely notice of date arranged so Architect may observe such inspection or testing. Contractor shall bear all costs of inspections, tests and approvals required by public authority. b. If Architect deems any work in progress or complete work to require unspecified inspection of testing, Architect will, upon authorization from Owner, instruct recognized testing laboratory to conduct such special inspection or testing. If same reveals a failure by Contractor to comply with requirements of Contract Documents, Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including Architect's additional services made necessary by such failure, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued, otherwise Owner shall bear costs of such unspecified inspection and testing. c. Neither observations of Architect in his administration of the Contract, nor inspections, test or approvals by persons other than Contractor shall relieve Contractor from his obligations to perform work in accordance with Contract Documents. d. Tests to determine fulfillment of specified soil, gravel, crushed rock fill and subgrade compaction and tests for 'I" compressive strength of concrete cylinders per Section 01013, Owner Furnished Items & Services, will be made by recognized testing laboratory selected by Architect as w Architect deems necessary. e. Cost of tests ordered by Architect for determination of ful- fillment of soil, gravel, crushed rock fill and subgrade compaction requirements will be paid by Owner for tests meeting specified compaction requirements and shall be paid by Contractor for each test which does not meet compaction specifications. f. When initial inspection or test data for tests ordered by Architect on work other than per "d" above indicate work does not meet specified requirements, subsequent reinspection, retesting and additional inspecting and testing as may be occasioned by indicated non-compliance, including inspection and testing of any replacement work, shall be performed by same testing agency which produced original data. Cost of all subsequent inspections and tests of work shall be borne by Contractor. g. Inspection or testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience is responsibility of Contractor. h. Secure and deliver quality verification certificates required for work of other divisions along with other record documents per Section 01700, Project Closeout. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing certain Owner procure compressive strength tests of concrete in Section 01013, Owner Furnished Items & Services. 1-7 iir il 01400 b. Providing field quality control of soil, gravel and/or crushed rock fills compaction in Section 02230, Soil Compac- tion Control. c. Providing certain required assistance and furnishing certain items of equipment for testing laboratories. B. INSPECTION AND TEST RESULTS: 1. Architect ordered inspections and tests: One copy of inspection report and test results made by testing laboratory will be made available to Contractor upon request when results of inspection or test indicate work meets specified requirements. One copy of results indicating work does not meet specified requirements will be presented to Contractor. Testing agency will be re- quested to report to Architect deviations or conditions which may lead to deviations as soon as possible by telephone and Architect will take such timely action as he may deem appropriate. 2. Inspections, tests and approvals required of Contractor by public authority: Furnish one copy of all written results to Architect. 3. Inspections, tests and approvals required of Contractor by other sections: Furnish original and copies per Section 01700, Project Closeout. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY SECTION 01511 Provide and maintain temporary electrical services for all building operations and make all arrangements with serving utility organization. Meet requirements of Subpart K, Electrical, of Federal Register, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction and keep copy of these requirements on the job and available to all associated with the work. Permanent electrical power system may be used for building operations after it has been inspected by appropriate governmental authority and made ready for use. Pay cost of all electric energy and for temporary electrical equipment for building operations. When temporary installa- tion is performed by subcontractors or others at General Contractor's request, General Contractor shall reimburse them for this work. TEMPORARY LIGHTING SECTION 01512 A. Provide and maintain temporary lighting for all building opera- tions. B. Materials used for temporary lighting to meet OSHA requirements of Section 01511, Temporary Electricity. C. Permanent lighting system may be used for lighting of building operations. I-8 01512 D. Pay cost of temporary lighting equipment used for building opera- tions. When temporary lighting installation is performed by subcontractor or others at General Contractor's request, General Contractor shall reimburse them for this work. TEMPORARY HEAT & VENTILATION SECTION 01513 A. Provide and maintain temporary p y e quipment, devices, piping, wiring, (including temporary wiring to new permanent heating and ventilating equipment) if used for temporary heat and/or ventilation and r enclosures for temperature and humidity control required by building operations where and when required until time stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion for Work in area covered by the certificate, except permanent heating and/or ventilating systems may be used to supplement temporary per paragraph B. B. New permanent heating and ventilation systems, or portions of these systems, may be used before time state in Certificate of Substan- tial Completion for temporary heat and ventilation, when judged operable by Architect, provided: 1. All operation and maintenance of new permanent equipment is accomplished by Mechanical Subcontractor only. 2 . All return openings are protected by temporary filter media. 3. Permanent filters in air handling units and unit ventilators used for heat and/or ventilation are replaced with temporary throw-away filters of equal filtration characteristics as permanent filters. 4 . Units are controlled manually and/or automatically to prevent excessive temperatures. 5. At time for air balancing work, permanent heating system used by Contractor for temporary heat and/or ventilation, including permanent filters, oiling reservoirs, etc. are in a clean, full and ready-to-operate condition. C. General Contractor shall pay mechanical subcontractor for operating and maintaining items fcr new permanent heating and ventilating systems for entire time these items are required for heat or ventilation; for furnishing all temporary materials and services as outlined in paragraph B above; and for rehabilitation of system components. Cost of fuel for firing new permanent and Contractor's temporary heating equipment shall be paid by General Contractor. D. Provide heat and ventilation in interior space prior to, during and after work is performed as follows: 1. Temperatures indicated are Fahrenheit degrees. Temperatures in table indicate minimum and maximum day and night ambient air temperatures anywhere in space, unless temperature is noted as slab temperature. 1-9 01513 Environmental Conditions Environmental Prior, During and After Conditions to l Installation Substantial Section Title Prior & Durina After (Days) Completion Days Min- Max Min. Min. Prior Temp Temp Temp. Gypsum Drywall Finishing 2 55-85 55 55 Ceramic Tile 2 50-80 50 50 Acoustical Treatment 1 60-90 60 55 4 Resilient Tile Flooring 2 70-85 70 55 Carpeting 1 70+ ** 70+ 55 4F Casework 1 70-85 70 55 ** 70 degree floor slab temperature, minimum. 2. Minimum temperatures of spaces in which above materials are to be stored: 40 degrees F. , except Resilient Tile Flooring to be 70 degrees F. and Casework 55 degrees F. 3 . Ventilation: Meet requirements Vol. 36, No. 75, Part II, and latest revisions. 4 . See specific sections for additional requirements for above and other materials. Other sections govern when more restrictive. TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE SECTION 01514 Provide and maintain one general job telephone for duration of work. Telephone accessible to all connected with work with toll charges paid by those responsible for same. TEMPORARY WATER SECTION 01515 Coordinate with Owner to provide and maintain temporary water service for all operations. Permanent water system may be used after it has been inspected and made ready for use. Cost of all paid for by Owner. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES SECTION 01516 Provide temporary toilets for use of all persons associated with the work. When water and sewer become available, provide temporary water closets. Facilities shall conform to regulations of State and Local Boards of Health. Before building completion, remove all traces of temporary toilet facilities. Owner's plumbing fixtures in Service Building, may be used under General Contractor's responsibility for maintenance and janitorial services. 1-10 DUST CONTROL SECTION 01562 lire 01562-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: For duration of Contract, protect persons and pro- perty, both on and off site, from injury and discomfort caused by dust produced as a result of the Work. B. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: Meet requirements fety and Health Regulations for Construction per Federal Registerawith regard to employees working environment. 01562-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: Use industry-accepted materials such as water, chemical treatment, light bituminous treatment or similar materials suitable for area involved which produce no detrimental effects on completed work. 01562-03 EXECUTION APPLICATION: Use industry-accepted methods appropriate to material Aw selected for each work area requiring dust control. WATER CONTROL SECTION 01563 01563-01 GENERAL irr A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide surface drainage within "Work Limits" during construc- tion in manner to avoid erosion and creating nuisance to adjacent site areas and neighboring g g property. If, at time of footing, foundation and catch basin construction or time of culvert and subdrain installation work, water table is high or bottoms of excavations have standing water or are too wet forproper soil compaction, lower water table by means of pumping, trenching below water table, or other means to insure proper soil compaction and placing of materials. 2. Related work in other section includes: a. Grading, excavating and trenching work per sections in Division 2. b. Trenching for mechanical and electrical work in Division 15 and 16. B. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Protection: Protect filter materials in subdrainage systems from mud flows and muddy water by positive means to prevent silting of filters. frr 2. Sequencing: Construct storm drainage systems at earliest practical time so as to receive surface drainage water. !Yr Yr 01563-02 PRODUCTS Materials and equipment for water control are Contractor's achoice, ping but materials used shall have no detrimental effects other work. J17 01563-03 EXECUTION A. PERFORMANCE: 1. Where practical, direct surface drainage into natural existing water courses and away from excavations until storm drains are installed. Control flow rate onto property of others within seasonal normal rate existing prior to work. After storm drains are installed, direct runoff into drainage system. Do not use foundation excavations or utility trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Remove all traces of temporary water control facility at earli- est practical date. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SECTION 01580 A. REQUIRED PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN: Furnish and install as and when directed by Architect a professionally made and lettered job sign as follows: 1. Size: 6' x 121 . 2 . Material: Waterproof 3/4" plywood and painted Fir framework and supports. 3. Text: Name of project, Owner, Major Contractors, Architect, ti Structural and Mechanical Engineers. B. No additional signs or advertisements may be place on building or grounds without specific permission from Architect and/or Owner, except safety signs required by regulatory agencies. TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES SECTION 01590 A. GENERAL: Provide temporary offices, storage sheds, plan sheds and other structures as required. Orient plan tables so plans conform to actual directions. B. FIELD OFFICE: None for Architect's personnel. PROJECT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01700 01700-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Furnish Owner all materials listed in 01700-02, executed per J1. 01700-03, and furnish all project record drawings. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Collection, maintenance, identification and recording of changes on project record documents at jobsite in Section 01720, Project Record Documents. I-t2 01700-01 b. Assembly, binding and indexing of operating and maintenance data and air balancing log in Section 01725, Operating and Maintenance Data, and in Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. B. SUBMITTAL: 1. Submit all required materials to Owner's office at one time, accompanied by Contractor signed letter of transmittal. Make submittal with or before final Application For Payment. 2. Submit operating and maintenance data and marked set of record tY drawings and modified "Ozalids" to Architect for review and approval, allowing time for revisions which Architect may require. 3. Submit three (3) bound sets of materials required per 01700-02-A. i„ 01700-02 PRODUCTS A. AFFIDAVITS, GUARANTEES, CERTIFICATES & RECEIPTS: Verify additional requirements as to type, quantity, guarantees foreriod greater than one year after date of Substantial Completion, etc. , with other portions of Contract Documents. I. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens and Payments of Debts and Claims. 2. Guarantees: a. Roofing Guarantees per Division 7, Thermal & Moisture Protection; twenty year guarantee for metal roof. b. General Sheet Metal Guarantee per Division 7; two year guarantee. Prepainted, galvanized sheet metal with "Duranar 200" finish; 20 year guarantee. 3. Certificates: a. Certificate of Occupancy per UBC. b. State Plumbing Certificate of Approval. c. Sanitary Authority Approval. d. Pressure Vessel Certificates. e. State Electrical Certificate of Approval. f. Glue Laminated Structural Members Certificates & Attachments iW per Section 06181. 4. Receipts: All receipts signed by Owner's authorized represen- tative. a. Master Key signed delivery receipts, when required per Section 08710. b. Copies of receipts for maintenance materials (extra stock) required to be turned over to Owner by Contractor. B. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: Materials from jobsite per Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 6W C. REPRODUCIBLE RECORD DRAWINGS: Provide one complete set of "Ozalid" transparency drawings revised to show mechanical and electrical work as actually installed and with indications of all deviations, additions and omissions from Contract drawings. Provide record drawings thus: 01700-02 1. Upon Contractor's request, Architect will make original, mechanical and electrical tracings available to any printing firm local to Owner's office. 2. Cost of printing "Ozalids" paid by Contractor. 3 . Have "Ozalids" made to original scale and be reverse readable erasable "Ozalid" transparencies having minimum background. 4 . Modify "Ozalids" by erasing and redrawing, employing same quality of draftsmanship as Architect's original drawings, using project record documents per Section 01720 as information source. Transfer all information from marked prints to "Ozalids". Reference dimensions and depths of buried items same as specified per 01720. 01700-03 EXECUTION A. Execute guarantees in writing and in favor of Owner. B. Bind affidavits, guarantees, certificates and receipts in order presented per 01700-02-A. C. Install each affidavit, guarantee, certificate, receipt and front index page in separate sheet protector, except more than one receipt may be included in one protector if not obscured by another. D. Index each binder by providing typed index page indicating every classification of items and tab each item within classification with typed insert at tab. E. LABELING: 1. Label both ends of drawing storage tubes and label front cover and back edge of binders with typed labels thus: a. Front cover: Name of project, Owner's name, Architect's name, Contractor's name and year of completion. b. Back edge: Name of project, name of Owner and year of completion. " c. Drawing tube: Name of project, year of completion. 2. Mark each sheet in lower right corner of margin Project Record Copy" . CLEANING UP & CUSTODIAL SERVICES SECTION 01710 01710-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Keep premises and other areas of Project free from unnecessary , accumulations of soil, waste materials and rubbish produced by construction. 2. Supervise, direct and accomplish cleaning and custodial services as specified below. Give general supervision to cleaning and 1- 14 01710-01 waste disposal of other sections. Leave Work "broom clean" or it equivalent, except as otherwise specified in this and other sections. 3. At completion of Work, leave adjoining properties as clean as would prevail in the absence of Work and remove tools, equip- ment, machinery and surplus materials. 4. Related work in other sections includes: a. Cleaning up wastes and tool removal in Execution part of other sections under "Cleaning" or "Adjust & Clean" articles. Verify with other sections. ,. b. Cleaning of mechanical equipment used for temporary heating and ventilation in Section 01513. c. Dust control in Section 01562. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualifications of cleaning personnel: Utilize only trained personnel, properly equipped or professional building cleaners experience in cleaning new construction. 2. Requirements of regulatory agencies: a. Meet housekeeping standards of AGC's "Manual of Accident w Prevention". b. Meet requirements of Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards, "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. c. Fire protection: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove daily or as required by governmental agency. d. Pollution control: Conduct clean-up and disposal operations to comply with local anti-pollution ordinances and laws. (1) Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on project site is not permitted. (2) Disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner) is not permitted in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways. C. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Protect surfaces from oil droppings. 2. Scheduling: w• a. Unless otherwise specified, "broom clean" work of an area immediately prior to more exacting cleaning operations specified for that area in other sections. b. Establish regular schedules for removal of garbage and oily, flammable or hazardous wastes. wrn 01710-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Clean with products recommended by manufacturer of material r. requiring cleaning. 2. When no product is recommended by manufacturer for material to be cleaned, use product recommended by cleaning product manu- facturer and use only on surfaces so recommended. it 01710-02 B. MIXES: Mix dilute or blend cleaning materials in strict accor- , dance with label instructions. t 01710-03 EXECUTION A. DURING CONSTRUCTION: 1. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building and grounds are main- tained free of accumulations of waste materials. 2 . Provide adequate number of suitable type containers at conven- ient locations for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris. 3 . Appropriately label containers for garbage and hazardous wastes. 4. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from Owner's property. Legally dispose of such unwanted materials. 5. Vacuum clean interior building areas when area is ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning painted areas on an as-needed basis until building area is ready for final cleaning. B. CLEANING FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION: Immediately prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, clean work to be inspected in following manner: 1. Vacuum all interior surfaces except glass. Vacuum interior ducts from grille or register to first obstruction in duct. Vacuum mechanical lofts. 2. Wash mirrors and all glass, interior and exterior. ., 3 . Wash hardware, plumbing fixtures, plastic laminate surfaces and painted woodwork. Remove merchandising labels. 4. Remove, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface requiring cleaning, stains, spots, marks, tarnish, fingerprints and matter of nature foreign to surface on which it occurs. 5. Hose down exterior slabs and paving and rake clean grounds. C. FINAL CLEAN-UP: After correction and completion of items found deficient from Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, promptly clean up to bring work to specified cleaning requirements. D. REMOVAL OF TOOLS, TEMPORARY FACILITIES, SURPLUS MATERIALS & TEMPORARY CONTROLS: 1. At completion of construction work, remove all tools, machinery, construction equipment and surplus materials belonging to Contractor and Subcontractors. 2 . When approved by Owner, remove following temporary facilities and controls: Field offices, telephones, project identification sign, dust control barriers, water system, sanitary facilities, heating and ventilating equipment. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 01720 A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Maintain project record documents at jobsite throughout con- struction period. Project record documents, called record I-16 �w 01720 y documents, project record documents or (where referring to architectural, mechanical or electrical drawings only) record drawings elsewhere in specifications, are produced by Contractor from Architect furnished items listed in B1 below. b" 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Production of reproducible record drawings and submittal procedures for project record documents in Section 01700, w Project Closeout. b. Additional requirements for recording of changes made during construction in sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and �Yr Division 16, Electrical. B. MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS: 1. Keep one copy of all following contract documents in one secure place: a. Drawings b. Specifications c. Addenda d. Written amendments to Contract e. Change Orders f. Architect written field orders, interpretations of drawings and specifications. 2. Identification marking of record documents: Clearly mark front cover and first page of specifications, first page of every Itr addendum and sheet of drawings thus: "Project Record Copy,,. 3. Condition and use of record documents: Maintain all project record documents in good, clean, neat condition, with binding intact. Do not use for construction. 4. Make project record documents available for Architect's obser- vations of general condition of maintenance, currency of marked changes and other requirements of this section. ;rw C. RECORDING OF CHANGES: 1. Mark architectural sheets to indicate: a. Significant changes made during construction process. b. Significant details not shown in original drawings. c. References to addendum items requiring changes in original drawings by showing addendum and item number on drawing at location indicated. 2. Mark mechanical and electrical sheets thus: a. Locations of internal utilities systems and appurtenances concealed in buildings, underground and underfloor work. Show sufficient information regarding piping, electrical raceways, cable runs, valves, vaults, pull boxes, clean-outs, `im stub-outs, roughing for future connection, wyes, tees, easements, connections to buildings, etc. , for future main- tenance and repair of systems by Owner. b. Reference dimension lines of utility systems and appur- tenances to adjacent tangible, accessible features of build- ing and site improvements, not to coordinates on original drawings. Indicate depth of buried utility systems and ;w associated buried appurtenance below floor, street, walk or finish grade. ■ 1- 17 01720 c. Reference all addendum items regarding drawings by indicating addendum and item number on drawings at references noted. 3. Record addendum items in record set of specifications and record drawings. Cement each addendum item to opposing page (back of preceding page) adjacent to original item in specifi- cation. Mark each addendum item with appropriate addendum number. 4. Mark up the most appropriate record document to show significant field order changes and all change order cheanently conceal 5. Keep records of changes currents. Do not p any work until required information has been recorded. OPERATING & MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01725 A. GENERAL: og and catalog 1. Deliver to Owner required operating, maintenance aliccatal for data with letter of transmittal upon or before app f final payment. 2. See Division 15 and 16 for additional requirements regarding operating and maintenance data. B. SUBMITTAL: Submit per Section 01700, Project Closeout. C. MATERIALS: List of required data: 09680, Carpeting. 1. Carpet Maintenance Manual per Section 2. Automotive Hoist: Include manufacturer's instructionsfor operation and maintenance. List each item requiring periodic inspection, lubrication and service and describe performance of such maintenance. Suggest schedule for maintenance and indi- cate type of lubricant required and frequency. Include catalog data and parts lists with specific model identified; list of any parts as published by manufacturer showing part, part number, ordering information and nearest parts stock. 3. Heating and Ventilating Operating and Maintenance Instructions, Equipment Data and Wiring Diagrams per Division ler Division 15. 4. Air Balancing Log, when balancing is specified, p 5. Electrical Equipment Operating and Maintenance Instructions and Wiring Diagrams per Division 16. D. QUANTITY: Provide three (3) bound sets of data. E. FORM FOR SUBMITTAL: leaf hard cover binders. 1. Bind all data in new loose 2. Index each binder by providing index page indicating every classification of items and tab at each item within classi- f ication. 3 . Bind each of following groups of items into separate looseleaf binders: 4W a. Architectural items: Bind in same numerical order as specification sections. b. Mechanical items: Bind in same numerical order as specification sections. c. Electrical items: Bindin same numerical order as specification sections. I- IB � rr DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK wrr SECTION 02200 - DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK GENERAL EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS 02200 - 01 GENERAL a. Description: 1 . This section specifies requirements common to work of all sections numbered between 02200 and 02501 , each of which' presents more specific earthwork requirements. These common requirements regard: a. Staking out building and site work. b. Protection of existing utilities and property surrounding and adjacent to earthwork operations. C. Work at uncompactable soil . d. Quality assurance and product storage and handling. w. 2 . This section includes work to be provided by the owner: +pw a. Prior to the start of construction (by the contractor) : aw 1 . The existing subsurface soils have been determined (by Carlson Testing Laboratories) to have insufficient bearing capacity for building foundations and floor slabs . The owner will ' provide excavation , fill and compaction in accordance with Carlson Testing Lab ' s recommendations to obtain a minimum soil bearing ,.. of 2000 PSF . This work is anticipated to be performed in May, 1988. b. During construction; requiring the cooperation " of, and coordination with the General Contractor: 1 . Site Grading, Section 02210 . Owner will 6' provide placing and compaction of imported granular fills throughout site outside of building foundations as required for site drainage and paving. Contractor will provide all trenching and compaction for underground utilities, catchbasins : concrete curbs , walks , driveway aprons, screenwall foundation, a/c and transformer pads, etc. This list may not be all-inclusive of requirements shown elsewhere in drawings and specs. 2-I Page 2 Section 02200 2 , Asphalt Paving: Section 02612 : Owner will ' provide aggregate base, asphalt concrete topping - Section 02635. Contractor and pavement marking will coordinate curb and pidconcretes f latwork as required. 3 . Owner will provide : irrigation system- Section 02750 , topsoil - fill , g fl preparation - Section 02810 and trees, shrubs and ill groundcovers - Section tubs830.for watertservicewill and provide and coordinate roved power at locations shown on the plans and app by the owner. 3 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Contractor' s use of premises in Section 01016. b. Temporary facilities and controls , such as temporary dust and water control in 01500 sections. C. Earthwork of Division 15 , Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical . b, Quality Assurance: 1 . Requirements of regulatory agencies: a. Work in public right-of-way: Provide earthwork required in public right-of-way per requirements of governmental body having jurisdiction, but requirements per sections in Division 2 are minimum, if not prohibited, where governmental body' s requirements are lower . b. Safety : Meet current governmental requirements for safety of persons and property and earthwork p current Chapter for "Excavation Work" of Oregon Safety Code for Places of Employment . 2-2 � rr it yr Page 3 Section 02200 2 . Design, engineering and construction methods, temporary bracing , shoring , underpinning , sheeting , etc . , are responsibility of Contractor . If Contractor deems any work beyond own capability, Contractor shall retain, at own expense, services of qualified soils consultant on all construction techniques involved, including design, checking and approval of temporary bracing , shoring , underpinning and other items pertinent to work, and on construction methods for solution of problems that may be encountered. Soils consultant to advise on construction methods to prevent settlement and/or damage to surrounding structures , roads , utilities and embankments on Owner ' s property and adjoining property. C. Product Delivery, Storage & Handling: 1 . Keep graded-to-size fill and backfill materials from w+ becoming intermixed and mixed with soil . 2 . Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. d. Job Conditions: 1 . Existing grades : Existing grades indicated at iW unimproved site areas where earthwork is required are believed reasonably correct; i .e. correct enough to cause no extra expense to Contractor . If existing grades significantly deviate from grades shown as existing, notify Owner before proceeding. 2 . Excavating, trenching and water control : Coordinate control of subsurface and surface run-off water, specified in 6W Section 01563 , to minimize wetting of excavation bottoms. If a spring or running subsurface water is found, notify Owner before proceeding. 3 . Protection of utilities : a. Known utilities : Utilities such as conduits, kw powerpoles, light poles and piping on and in immediate vicinity of site are shown. Keep active and inactive utilities intact . If active utility is damaged by Contractor, immediately deactivate utility and repair damage and reactivate. If utility shown to remain is damaged by Contractor, Contractor shall restore damaged utility to condition acceptable to utility Owner without compensation. 2-3 4 v Page 4 Section 02200 b. Unknown utilities: Any active utilities found and not shown are to remain as active utilities . If unknown utility is damaged by Contractor, Contractor , shall notify Owner immediately , then repair as directed. Compensation for repair will be made at rates approved by Owner. Compensation will be made for extra expense incurred in protecting and maintaining utility not shown on drawings. C . Keep subcontractors and other contractors operating on and adjacent to Project informed of exact locations of buried utilities which may be damaged by their operations. Determine from other contractors on and adjacent to Project locations of buried utilites and services which may be damaged by your operations. Note and date this information on Record Drawings. 02200 - 02 PRODUCTS a. Materials: i1 1 . Stakes and batter boards : As Contractor selects to produce rigid installations. 2 . For use in public right-of-way : As required by governmental body having jurisdiction when superior to material specified in Division 2 . 02200 - 03 EXECUTION a. Performance : 1 . Layout and staking: a. Locate and stake out corners and lines of new building, structures, curbs and other site improvements to guide all trades. b. Locate and mark elevations from permanent ; reference marking. 2 . Batter boards: Provide and maintain batter boards at principal corners of structures. 2-4 � aw iW Page 5 Section 02200 3 . Records: pr a. Record on "Record Drawings" locations of existing utilities encountered which were not shown or not r. correctly shown on drawings. b. Indicate all significant changes in lines, levels and locations of improvements on Record Drawings and inform subcontractors of such changes as they occur. Indicate extent and type of substitute granular fills when soils too moist for compaction are found. b. Remove batter boards , layout stakes and other temporary guide markings before Substantial Completion. !.n �Irn WW yrr Orr 6W 2.5 YA SECTION 02210 - SITE GRADING 02210 - 01 GENERAL a. Description: 1 . Work of section requires placing and compaction of soil ; placing and compaction of imported granular fills within building areas if moisture content of on-site subsoil cannot be properly controlled; and rough grading of areas to receive slabs, walks, curbs, all within "Grading Limits" shown. No grading per this section to occur more than 2 ' into planting areas. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing dust control in Section 01562 ; and water control in Section 01563 . b. General earthwork requirements in Section 02200. C. Providing soil compaction control to requirements of this section in Section 02230. d. Providing excavation and backfill for mechanical and electrical work in Division 15 and 16. (Gravel by owner) . 3. Definitions: a. Finished grade : Term "finished grade" means required elevation on top surface of soil , pavement or other surfacing material at completion of work. Terms "finish grade" , "finished grade" and "new grade" are synonymous. To "finish grade" means to bring required materials to such elevations. „a b. Subgrade: Term "subgrade" means that surface of sod or cut-to-grade earth in its original undisturbed condition or surface compacted condition on which sub- base, base, underslab fill, topsoil, disturbed subsoil or a course of other material is to be placed; the lowest grade reached during stripping and cutting operations and grade on surface of compacted cuts. 2-` Page 7 Section 02210 rr+ C. Planned subgrade: Term means that grade elevation on earth , sod or granular fill replacement for uncompactable soil which drawings and/or specifications require at indicated distance below finished grade elevation. d. Planting area : Term ' "Planting area" means all io areas within "Grading Limits" not occupied by building, graveled yard, pavement, walk, slab or curbs. b. Allowable Tolerances: 1 . Planned subgrade level tolerances: a. Inside building areas: + 0. 10 of one foot . b. Outside building areas: + 0. 15 of one foot . 1�r 2 . Spot elevations take precedence over contours. 02210 - 02 PRODUCTS rr a. Materials: 1 . Imported Granular Fill : 3/4"-1k minus well graded washed or unwashed gravel or well graded pit run gravel . WW Granular fill to contain not more than 5% minus. (owner provides) b. Mixes: Mix subsoils of differing natures for use in fills inside building areas to give uniform composition to fill in any one area, but do not use rock-like subsoil containing pieces over 3" in any dimension. 02210 - 03 EXECUTION r. a. Performance: 1 . Rough grading: (By Owner) a. Rough grading inside building areas : (By owner) r. �"' 2-7 Page 8 Section 02210 ( 1 ) Areas requiring cut : After cutting, compact top 6" of soil to 98%. ( 2 ) Areas requiring fill : Compact subgrade to 98% and place on-site subsoil fill, when suitable for compaction to 98%, in 6" (max. ) deep loose lifts and compact each lift to 98%. b. Rough grading outside building areas which are not planting areas (by Owner ) : Bring grade to planned subgrade levels per (3) below, thus: ( 1 ) Areas requiring fill : (a) Place subsoil fill material in lifts not to exceed 6" in uncompacted depth and compact each lift to 95% under areas to receive concrete walks, slabs, gravel and bituminous pavement . (b) Planting areas: Do no grading at these areas under work of this section. See Section 02810, Soil Preparation. ( 2) Area requiring cut : Grade to planned subgrade levels except in landscape planting areas. (3) Planned subgrade levels: (a) 8 " below pavement top at areas to receive passenger vehicle asphalt concrete paving; 10" below pavement top at areas to receive truck pavement ; and 6" below pavement top at sidewalk paths. (b) 4 " below concrete top at areas to receive concrete paving. (c) No grading work per this section at planting areas shown on Landscape Planting Plan. b. Field Quality Control : Meet soil compaction requirements in Section 02230. 2.0 w. 1rr SECTION 02220 - EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 022201 - 01 GENERAL a. Description: 1 . Excavate and trench for footings , piers , walls , and for catch basins. Trench for culverts. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Site grading in Section 02210. See 02210-01-a2 for other related work in other sections. *W b. Excavation , trenching and backfill for work relative to mechanical or electrical trades: yw ( 1 ) By Mechanical Subcontractor: All required for own work and as specified in Division 15 . ( 2 ) By Electrical Subcontractor : All required aw for own work and as specified in Division 16 . C. Soil compaction control requirements in Section 02230 . d. Providing backfill for catch basins in Section 02510. (By owner) . e. Providing bedding and backfill for culverts in Section 02520. (By owner) . f . Providing rock or gravel base for asphalt concrete paving and gravel work for graveled storage yard in Ii4v Section 02612 . (By owner) . 3 . Definitions: a. Gravel : Crushed or uncrushed material from water or glacial deposited accumulations of mineral matter having rounded or subrounded surfaces. for b. Rock: Crushed or uncrushed material from natural deposits of solid mineral matter or from natural deposits of weathered mineral matter having angular surfaces. C . See 02210-01-a3 for additional definitions. ow 6 2-9 Page 10 Section 02220 b. Quality Assurance: 1 . Allowable tolerances: a. For subgrade under underfooting crushed rock: +0. 10' from elevation shown. b. For footing level planned subgrade: +0. 10 ' from elevation shown. C. For curb bottom planned subgrade: +0. 10 ' from required level . d. For underslab fills : +0 . 00 to -0 . 05 ' from required elevation at top of crushed rock fill . 2 . Source quality control : a. Fill materials are subject to quality control testing by qualified laboratory selected by Owner and paid for by Owner . Test results and laboratory recommendations available to Contractor. C. Job Conditions: 1 . Protection: a. Permit no mixing of gravel and rock materials with soil . b. Have trenching and backfilling for utilities and other services below planned subgrade level completed before placing underslab fill . Where necessary to excavate below planned subgrade after underslab fill is placed, place excavated soil in container , not on underslab fill. C. Allow concrete to age sufficiently to resist fill pressures without damage. Brace concrete where fill is required on only one side. Place and compact fills simultaneously where both sides of concrete require backfill . ' 2-10 frr Page 11 w► Section 02220 2 . Immediately notify Owner of rock conditions not shown +rr on drawings and soft spots at footing depth. 3 . Judge unnoted footing depths to be same as depth noted for nearest footing with same function. 4 . Supervise and coordinate work of backfilling and compaction of trenches made by mechanical subcontractor and by electrical subcontractor. �ibw 02220 - 02 PRODUCTS a. Materials: (Owner provides all gravel and crushed rock) . iW 1 . Underslab fill : a. Interior slabs: Clean, washed, crushed rock (not ° " gravel) , graded 3/4" minus having maximum of 5% (by dry weight) passing No. 200 sieve. Mir b. Exterior slabs and walks: Subsoil or same crushed rock as for interior underslab fill . When subsoil will not suitably compact : Imported granular fill w replacement material for uncompactable soil per 02210- 01-a4 . C . Transformer pads: Coarse concrete aggregate of i+ crushed gravel per ASTM. 2 . Foundation backfill : Subsoil from on-site excavations suitable for required compaction, free of debris, combustibles, wood , sod , roots , cellulose and rock-like material . If such subsoil is not available, substitute interior underslab fill on interior face of foundation walls and imported granular fill material per 02210-02-a4 at exterior. 3 . Engineered backfill under and beside footings : Crushed wr rock ( not gravel ) meeting requirements of " Standard Specifications for Highway Construction" , Oregon latest edition and Carlson Testing Lab recommendations. w 4 . Trench backfill : Same material as required immediately adjacent to trench excavation at same stratum, except : a. Engineered backfill per 113" above at culverts. taw, Page 12 l- Section 02220 02220 - 03 EXECUTION a. Performance : 1 . Excavation: a. Excavate for poured-in-place concrete in contact with ground; underslab fills at transformer pad and catch basins; engineered granular fills under footings. b. Excavate to lines and levels shown. C . Excavate sufficient distance from formed concrete to allow for placement and removal of forms. d. Hand clean footing excavations made by machine or hand to remove all loose or disturbed material from „$ sides and bottom of excavation . Make bottoms for footings level . 2 . Trenching: a. Allow minimum of 3" over excavation depth for bedding of lines. 3 . Backfill and compaction: a. Over-excavated footings: ( 1 ) Accidental and necessary for removal of large rocks removed by "ordinary methods" : Backfill with 2500 psi concrete or increase depth of footing or height of foundation wall without additional expense to Owner. (2) Engineered underfooting backfill : If soil is not too damp, compact top 6" of footing excavation bottom to 98%. Backfill with specified imported material to level of bottom of footing. Place backfill in lifts not exceeding 3" in depth and compact each lift with minimum of 4 passes of hand operated vibratory plate compactor providing minimum of 10 psi of force at 4500 VPM. 2-12 err 'Aw Page 13 NoSection 02220 ""' b. Foundations : After final inspection of all specified subgrade work remove all debris, forms and perceptible organic matter , then backfill with specified backfill material in lifts not exceeding 6" in uncompacted depth. Compact each lift with minimum of 4 passes of hand operated vibratory plate compactor providing minimum of 10 psi of force at 4500 VPM. C. Interior underslab fill : Fill , over previously compacted planned subgrade , to level required for bottom of concrete on-grade slabs with specified crushed rock. Compact with minimum of 4 passes of vibratory roller type compactor to impose impact force of at least 400 pounds per inch of drum width. MW d. Exterior underslab fill : ( 1 ) Concrete walk and slab underslab fill : Where required by lowness of prepared subgrade, fill with subsoil when not too damp to compact to 95%. Compact subsoil to 95% when possible or substitute underfooting backfill material thoroughly compacted in separate lifts not exceeding 6" in compacted depth. (2 ) Transformer pad underslab fill : Fill , over compacted planned subgrade, with 6" of specified gravel . Compact same as for interior underslab fill and air-conditioning pad. b. Field Quality Control : Per requirements for soil compaction rrr specified in Section 02230. to 1Yr 2- 13 x SECTION 02230 - SOIL COMPACTION CONTROL 02230 - 01 GENERAL a. Description: 1 . Provide soil compaction control v l earthwork operations to assure compaction of soil , gravel , the granular tions fills to specified densities. WhereeY°centa ecmeans require compaction to a stated percentage , p g percent of maximum density obtainable int Quality Assurance optimum moisture content determined by standards noted Supervise compaction ofsurgranular rofills ugh not tspec onified compacted to stated percentage 2 . Related work in other sections includes: F; a. General requirements for quality control in Section 01400 , Quality Control . b. General earthwork requirements in Section 02200 , including detection of uncompactable soil . C. Performance of certain earthwork compaction in other earthwork sections of Division 2 . d. Performance of earthwork compaction for mechanical and electrical work installations specified in Divisions 15 and 16. b. Quality Assurance: 1 . Soil compaction test : Standard Proctor Test , AASHO. 2 . Allowable tolerances: a. From optimum moisture content : + 3%. b. From specified percent compaction: 5915 greater and 2% less. C . Job Conditions: 1 . when soil specified compacted to stated percentage as e too high a moisture content to compact to p percentage and drying is practical , dry such soil by discing, scarifying or other appropriate means. 2 . When soil specified compacted to a stated percentage has too low a moisture content, wet soil during placement . 3 . Do no filling or compacting during freezing weather or with material containing frost or ice. 2-14 w Wer Page 15 Section 02230 02230 - 02 PRODUCTS bw a. Materials : wr 1 . Materials requiring controlled compaction are specified in other earthwork sections. a" 2 . Water for addition to too dry soil is specified in Section 01515 , Temporary Water . b. Mixes: Procedures for adjusting water content in soils are .. Contractor ' s responsibility. r 02230 - 03 EXECUTION a. Preparation: 60 1 . Methods for control of soil compaction to produce specified soil densities are Contractor 's responsibility. If Contractor deems work beyond own capability, retain services of +wr qualified soils consultant to advise on solutions to anticipated problems. 2 . Remove noticeable quantities of organic matter from on- site backfill material required for use under structure, slabs and paving. b. Field Quality Control : 1 . Make tests or otherwise determine that soil and granular fill compaction work meets specified requirements. 2 . Tests will be made by recognized testing laboratory to !r determine fulfillment of soil compaction requirements. 3 . See Section 01400 for responsibilities for costs of field quality control tests. Oirr r 2-15 it SECTION 02510 - CATCH BASINS 02510 - 01 GENERAL a. Description: 1 . Provide catch basins shown on architectural drawings. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Excavation for catch basins in Section 02220 , Excavating & Backfilling. b. Providing piping shown only on mechanical drawings from catch basins is in Division 15, including long sweep cast iron pipe entering catch basins connected to other piping shown on mechanical . b. Quality Assurance : Qualified manufacturers: ` Lynch Co. , Inc . or equal , prefabricated catch basin of 1/4" stee ate in same size as shown or next larger Lynch size , with Lynch' s Portland City Code grates, may be substituted for units shown ' when modified to include grate hold down features and 3/4" side inlet holes per details. 02510 - 02 PRODUCTS a. Materials: 1 . Catch basins : Size 24" x 24" x 36" deep , unless otherwise noted on drawings. Provide all sides of catch basins with 3/4" holes at 6" o. c. located 7" down from top of grating. . 2 . Concrete for hold down pad: Any grade of standard- weight aggregate concrete called for on project , with or without admix, per Section 03310 , Standardweight Concrete . 3 . Asphalt Coating: Meet requirements of Fed. Spec . SS- 5-701 . Flintkote "Asphalt Primer" or approved equal . 4 . Backfill : Imported granular fill , same as per 02210- 02 . b. Fabrication: 1 . Weld tank to provide watertight construction. 2 . Apply 1 one 10 mil or heavier coat of asphalt , inside and out , to tank body after fabrication. Z-1h �w air Wr No Page 17 Section 02510 r 02510 - 03 EXECUTION a. Preparation: 1 . Compact subgrade with minimum of 4 operated vibratory plate compactor passes of hand force at 4500 VPM. P Providing minimum of 10 psi it 2 . Place granular fill in approximately 6" lifts and compact each lift same as for subgrade. Bring granular fill to �r level shown. b. Installation: i. 1 . Install catch basins on concrete support concrete has reached initial set, correct to leve of pad before grate shown grades shown or required by paved surface . 6W 2 . Backfill around catch basins with same material as adjacent material at same level . Place all backfill in 6" lifts and compact same as specified for subgrade. After backfilling to tow level of bottom of mechanical work drain line trench at catch basins, permit installation of section of drain lines entering catch basin, then complete backfill work. iW 4W f L. �r ' 2-17 SECTION 02620 - CURBS AND PADS 02620 - 01 GENERAL a, Description: 1 , Provide poureair-conditioning andttransformermasonry screen-wall footings and (including pads for mailbox and sign) . 2 , Related work in other sections includes: a. Excavation for poured-in-place curbs in Section 02220, Excavating & Backfilling. b. Furnishing of reinforcing steel in Section 03200 , Concrete Reinforcement . 3 . Quality assurance: a. Requirements of regulatory agencies : ct Per requirements of governmental agency having j where curbs are in public right-of-way. b. Allowable tolerances: Same requirements as for walks and exterior slabs per Section 02630. 4 . Job conditions: Curing and weather protection same as Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete. 02620 - 02 PRODUCTS a. Materials: 1 . For poured-in-place concrete curbs, masonry screen-wall footings and air-conditioning and transformer pads. (including pads for mailbox and sign) . or higher grade , standardweight a, 3 , 000 psi , concrete with admix and curing compound per Section 03310. b, Reinforcing steel : Grade 40 steel . C . Control Joints : 1 / 4 " thick , preformed , nonextruding , resilient type meeting requirements of ASTM. 4i( /yy � iV tow Yr tier Page 19 �"" Section 02620 02620 - 03 EXECUTION a. Installation: l�rr 1 . Poured-in-place curbs, masonry screen-wall footings and air-conditioning and transformer pads, incl. mailbox and sign. a. Construct curbs abutting areas shown to receive asphalt concrete paving and pads per details. " b. Form cast-in-place concrete per requirements of Section 03100 and place reinforcingsteel per 03200-03 . C. Install control joint material full width and from W bottom of curb section to 3/8" from top of section. Control joints to occur at intervals of approximately 1 . it d. Extend continuous rebar 6" through control joints. Cap projections with dowel tubes or install 2 - #5 x 12 " long rebar dowels placed top and bottom between 6' curb rebars, within 1" of curb rebar, 5 1/2" embedded directly into concrete at one side of control joint and 1 6W 6" encased in dowel bar tube at other side. e. Float finish curbs and padg. f. Coordinate with heating contractor to determine where holes for refrigerant lines are to be located on air-conditioning pad. iW g. 4" curbs in shower room (part of Room 205) and hose-off booth (part of Room 207) shall be poured at same time as floor slab. h. Depressions in concrete for entrance mats shall be provided at Doors 1, 2, 27 and 31. itrr ir. 21- 19 SECTION 02630 - WALKS & EXTERIOR SLABS 02630 - 01 GENERAL A. Description: 1 . Provide exterior walks, slabs, curbs at walk edges and foundations. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Preparation of earth sub-grade to .receivePreparation and slabs in Section 02210, Site Grading. of un Pstn02at areas noted n 0 _ l b&c is inar22003, Execution, oExcavating & Backfilling. b. Providing curbs and pads in Section 02620. C. Furnishing reinforcing bars and mesh in Section 03200 , Concrete Reinforcement . b, Quality Assurance: 1 . Requirements of regulatory agency: Same as per 02200- 01-b. 2 . Allowable tolerances: From design plane: Within 1/16" + in 6 ' radius . Departure of edges , permanent screeds and control joints mand not more than 1/8' in any sore design . o 3; ed 1 . 1/4" in any run of 10 ' o C. Job Conditions: Protect from weather same as for interior slabs per 03310-03 . ,a t 2-20 Ww rr Page 21 Section 02630 02630 - 02 PRODUCTS a. Materials: 1 . Concrete : 3 , 000 psi standardweight concrete with air- entrainment, admix and curing same as per Section 03310. i. 2 . Control joint : a. Preformed non-metallic material , keyed type . Plastic Products Co . 3 1/2 " x 1 1/2" , black color, joint if left in place. 3 . Reinforcing steel : ikw a. Bars: Grade 40. rr b. Mesh: 6 x 6 10/10 W.W.M. Furnished per Section 03200. 4 . Cleaner for broom finished concrete to receive surface " hardener: Process Solvents Co. , or equal. b. Mixes: 2" - 4" slump. rr 02630 - 03 EXECUTION a. Preparation : Immediately before placing concrete , thoroughly dampen soil subgrade to approximately 1" depth, but do not wet to point where water stands on subgrade . tir b. Installation: ft 1 . Walk and slab thickness: Minimum 411 , unless otherwise shown, except 5 1/2" thick at edges abutting yards , 6" at transformer and a/c pads and driveway aprons, incl. mailbox and sign. 2 . Slope : Slope to side for drainage minimum 1/4" per foot , unless otherwise shown. Make drainage slopes, where not indicated, away from structure where paving abuts structure. rr yr �r 2-2► �a Page 22 Section 02630 3 . Control joints : Provide full width of concrete section and with permanent portion of plastic joint , if used, from bottom of section to 1/2" - 3/4" below top of concrete. If slab areas between control joints are poured and finished alternately, control joint material may be removed before pouring intervening slabs. 4 . Reinforcing: a. Mesh: Install at 1" down from top of slab. b. Bars: Install at 18" o.c.e.w. , unless otherwise shown, where shown. 5 . Concrete placing: a. Same as for interior floor slabs on grade per 03310-03-b1 . Vibrate per 03310-03-b2 . Do not "jitterbug" . b. Depositing concrete : Deposit on previously prepared subgrade which is free of standing water and rhandling , disturbing frozen material • Minimizeand permanente Re foreign screeds. No subgrade , foreign matter permitted in concrete. C . Screeding: Strike off areas of pavement as many times and at intervals necessary to give thorough compaction and to leave surface of uniform texture, true to grade. Throughout the first pass of striking of bar , maintain a uniform ridge of concrete aermittedbar for its entire length. No "wet screeding p d. Vibration and hand tamping: Vibrate at faces of forms and screeds , without contacting either with vibrator , and without disturbing reinforcing bars and/or subgrade . Do hand spading with shovels, not rakes. ilk 6 . Concrete finishing: a, Broom finishing (after steel troweling) : Broom perpendicular to main direction of pedestrian travel . Broom with plastic bristle broom to fine-textured finish. b. Float finishing: Float finish vertical and near vertical surfaces. 2-22 1 IYr lir Page 23 low Section 02630 C. After concrete has set enough to hold impression, r.. tool outside slab edges and scored joints. 8 . Trowel finishing: Steel trowel finish transformer pad same as interior floor slabs per 03310-03-b4 . 9. Concrete curing: Same as per 03310-03-c1 . C . Patch and Correct Defects: 1 . Saw or grind to acceptable alignment edges of walks and slabs which exceed specified tolerances. 2 . Replace slabs and walks which do not meet drainage slope requirements ; or have defective broom finish or trowel finish which cannot be corrected or which Contractor elects not to correct ; or have permanent screed, control joints, and/or edges which cannot be brought within specified alignment; or have it excessive craze or plastic shrinkage cracks or discoloration due to improper curing procedures. d. Cleaning: Same as per 03310-03-f2 where surface hardener is required at broom finished concrete. Clean before application. ir w fir 6 2-2 5 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 03100-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide temporary formwork, form coatings, release agents, ties and accessories, unless otherwise specified in this or other sections. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing concrete curbs and concrete pads in Section 02620. b. Providing walks and exterior slabs, including control joints in exterior walks and slabs in Section 02630. c. Furnishing structural steel columns with shop attached bases for embedding in concrete in Section 05120. d. Furnishing bent-to-angle shape anchor bolts for securing wood framing to concrete in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. e. Providing hangers, inserts, sleeves and similar accessories for mechanical and electrical work; coring of concrete for work of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical; and providing concrete formwork for mechanical and electrical items shown only on mechanical and electrical drawings. 3 . Definitions: a. Exposed concrete: Concrete surfaces painted, color coated, colorless dampproofed or exposed-to-view of persons other than maintenance personnel. b. Concealed concrete: Concrete surfaces concealed to extent greater than "a" above. iw B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Design standards: Engineering and construction methods are Contractor's responsibility, but ACI, "Recommended Practice for r. Concrete Formwork", Chapter 1 - Design, are minimum require- ments. 2 . Allowable tolerances: Per ACI, "Suggested Tolerances" except modify tolerances as indicated below: a. Dimensions shown below followed by +/- sign indicate toler- ance to both sides of design surface. b. Set and maintain screeds and forms to insure complete work aw within tolerance limits. c. Variations from plumb: (1) In lines and surfaces of piers and walls: 1/4" per 101 , but not more that 3/8" in any 201 , and not more than 5/8" in 40' or more. (2) For exposed control joint grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in any bay or 20' and 3/8" in 40' or more. d. Top surface of floors: No deviation form design surface more that 1/8" +/- in any 101 . 1/4 +/- in any bay or 201 ; 7/16" 6"" +/- in any 40' or greater distance. C. SUBMITTALS: Formwork drawings are not required for Architect's approval. 3-1 03100-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: i 1. Temporary forms: To provide concrete surfaces, including surface at joints in form face material, per following performance requirements: a. Exposed concrete: As smooth and free of surface irregulari- ties as veneer of sanded "Plyform" with B veneer face grade per APA Product Standards. b. Concealed concrete: Surface irregularities not exceeding 1/8" in 12" . 2 . Ties and accessories: Drawings govern where shown. a. Ties: Contractor's option as to type for all concrete. b. Accessories: (1) Form panel joint tape: Moka "Polysealing" cloth tape or Burke "Vinyl Foam Tape for Architecturally Finished Concrete" . (2) Slab control joints: (a) Interior covered on-grade slabs: 24 gage x 5 1/211 : Burke "Keyed Kold Joint", Jahn Forming System, "Vulco" , or wood formed to same profile as prefabri- cated brands if slabs are poured in alternating panels and wood is removed before abutting pour is placed. (b) Interior uncovered slabs: Plastic Products Co. 3 1/2" x 1 1/2" plastic joint, black or gray. Dis- tributed by Madden Construction Supply. (3) Slab isolation joints: 90 lb./square roofing cap sheet. (4) Pads between top of foundation walls and floor slabs: 1 1/2" thick "Styrofoam" . 3 . Form coatings and release agents: a. Contractor's choice except where paint, color or colorless coating, dampproofing, sealant, waterproofing or adhesive is JAl required use non-staining, non-corrosive materials having no detrimental effect. b. Release agents: Concrete deadener type, such as Burke's "Burke Release" . B. FABRICATION: Meet construction requirements, precautions and recommendations of ACI, including applicable portions of "Formwork for Special Methods of Construction" . See 03100-01-B for addi- tional requirements. 03100-03 EXECUTION J, A. PREPARATION: 1. Provide runways for use in placing concrete per ACI recommenJ, - dations. 2 . Apply form coating and release agents only to surfaces of forms, making certain no such agents contact reinforcing steel, previously place concrete, or other surface where bond will be detrimentally affected. J, �-Z 03100-03 B. INSTALLATION: 1. Install formwork per recommendations and requirements of ACI, unless otherwise shown, plus additional requirements thus: a. Pour joints in walls: Place form ties near limit of pour and provide form structure sufficiently rigid to eliminate misalignment or "over-hangs". (1) Horizontal pour joints: Not permitted. (2) Vertical pour joints poured to vertical bulkhead secured in form prior to pouring concrete. Bulkhead to have reinforcing pass thru for continuation. (3) Permit no form spreaders of any material to remain after placing concrete. (4) Make tight joints between form units at concrete surface using panel joint tape or other approved seal. b. Inserts: Installed per ACI, and thus: (1) Install sleeves, anchors, ties, dowels, metal fabrica- tions, miscellaneous metal, etc. , as shown embedded in jobsite cast concrete for thresholds, grating frames, securing framing, tying masonry, connecting concrete, i1w etc. Place bolts at exterior walls and other locations as shown for plates and sills. Place bolts 7" into concrete. Place at 6'-0" o.c. (maximum) . Place additional bolts at plates and sills to provide minimum of two bolts per plate and sill piece with one bolt located within 12" of each end of each piece. (2) Provide wood nailing strips and blocks for securing items trw shown so secured. Bevel or groove strips and blocks of pressure treated Fir to prevent loosening. (3) Allow other trades time and facilities to install neces- sary embedded items. Mechanical and electrical sub- contractors provide embedded items for their work. (4) Provide "Styrofoam" pad at top of foundation wall per structural drawings. c. Slab joints: (1) Control joints: Install at locations shown. (2) Isolation joints: Install to full thickness of slab between slab edges and abutting wall. 2. Adjust formwork per ACI recommendations and requirements. C. FORM REMOVAL: 1. Meet recommendations, precautions and requirements of ACI, Chapter 6, except do not remove any forms before expiration of following times from time of placing concrete: a. Footings: 24 hours. b. Side forms on non-retaining type concealed walls (lifts of 15' and under) : 36 hours. „ c. Maintain sufficient bracing, shoring and other supports in positions for additional 7 days to support dead loads plus construction and other loads on beams, girders, slabs and retaining type walls. ` d. Minimum time for removal of forms for structural parts not noted above: Reduce required removal times by 50% for Type III or IIIA cement concrete. irr 2 . Permit no tools marks on "exposed concrete” when removing forms. 3 . Upon completion, remove runways and all temporary forms, including those concealed or buried. 4. To facilitate float finishing of formed surfaces, remove forms at earliest time possible without possibility of injury to concrete per ACI Standard. 3-3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200 03200-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: .: 1. Furnish and install reinforcement bars and mesh for all jobsite poured reinforced concrete except furnish but do not install concrete reinforcement for installation in reinforced concrete work of Division 2, Site Work. Where conflict occurs between structural drawings and Section 03200, General Notes and details id on structural drawings take precedence. 2 . Related work in other sections included: a. Installation of concrete reinforcement in poured-in-place concrete work of Division 2 . b. Providing reinforcement for work of Division 4 , Masonry, except reinforcement dowel bars extending from cast-in-place concrete for embedment into masonry. Shop drawings for locating dowel bars in concrete for masonry reinforcement in Section 04001, General Masonry Requirements. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: Regularly engage in manufacture of steel bar and welded wire fabric reinforcing. 2 . Installer qualifications: 3 years experience in installation of steel bar and welded wire fabric reinforcing. 3 . Allowance tolerances: Permissible deviation from shown and specified requirements. a. Fabrication: (1) Sheared length: (2) Stirrups, ties and spirals: +/- 1/2" in linear dimen- sions. (3) All other bends: b. Placement: (1) Concrete cover to form surfaces: +/- 1/411 . (2) Minimum spacing between bars: 1/41' . (3) Crosswire of members: Spaced evenly within 2" of stated separation. (4) Lengthwise of members: +/-211 . c. Maximum bar movement to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items: 1 bar diameter. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1. Deliver reinforcement to site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size and length. 2 . Handle and store materials to prevent contamination. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Protection: a. Support no concrete conveying equipment, runways, etc. , on rebar or rebar supporting accessories. b. Straightening, heating, cutting or rebending in field not permitted without Architect's consent. r xr• �-4 03200-01 6 c. Clean and maintain rebar free from dirt grease, oil exces- sive rust, loose mill scale or other material that will destroy or reduce bond. 2. Sequencing: Place rebar only after form coating and release agent work is completed. 03200-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Bars: Deformed bars per ASTM. Grades, unless shown otherwise: " All bars Grade 60, except ties, stirrups, curb reinforcement and dowels for masonry on concrete foundations Grade 40. 2. Mesh: Welded wire fabric of cold drawn steel wire, fs = .r 30, 000 psi. Sizes: Per drawings. 3. Accessories: Zinc-coated steel, unless otherwise noted. a. Conform to ACI Standard "Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction". Include all devices necessary for proper placing, spacing, supporting and fastening steel reinforcement. b. Reber supports: (1) For typical concealed locations: Metal wire-bar type, zinc-coated, stock design for purpose intended, complying with CRSI Standards. lrr (2) For slabs-on-grade: Wire supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 4. Tie wire: Annealed steel, black, 16 gage minimum. B. FABRICATION: Meet requirements of ACI. Cold bend only. 03200-03 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Placement: a. Bar supports and accessories: CRSI. (1) Sufficient in number and strength to accurately locate and support rebar. (2) Plastic coating against form wherever rust stain could occur at "exposed concrete" of any type, including ex- posed aggregate, revealed aggregate and textured concrete. b. Reinforcing bars: Per ACI and allow no tie wire within 1/2" of face of "exposed concrete". 2. Steel adjustment: See "Quality Assurance" . a. Move within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items. b. Do not move bars beyond allowable tolerances without approval. 3. Splices: a. Lap splices: Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement Of splices during placement of concrete. b. Splice devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Wire fabric: Place at 1" from top of slab, unless otherwise shown. a. Install in longest practicable length. b. Lap adjoining pieces one full mesh, minimum, and tie splices with 16 gage wire. c. Offset end laps in adjacent fabric widths to prevent contin- uous laps. "' 3-5 STANDARDWEIGHT CONCRETE SECTION 03310 03310-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide standardweight concrete for all jobsite placed concrete work. Certain concrete requirements which appear in this section apply only to concrete provided per Division 2, Site Work. Division 2 standardweight concrete requirements are specified in part by reference in Section 03310. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing certain limited extend of quality control of concrete in Section 01013, Owner Furnished Items & Services, and certain additional quality control by Contractor per Section 01400, Quality Control. b. Furnishing and installing standardweight concrete for work of Division 2 , Site Work. c. Providing certain floor slab curing and cleaning work and all surface hardening work in Section 03356, Floor Slab Compound Curing, Cleaning & Surface Hardening. d. Providing grout for all grouting work except grouted masonry and concrete bond grouting work in Section 03370, Drypack & Grout. e. Providing grout for reinforced grouted masonry in Section 04100, Mortar & Grout. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Allowable tolerances: a. Dimensional tolerance same as 03100-01-B3 except per :- 03310-03-B4 for flatwork finisher's tolerances. b. Slump: Per ASTM Standards. c. Strength: Per ACI, Chapter 4 . 2 . Source quality control: Design and test, at Owner selected laboratory and at Contractor's expense, proposed mix for each class of concrete per Standards. 3 . Concrete quality standards: ACI Standards, unless otherwise indicated. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. If concrete supplier has current testing laboratory report on proposed mix for a required slump, strength and aggregate grading of concrete, submit per report. 2 . Manufacturer's instructions: Per 01341. 3 . Notification of time for casting concrete: Per 01400, Quality Control. 4 . Test reports on aggregates: On request by Architect. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1. Cement: Deliver, for job mixed concrete work, in containers bearing brand name of manufacturer. Protect from dampness while stored and remove from premises cement showing lumpiness or other evidence of damage. p`f 3-/0 03310-01 2 . Graded aggregates storage: Keep aggregates for job mixed con- crete from becoming intermixed and mixed with soil. 3 . Mix and discharge times for ready-mixed concrete: a. Minimum of 10 minutes. b. Maximum time between adding water to mix and completion of discharge from trucker mixer: 1 1/2 hours. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Protect from stains by positive means "exposed concrete" to receive surface hardener and "exposed concrete" to receive no I, applied finish or coating. 2 . Coordination: a. Sack cement for jobsite work and cement in ready-mixed concrete: Same brand, color and type. b. Curing work of Section 03310 with curing work of Section 03356. 3 . Product and mix proportions changes: When choice of product is 60 indicated and mix proportions are established, do not change product or mix without Architect's approval. 4 . Job control test of concrete: In addition to quality control required of Contractor per Section 01400, Quality Control, provide following services relative to Owner provided quality control work: a. Compressive strength tests: (1) Provide storage for test specimen shipping cylinder molds and assistance in storing and oshipping of cylinders. (2) Take samples of fresh concrete, per ASTM Standards. 03310-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Cement: ASTM Standards. Cement for all locations of Type I, II or III; air-entraining type at work of Division 2; air- 1W entraining Contractor's option elsewhere; light color. 2. Aggregates for stone and gravel concrete: Natural, clean, uncoated sand and gravel meeting requirements of ASTM Standards, within grading limits for coarse aggregate, and additional requirements thus: a. Typical: 1 1/2" minus, unless otherwise noted. 1 60 3 . Water: Clean and fit to drink. 4 . Concrete treatments: a. Admix: ASTM Standards, Type A, B, C, D & E. b. Curing compound for other than slabs to receive surface hardener ASTM Standards, Type 1 (clear or translucent, ) Class B, by All-Crete Seal Co. of Oregon's "A-C Curing Compound", West Chemical Products "Filpor", Burke "Res-X", :its Hillyard "Chem-Seal", Edoco #1003 "Resin Base Architectural" , Madden "Macryseal", National "Techkote No. gill . 5. Bonding agent: Larsen Products "Weldcrete", Masons Supply Co. "Masco Concrete Bonding Agent", Madden Construction Supply "Unicon 240 PVA", Standard Drywall "Thoro System - Acryl 60" . 3-7 03310-02 6. Patch a. Slabs: (1) With floor covering; (a) Cracks to 1/8" wide and chips to 1/4" deep: Armstrong Cork Co. "S-18011 , Dowman's Products "Fixall" mixed with latex emulsion, such as Custom Building Products "Custom-Crete" , in lieu of water. (b) Cracks and chips greater than per (a) : Adhesive Engineering's "Concresive #1" expoxy concrete as installed by Structural Concrete Bonding of Oregon. (2) With CSH surface hardener: "Concresive #1" per (b) above. b. Other locations: ASTM Standards, Type Fine Grout, with Size No. 2 aggregate, admix (when not incompatible with required bonding agent" and aggregate for appearance match at "exposed concrete" . 7 . Concrete cleaner: Process Solvents Co. "S-C 88" concentrated masonry cleaner or equal. B. MIXES: 1. Concrete: Per ACI Standards and thus: a. Proportions: (1) Meet indicated slump and strength requirements; produce workable mix; adequate handling and finishing time (either with or without Type B or C admixture) without excessive segregation or bleeding after placement; and have minimum water content (either with or without water reducing admix) consistent with these requirements. (2) Cement per cubic yard of concrete: 520 pounds, minimum. (3) Calcuium chloride (CA CL2) by weight of cement, regard- Y+ less of chloride source: 2%, maximum. b. Mixing: (1) Ready-mixed: ASTM Standards. Transit and mixing time limits per 03310-01-D. (2) Job-mixed: Standards per ACI. c. Slump: Minimum-Maximum (1) Foundation walls, footings, piers, pilasters and walls: 1"-5" . (2) Slabs on grade: 211-4" d. Strength: Determined per ACI Standards, Chapter 4 , unless otherwise indicated. (1) Compressive strength (f'c) for each part of structure is shown. (2) If standard deviation strength test record in not avail- able: Meet requirements per ACI Standards. (3) Strength for concrete not shown or specified otherwise: f'c = 3,000 psi. 3-6 Y i 03310-02 e. Admix: (1) Provide same quantity and type as indicated in testing laboratory report for proposed mix. When proposed mix has been accepted for a particular slump and strength concrete and admix per ASTM Standards were used in proposed mix. (2) Use: Per manufacturer's printed recommendations and to permit no reduction in concrete strength. 2 . Patch mix: " a. Slab patch: Per manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations, except "Fixall" mixed with latex emulsion in lieu of water in same amount as recommended for water. b. Other than slab patch: Measure and mix per ASTM Standards, except substitute diluted bonding agent (diluted per label instructions) for water (adhering to manufacturer's prohibi- tions regarding admixes and curing compounds) , plus aggregate as necessary to match abutting "exposed concrete". Mix to drypack consistency. 3. Bonding agent mix: Per manufacturer's printed directions for applicable usage. 4 . Grouts: a. Bond grout for under 24 hour old concrete: 1 part cement to 3 parts sand. Add bonding agent, diluted with water per label instructions. Mix to workable, pastelike consistency. b. Bond grout for bottom of first wall lifts: 1 part cement to 3 parts fine concrete aggregate. Mix with water to thick paste. 5. Curing compound: Agitate per label directions. 6. Concrete cleaner: 1 part cleaner to 6 parts water in prelimi- nary test and then adjusted to effective ratio. 03310-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: 1. General: Per ACI Standards, "Preparation of equipment and place of deposit". a. Bonding: ii (1) At concrete 24 hours old: Remove loosed material, roughen smooth surfaces, clean thoroughly. Shortly before placing concrete, coat joint surface with undi- luted bonding agent. Allow agent to dry when instruc- tions so indicate. (2) At concrete under 24 hours old: Remove loose material, laitance and other unsound material, then coat with grout just prior to placing concrete. (3) At bottoms of wall, column and pilaster lifts: Place 3" layer of grout on footings immediately before concreting. b. Bond prevention: Prevent bond of slabs not doweled to preceding work by positive means, such as bond breaker or building felt, where isolation or control joints are not shown. "' 3-9 03310-03 C. If forms are over 80 degrees F. , dampen with water mist just prior to concreting. d. On-grade concrete: Thoroughly dampen, not just sprinkle, prepared subgrade immediately ahead of placing concrete. 2 . Construction joints: a. Install only where indicated or specifically permitted. If wood form is used to produce required shape of construction joint, concrete must be placed in "checkerboard" or "skip" pattern allowing 48 hours of curing before removing form and concreting adjoining units. b. Provide keyway 1 5/8" deep cover 1/3 area of joint, with rebar passing thru joint. Locate subject to Architect' approval. 3 . Temporary screeds: a. Install to lines and grades by instrument. b. No "wet screeding" permitted. c. Submit proposed details for approval of installation differ- ing from specifications. d. Screed installation: Set round steel groundpost pins at approximately 10' o.c. Set pin hooks to level required by screed bar height. Set screed on centerline of folding partition where no control joint is shown. Use Burke or similar adjustable screed support system with rigid flatbar screed. B. INSTALLATION: 1. Conveying and placing concrete: Per ACI Standards and thus: a. First wall lifts: Vibrate previously placed layer of grout and first layer of concrete simultaneously. b. Prevent segregation during placing. Do not drop concrete , more than 51 . c. Place in layers approximately 18" deep. d. Place concrete continuously in each section until completed. Permit not more than 30 minutes between depositing adjacent layers within each section, unless Architect has approved set retarder and such is used. e. Maintain concrete temperature between 50 and 80 degrees F. while placing. f. Place sections of concrete in sequence which eliminates shrinkage effects to greatest extent practicable. 2 . Compaction: supplemented b a. Compact by mechanical vibrating equipment, y hand-spading and tamping as required. Vibrators operated by qualified workmen. Vibrating equipment of internal type, where size of section and steel placement permits, otherwise external type and adequate in number of units and power of each unit to properly consolidate concrete. Match vibration equipment and techniques to mix. Do not cause mix segrega- tion or displacement of other items in forms and flatwork. 7: z 3-10 03310-03 a. Place concrete only when reinforcing, forms, control joints, ground, existing concrete, etc. , are not frozen and are frost free. b. Use no frozen materials or matter containing ice in concrete mix. c. Add neither salt nor chemical admixtures to concrete to prevent freezing. 2. During construction operations: a. Use clean, dry, non-staining plans or dry plywood on slabs at Points of heavy traffic where surfaces remain permanently exposed. b. Protect concrete surfaces to remain exposed from other con- crete, mortar, cleaning of other construction, application of bituminous materials and from scarring, stains or other damage. c. Do not at any time permit rain water or water used in curing #A to wash down over faces of "exposed concrete". Do not permit extraneous moisture to come into contact with flatwork until flatwork finishing is completed and, when rainfall or other precipitate is measurable in quantity or forceful, cured for 12 hours, minimum. E. PATCHING: Defects will be inspected by Architect and determination made as to repair. In general, repair thus: 1. Exposed concrete: Before concrete is thoroughly dry, fill all gravel pockets, cracks and broken places, etc. , and form tie j holes. Chip concrete back minimum of 1/2" below finished surface level around tie wires and other ferrous metal extending to finish surface and cut metal off close to new point of projection. Apply concrete bonding agent, then drypack with required material. Make trial patches on "concealed concrete" and secure Architect's approval before continuing. Compact drypack material into place and screed off slightly high; leave ir. long enough to permit initial set; then finish to match adjoin- ing surface texture and level. 2. Concealed concrete: Same as exposed concrete, but appearance of patch need not be same as adjoining surface. Patch slab cracks not over 1/8" wide and pocks not over 1/4" deep with slab patch mix, placed per manufacturer's printed instructions, ready to* receive covering. 3 . Floor slabs to receive hardener and slabs with damage than permitted for latex underla ent g greater Pressure grout with epoxy concrete to minimizes pe above: repair. appearance of F. CLEANING: 1. Concrete to receive covering: a. Covering materials includes paints, carpeting, resilient floor coverings, etc. '" b. Clean to condition free of oil, wax, slick spots, deadened concrete, dust and other deleterious conditions and materials. Immediately prior to application of a covering material, make concrete ready to receive covering without further cleaning by covering subcontractor. Verify require- ments with other sections. 2. Exposed concrete: Clean with specified cleaner per label directions. Bristle brush with non-metallic or stainless steel bristle brushes. 03310-03 (3) Trowel finish: (a) Steel trowel twice to produce dense, slick surface, free of defects. Exposed edges, except at abutting vertical surfaces, burnished with edger. (b) Locations: All slabs, and equipment bases b. Formed surfaces: (1) Remove fins, projections, loose material and form coating residue. (2) Float finish: (a) Remove forms as soon after concre27 ting as safety to structure permits. Repair defects and fill form tie holes per E below. Wet surface with water if concrete has set less than 24 hours, otherwise apply bonding agent. Rub on bond grout mix, using sponge float to give uniform sand finish, free of objec- tionable blemishes. (b) Locations: Where shown. C. CURING: Use any of following three methods except where specifi- cally prohibited. Prevent concrete surfaces from drying out for 7 days, minimum, after placing concrete, except 3 days for con- crete with Type III cement. Begin curing flatwork immediately after finisher has completed not over 300 sq. ft. of work and each section of formed work as soon as practical after placing concrete. 1. Liquid membrane-forming compound: NOTE: Do not use where surface hardener is required. See Section 03356. a. Apply per manufacturer's printed directions. Use preferred technique where directions give choice. Meet direction requirements for preparation, timing of applications, rate of coverage and protection from traffic. b. Apply on formed surfaces, on float finished formed surfaces and on float and broom finished flatwork. May also be used under work of this section on trowel finished slabs where no surface hardener is required per Section 03356. 2 . Plastic film curing: a. Polyethylene or similar approved performed film, white, non-staining, minimum 4 mils thick. b. Dampen concrete, then lay film with approximately 6" laps; tape or weld laps air-tight; hold in place for minimum of 7 days in manner to minimize moisture loss. 3 . Water curing: Use only clean, fit to drink water. a. Keep concrete and concrete forms continuously wet for 7 days after concrete placement. b. Clean burlap may be used to assist water curing. c. Use only on "concealed concrete" and/or on concrete to receive separate wearing course. D. PROTECTION: 1. Weather during concreting: Per ACI Standards, Recommended Prac- or for eather Concreting,Concreting, unlessand ACI,otherwiseeamendedebelowctice for Hot Weather 3- 12 ANN 03310-03 b. Do not vibrate after latest time a running vibrator will sink of its own weight into concrete and again make it plastic. Prevent vibrator from penetrating through fresh concrete into partially set concrete. c. Do not use vibrator to transport concrete laterally. Insert and remove vibrator in slabs over 12" deep and in walls with vertical movements only, without lateral movement while immersed. Adjust spacing of insertions to concrete mix to provide compaction without segregation. 3 . Rodding and tamping flatwork: w, a. Rake with straightedge slightly higher than desired level, then strike off top surface to required grade. b. Remove temporary screeds and screed pins, the fill pin holes with concrete. Where removable top bar and/or screed cap for screeding occurs on control joints, remove top bar or cap, fill recess. c. Rod areas to receive ceramic tile mounted to concrete with setting bed to within 1/411 above and 1/4" below required concrete plane in any undivided space and hold to within 1/1611 of required plane within any running foot. d. Hand tamping: "Jitterbug" only concrete with less than 2 1/2" slump and only enough to just displace coarse aggregate below surface. 4 . Finishing: a. Flatwork: (1) Tolerances: Not greater than per 03100-01-B and following: (a) Floors and locker room locker bases: Within 1/8" Of 10' straight edge place parallel with design surface and anywhere on surface; within . 025" of a 1' straight edge placed parallel with plane of surface where troweled finish is required. (b) Edges of slab joints: Within 1/8" of a 10' straight iW edge paralleling design line; and free of objection- able blemishes. (c) Test floors for level and sloped floors for drainage by flooding after surface has attained final set. Design slope of slabs requiring drainage: 1/8" per foot, minimum, unless otherwise shown. Tolerances for smooth troweled slabs requiring drainage: 1/2 that specified for level slabs. Where slabs are not per specification, grind, refinish or replace as directed. (2) Floating, edging and coving: (a) "Bullfloat" entire surface parallel to and then 90 degrees to screeds. Complete floating before free water collects on surface. Float to true plane. (b) After surface water, if any, has evaporated, do initial edging, jointing and coving. (c) Do no dusting of surface with dry cement or sand during finishing. FLOOR SLAB COMPOUND CURING, CLEANING SECTION 03356 & SURFACE HARDENING 03356-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide compound curing, cleaning and surface hardener for floor slabs and indicated exterior slabs to receive hardener. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Cleaning of exterior and covered broom finished slabs in Section 02630, Walks & Exterior Slabs. b. Finishing of floor slabs; curing of floor slabs by means in i addition to curing compound; curing rodded slabs to receve no flatwork finishing; and curing concrete other than concrete to receive hardener in Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete. c. Patching of concrete floor slabs, in Section 03310. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualification of applicators: Supervised by and/or employed by local representative of surface hardener manufacturer. 2 . Requirements of regulatory agency: Per U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards and Occupational Safety and Health Administration. C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGS ori final containers, 1. Delivery: Deliver in manufac g plainly labeled and unopened. 2 . Storage: Store hardener not in immediate use in suitable storage room and do all mixing and opening there. 3 . Fire prevention: Use proper precautions against fire and daily remove soiled rags, etc. from premises. 4 . Meet product manufacturer's requirements for protection from skin contact, breathing of vapor, spray and mist and other recommendations for safety to personnel. 5. Protect from damage per label recommendations. D. JOB CONDITIONS: A 1. Protection of Work: a. Protect work from traffic. b. Protect work of others not to receive curing compound or hardener. Use positive means, such as masking, to prevent curing compound and hardener from producing deleterious effects. 2 . Coordination: Complete work before installation of room base. 3 . Sequencing: a. Curing compound application: Apply curing compound to each area of 300 sq. ft. or less immediately after final trowel- ing is complete, but not before wet sheen of surface water which may appear from troweling has disappeared. b. Time for preparation for surface hardener: Shortly before completion of area. 3- 14 � 03356-01 c. Surface hardener application on broom finished slabs: As soon as practical after concrete has cured and cleaning of iw finish is completed and has thoroughly dried. 03356-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Curing compound: West Chemical Products "Filpor" or All-Crete Seal Co. of Oregon's "A-C Curing Compound". 2. Surface hardener" West Chemical Products "Filpor" or All-Crete r Seal Co. of Oregon's "All-Crete Clear Seal". B. MIXES: Per label instructions regarding agitation, dilution, etc. 03356-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: Prior to preparation for application of hardener, ascertain that materials in storage, tools, etc. have been removed from space, floor is broom clean, and oil droppings, if any, have been removed. B. PREPARATION: Clean trowel finished concrete by dry sanding, using machine equipped with integral vacuum cleaner, with 3 1/2 grit open coat paper to remove oxidation, salts, grease, paint drops, drywall compounds, etc. , and to expose voids and hairline capil- laries. Thoroughly vacuum to remove all traces of debris and dust from floor, steps and risers to receive hardener, then notify General Contractor that cracks and other damage, if any exist, are ready for repair. C. APPLICATION: 1. Curing compound: Apply by power hydro-spary, using wand long enough to be within accurate range for observation of uniform rate of coverage. Use same means of traversing newly troweled work as cement finisher's use to prevent tracking to extent greater than by finishers. Apply evenly and uniformly at rate of 350sq. puddles. ft. per gallon (+/- 10%) , without skips, runs or 2 . Surface hardener: Immediately following preparation per "B" above and cleaning noted per 03356-01-D3-c, apply by hydro- spray uniformly at 350 sq. ft. per gallon (+/- 15%) . Yr+ } it r: DRYPACK & GROUT SECTION 03370 .0 03370-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide drypack and grout where shown or called for in other , sections, except sections in Division 4, Masonry, and concrete bond grouting work in Section 03310. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Bond grouts for standardweight concrete in Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete. b. Grout for masonry in Division 4. k c. Furnishings of wood framing bearing on drypack in Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Set bedded and embedded items to within allowable tolerances for line, level and plumb required for work of section in which item is provided. C. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental requirements: Prevent drypack and grout from freezing. Apply on frost-free surfaces. No ice crystals in water and no salt or chemicals added to mix to prevent freezing. 2 . Minimum handling time: From time of adding water. a. ASTM Standard mixes: 2 1/2 hours. b. Proprietary products: Before initial set, but not later than 15 minutes after mixing to drypack consistency and 30 minutes after mixing to grout consistency. 03370-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Non-shrink type drypack-grout: a. For all exterior locations and at other locations where moisture is expected to occur: "Rocklite" by Hartline Products Co. , Inc. , 133 S.E. Madison St. , Portland, Oregon, or Standard Dry Wall Products "Thoroset Non-Metallic Grout" , jo or "Five Star Grout" by Madden Construction Supply. b. For locations other than those per "a" above where non-shrink grout is shown: Master Builders "Embeco" mortar, Madden Construction Supply's MCS Circle" , "Por-Rok" by Hallemite, or any material in "a" above. 2 . Portland cement type drypack-grout: Meet requirements of ASTM Standards, Type Fine Grout, Size No. 2 aggregate per ASTM, and with water repellent admix - Sonneborn "Hydrocide Powder" or Master Builders "Omicron Mortarproofing" . Add accelerator or retardant to grout when required by weather conditions. Accep- table accelerators and retarders: Sika Chemical Co. "Admixtures" and Master Builders ,pozzolith". 3 . Bonding agent: Larsen Products "Weldcrete" , or Masons Supply Co. "Masco Concrete Bonding Agent" , or Madden Construction Supply "Unicon 240 PVA" , or approved. 3•�� j6. 03370-02 B. MIXES: 1. Mix and place proprietary products per manufacturer's printed directions for intended use. 2. Measure and mix Portland cement type dr requirements of ASTM Standards. Add yP drypack-grout to meet label directions on container to improveucure.ted Donng notgent use aper ir- entraining admix, air-entrained cement, or curing compound containing solvents where bonding agent manufacturer so directs Add 1 lb. of water repellent admix per sack of cement plus 1 lb. per cu. ft. of lime. 3 . Use minimum amount of water consistent with handling require- ments. g quire- 03370-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: 1. Clean off surface to receive drypack or grout and dampen sur- face unless otherwise noted per manufacturer's printed direc- tions. 2. Coat surface with bonding agent per container directions where drypack and grout of ASTM mix are used, otherwise use water. 3 . Allow no bonding agent to occur on surfaces which are not to receive drypack or grout. B. INSTALLATION: I. Bed item to be installed on drypack-grout material in full bed, free of voids. Force item to final position without lifting, rr then clean off excess material. 2. Trowel joint to smooth face, flush with edges of bedded item or flush with face of grout pocket. 3 . If necessary to lift bedded item after setting, remove item entirely and build bed back to full bed depth before re-setting. C. CURING: 1. Proprietary products: Per manufacturer's printed recommen- dations. 2. ASTM Standards material: Same as concrete per 03310-03-C. rr r r DIVISION 4 - MASONRY GENERAL MASONRY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 04001 04001-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION ►' 1. Requirements of this section supplement other sections in Division 4. r; 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing reinforcement steel dowel bars embedded in concrete to splice to masonry reinforcement in Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. b. Furnishing to mason rolled steel shape frames for openings, anchorage devices for masonry supported structural members and other metal fabrications embedded into masonry in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. 1W c. Providing dampproofing on masonry in Section 07171, Colorless Dampproofing. d. Sealant work abutting masonry in Section 07900, Sealants. e. Furnishing jamb anchors for hollow metal frames in Section 08100, Hollow Metal Doors & Hollow Metal Frames. 3 . Definitions: All per UBC-1985, Chapter 24, unless otherwise noted. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Requirements of regulatory agencies: r a. Safety and health: Meet scaffolding, ladder and working- walking surface requirements per Oregon Safety Code. 2 . Allowable tolerances: For laid masonry. a. Maximum variation from plumb: (1) In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and corners: (a) 1/4" in 10' . (b) 3/8" in any story, maximum. iW (2) For conspicuous lines: (a) 1/4" in any story, maximum. (b) 1/2" in 40' b. Maximum variation from level and design grades for exposed lintels, sills, horizontal joints and grooves and other con- spicuous lines: (1) 1/4" in any bay or 201 . (2) 1/2" in 401 . c. Maximum variation of linear building line, column, wall and partition from design locations in plan: + (1) 1/4" in any bay or 201 , maximum. (2) 3/8" in 401 . r d. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls from design dimension: Not more than 1/4" smaller and 1/2" larger. C. SUBMITTALS: ' 1. Test reports: Independent laboratory reports for each type of masonry unit indicating initial rate of absorption (suction) if laying such units is proposed in air temperatures below 40 degrees F. 4-I 04001-01 2 . Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit certificates attesting compliance with specifications for concrete masonry units. 3 . Manufacturer's instructions: Per Section 01341. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: ' 1. Deliver cement, lime and other packaged materials in manufac- turer's original, unopened containers bearing brand name or manufacturer. 2 . Storage: a. Store packaged materials in dry. Protect from dampness while stored and remove materials from premises showing lumpiness or other evidence of damage. b. Keep graded aggregates from becoming intermixed and mixed with soil. c. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under stacked units and in manner to prevent contamination by materials likely to cause staining or other defects. d. Covering: Use in manner to prevent condensation within envelope formed by cover. (1) Cover masonry units as necessary to protect from ele- ments. See cold weather protection. (2) Protect concrete and clay tile against wetting prior to use. e. Protect anchors, ties and reinforcement from elements. 3 . Handling: a. Handle masonry units on pallets or flat bed barrows. b. Do not permit free discharge of masonry units from conveyor "y or transporting in mortar trays. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental requirements: a. Cold weather protection: (1) Unless otherwise noted, protect per "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council. All recommendations, preferred form of materials, and prohi- bitions throughout are mandatory for temperatures stated therein. (2) Calcium chloride or other form of anti-freeze not permit- ted in masonry work. (3) No masonry work permitted when mean daily air temperature is 25 degrees F. or lower. (4) Remove ice and frost on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until surface is dry to touch. (5) Remove freeze damaged masonry. (6) Lay only dry, unfrozen masonry units. (7) Maintain masonry above freezing for 16 hours afterx laying. (8) Completely cover masonry less than 72 hours old for 48 hours (24 hours if Type III cement was used) from time mean daily air temperature falls below 32 degrees F. 4-2 �r 04001-01 b. Hot weather protection: Protect masonry under construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when ambient air temperature is over 99 degrees F. in the shade with relative humidity less than 50%. iw 2 . Protection, general: a. Covering masonry: (1) Cover top of incomplete work subject to falling moisture with coverings extending 2' or more down all sides of work at end of day. Leave cover in place until resuming work. If work is cavity wall, bring both faces to same level before covering. (2) In wet weather, work under cover and keep work out of wet for 5 days from day of installation. b. Loading: (1) Minimum of 12 hours from time of completion of load bearing masonry to time of application of any dead or uniform loads. w► (2) Minimum of 3 days from time of completion of masonry to application of concentrated load. c. Use no muriatic acid for any purpose on masonry. Only acids contained in specified cleaning agent are permitted. 3 . Scaffolding: Provide, maintain and remove all scaffolding and temporary floors necessary for work. 4 . Sequencing: Coordinate timing of work with sill flashing in- stallation at masonry sills and with other masonry related work. 04001-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Water: Clean, fit to drink. 2 . Temporary coverings for masonry units and masonry in place: *W Nonstaining, preformed membrane material with moisture perms- bility not greater than 6 mil polyethylene plastic film. 3 . Other materials: Specified in other sections of Division 4 . iw B. MIXES: Specified in other sections of Division 4 . 04001-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Condition of surfaces: Inspect to assure surfaces to support masonry are: a. To proper grades and elevations. b. Free of all dirt and other deleterious material. c. Surfaces not properly prepared have been satisfactorily corrected. 2 . Verify initial absorption rate of masonry unit to assure within acceptable limits. B. PREPARATION: 1. Anchors, ties and reinforcement: Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale prior to installation. 4W 4'3 04001-03 2 . Otherre aration: Specified in other sections of Division 4 . P P C. INSTALLATION: 1. Install no cracked, broken or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM allowances. 2 . Use masonry saw to cut exposed units and to provide true, even edged cuts. 3 . Lay units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately space within allowable tolerances. 4 . Do not furrow bed joints. 5. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toot hing not permitted. 6. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 7. If units are displace after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joint and units of mortar and relay with fresh mortar. 8. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry: a. Remove loose unit and mortar. ° b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry. 9. Protection during construction: a. Protect sills, ledges, cavities and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage. b. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately. c. Protect face materials against staining. d. Protect door jambs and corners from damage. 10. Mortar beds: a. Lay solid units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in all courses. b. Lay hollow units with full face shell mortar beds and with head and end joints solidly filled with mortar for distance in from face of unit not less than thickness of longitudinal r face shells. c. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of solid units to fill head joints. d. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent units in place. e. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. f. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. 11. Joints: a. Construct each joint type uniformly. b. Shove vertical joints to specified joint width so joint is full and exudes surplus mortar. c. Tool joints in exposed surfaces when thumb-print hard, using jointing tool. See other sections for shape, size, etc. d. Flush cut all joints on external portions of units not specified tooled except joints in cavity. 4-4 04001-03 e. Movement and sealant joints: Keep movement joints clean of all mortar and debris. Fill hollow metal frames with mortar as masonry is laid, but do not fill mullions. Unless other- wise shown, leave sealant space around perimeters of hollow metal frames 1" deep x 1/2" wide at each face of masonry. 12 . Built-in work: a. Consult other trades to minimize cutting and patching. mow b. Install bolts, anchors, conduits and other built-in items as masonry progresses. Install jamb anchors for hollow metal work frames with adjustable anchors at approximately 16" o.c. Place bolts at exterior walls and other locations as shown for plates, ledgers and sills. Place bolts 7" into grouted reinforced masonry. ` C. Fill spaces around built-in items with mortar, unless other- wise shown. 13 . Where rubber room base occurs on masonry walls, fill all joints flush behind base and slightly slope exposed top of vertical joints from top of base back and up to line of normal concave joint face. 14. Other installation requirements: Specified in other sections of Division 4 . Where conflict between this section and other Division 4 sections occur, other sections take precedence. D. POINTING & PATCHING: iW I. Cut out defective joints and damaged work, repoint, retool or replace as necessary to produce masonry free of objectionable blemishes. 2 . Dry brush after final pointing. E. CLEANING: 1. Leave masonry and surrounding surfaces clean, free from mortar stains, efflorescence, other stains and masonry work debris. 2. Final cleaning of masonry at times which will usually be as soon as an area of masonry is otherwise completed. 3. Preliminary cleaning: a. Not more than 4 hours after mortar takes preliminary set, clean face of work with water and damp sponge or burlap cloth, then restrike joints. b. Dry brush masonry surface at end of each days work. 4. Final cleaning: a. Hollow clay unit masonry: Use stiff bristle brushes having non-metallic bristles and rinse with water. No metal scrapers permitted. too �r �r 4-5 MORTAR & GROUT SECTION 04100 04100-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Furnish mortar and grout for work of Division 4 . 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing drypack and grout for work of sections in divisions other than Division 4. b. Work noted as related work per Section 04001, General Masonry Requirements. B. SUBMITTALS: See Section 04001. C. PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: See Section 04001. D. JOB CONDITIONS• 1. Cold weather protection: a. Mortar: (1) Produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. by heating thus: Air Temperature Construction Requirements 40 to 32 degrees F Heat sand or mixing water 32 to 25 degrees F Heat sand and mixing water (2) Minimum temperatures of mortar on mortar boards: 40 degrees F. b. Grout: Same as cold weather concreting per Section 03310, Standardweight Aggregate Concrete. 2 . Other job-conditions: Per Section 04001. 04100-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Mortars: a. Concrete unit masonry mortar: ASTM C270-73, Type S, with material colors thus: (1) All mortar for exposed-to-view 8" x 12" x 4" Hollow Clay masonry units. (2) Submit color samples for architects selection.* 2 . Grouts: ASTM C476 Types, thus: a. Coarse: For grout spaces in masonry 2" or more in horizontal dimension and in grout spaces in filled-cell construction 4" or more in both horizontal dimensions. b. Fine: For all locations, including locations per "a" above, at Contractor's option. 3 . Admixtures: a. Water repellent: Sonneborn "Hydrocide Powder" or Master Builders "Omicron Mortarproofing" . b. Air-entraining: As permitted by ASTM C150. c. Other admixtures: Not permitted. D. Other mortar and grout materials: Per Section 04001-02. * Probably a natural (gray) color mortar will be selected. However, the owner reserves the right to have a color mix. 4-6 04100-02 B. MIXES: 1. Mortars: Hollow Clay unit masonry mortar: Per ASTM C270, Type S, with 1 lb. water repellent admix per 94 lbs. of cement plus 1 lb. per cubic foot of hydrated lime or lime putty in mortar at all masonry and, at CSB masonry only, with coloring quantity per approved sample. '3 2 . Grouts: Measuring and proportions per ASTM C476 for type grout specified. 04100-03 EXECUTION A. PERFORMANCE: 1. Mixing: a. Machine mix: Mix ASTM C270 mortar for at least 3 minutes and 6W ASTM 476 grout for at least 5 minutes with maximum amount of water required to produce workable consistency in batch mixer and still obtain required compressive strengths. In mortar requiring water repellent admix, add required dry quantity of admix to dry mortar materials before adding water, then mix for 5 minutes, add water and mix at least 3 more minutes. b. Hand mix: When less than 4 cu. ft./hour of mortar is required, hand mixing may be permitted on Architect's written approval of proposed equipment and procedure. Hand mixing grout not permitted. 2. Retempering: Retemper mortar stiffened because of evaporation of water by adding water as frequently as necessary to restore required consistency. Do not retemper grout. 3 . Placement time: To final position from time of adding first water. a. ASTM C270 mortar: 2 1/2 hours, maximum. b. Grout: 1 hour for machine mix in normal ambient tempera- tures. HOLLOW CLAY UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04220 04220-01 GENERAL iW A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide reinforced and partially reinforced 8" x 12" x 4" nom. hollow clay unit masonry. Requirements of this section take precedence over Section 04001 where conflicting statements " occur. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Work noted as related work in Section 04001, General Masonry wr. Requirements. b. Furnishing mortar and grout in Section 04100, Mortar & Grout. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Per Section 04001. C. SUBMITTALS: Per Section 04001. w y.r 4-7 04220-01 D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: Per Section 04001. E. JOB CONDITIONS: Per Section 04001. 04220-02 PRODUCTS r A. MATERIALS: 1. Kla-all hollow masonry units by Mutual Materials (or approved equal) in accordance with ASTM C652-HBS-SW. a. 8" x 12" x 4" units at all building walls. b. 6" x 12" x 4" units at 18" sq. columns and 6'-6" high screen walls. c. Color selected - Carib. (Show sample to owner prior to purchase) . 2. Reinforcement: a. Vertical and horizontal reinforcing steel bars per ASTM A615. Bars Grade 40. 3 . Anchors and ties: a. Strap ties for anchoring block to steel: Provided by steel fabricator. Rs 4 . Other materials: Per Sections 04001 and 04100. 04220-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: Per Section 04001. B. PREPARATION: 1. Lay only dry units. 2 . Remove extraneous portions of block material from imperfectly formed cells at cells to receive bar type reinforcing. 3 . Other preparation: Per Section 04001. C. INSTALLATION: 1. Bond, running: Vertical joints at center of masonry units in alternate course below. Use running bond, unless otherwise shown. 2 . Joints: a. Nominal thickness: 3/811 . b. Types: All joints in exposed-to-view masonry tooled with jointing tool. (1) Exterior: Struck concave. (2) Interior: Struck concave. (3) Concealed inside cells to receive bar reinforcement: Struck flush. (4) Concealed by room base: Flush where base contacts masonry. c. Other joint requirements: Per Section 04001. 3 . Alignment: Where both faces of units are exposed to view, lay units to design centerline of wall, averaging to each side variations in unit widths. Where only one face of unit is exposed-to-view, lay exposed face true to design plane. 4 . Mortar beds: a. Hollow units: NOTE: Because of grade differential, a stepped-down brick wall must be installed. Submit shop drawings on how this will be accom- plished. 4-8 ` 04220-03 (1) Lay with full mortar coverage on all face shells and webs in all following courses: (a) Piers, columns and pilasters. (b) Starting course on footings, solid foundation walls and slabs. (c) Where adjacent to cells or cavities to be grout filled. 5. Protection during construction: Per Section 04001. 6. Reinforced hollow unit masonry: All walls 611, nominal, and wider detailed on structural drawings are reinforced hollow unit masonry work. a. Reinforcement: Per Chapter 24 - UBC. (1) Hold vertical reinforcement firmly in place by means of specified positioning devices at top, bottom and at intervals not exceeding 192 diameters of reinforcement. (2) Place horizontal reinforcement as work progresses in longest practical lengths. 6' minimum bar length for vertical bars. (3) Minimum clear distance between longitudinal bars: Nominal diameter of bar. (4) Minimum thickness of mortar or grout between masonry unit and bar type reinforcement: 1/411. (5) Tie or weld lap splices securely to prevent displacement. Locate horizontal bar lap splices other than at laps in vertical bars. (6) Cold bend all bars. (7) Do not straighten or otherwise repair damaged reinforce- went. ow (8) Do not install kinked or damaged reinforcement. b. Forms and shores: Per Chapter 24 - UBC. (1) Provide substantial and tight forms. (2) Leakage of mortar or grout not permitted. (3) Brace or shore forms and heads of hollow metal frames to maintain position and shape. Shore under lintels at openings. (4) Do not remove forms or shoring until masonry beams have hardened sufficiently to carry own weight and other temporary loads during construction: Minimum 10 days _.iW before shore removal. c. Grouting: Per Chapter 24 - UBC. (1) Assure that grout core is clean of mortar and drippings r` and other deleterious materials. (2) Grout spaces containing reinforcing at intervals along wall of not more than 24" in lifts of 4801, maximum, as wall is built. (3) Agitate, vibrate or puddle grout during and after place- ment to insure complete filling. Agitate each lift at least twice. Second time between 15-30 minutes after initial agitation. (4) Stop grout 1 1/2" below top of masonry when grouting is to be stopped for 1 hour or more. (5) Continue grouting to top of finished wall. Fully grout iw bond beam and lintel block. (6) Provide grout barriers at convenient intervals. ,,, D. POINTING & PATCHING: Per Section 04001. E. CLEANING: Per Section 04001. 4.9 .err DIVISION 5 - METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05120 it 05120-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide structural steel work consisting of structural steel parts as defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", 7th Edition. Furnish, but do not install, steel parts indicated in 05120-01-A2 as furnished per this section and installed under other sections. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing temporary light and electricity in Sections 01511 and 01512. b. Installation of connection elements and anchor bolts for structural steel work in poured-in-place concrete in Section 03100, Concrete Framework. Connections and bolts for structural steel furnished per 05120. C. Providing drypack supporting structural steel members and assemblies in Section 03370, including grouting under bearing plates. d. Work in other sections of Division 5 and work noted in other sections of Division 5 as related work in divisions other than Division 5. e. Providing finish coats of paint in Section 09900, Painting. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Requirements of regulatory agencies and precedence of require- ments: a. Building code: Uniform Building Code (UBC) , 1985 Edition. b. Contrary to requirements of Supplementary Conditions, t structural drawings take precedence over specifications. c. In absence of specific requirements and unless otherwise specified, provisions of following standard specifications govern work: (1) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication & Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" adopted by AISC. (2) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" adopted by AISC. (3) American Welding Society's "Code for Welding in Building Construction", AWS. (4) Steel Structures Painting Council's "Steel Structures Painting Manual". 2 . Qualifications for Welding: a. Welding procedures and operations: Qualified per AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction". lrr. b. Welders and tackers: Currently certified welders with cer- tificates for arc welding. Certification by AWS for type of work welder and tacker performs. C. SUBMITTALS: Submit per 01340-01, Shop Drawing and Submittal Procedures. ` 1. Shop drawings: 05120-01 a. Indicate all shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, splices, holes, threaded fastners, welds, member sizes, areas to receive shop primer, fabrication tolerances and member alignment. b. Indicate welding electrode for each weld. 2. Erection. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorage devices at time of delivery of bolts and devices. D. PRODUCT HANDLING: 1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices to be installed under work of other sections before start of cast-in-place concrete work. 2 . Storage at site: Store structural steel above ground in plat- forms, skids or similar supports in undistorted position, braced so as to be subjected to no unusual bending or overturning. Store package materials in original, unbroken containers in dry, weathertight, place until ready for use. Position steel assemblies to minimize water-holding pockets and protect from soiling, contamination and deterioration of shop prime coat. 05120-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Structural steel: New and meet requirements of ASTM Standard for rolled shapes and for shaped tubular sections. 2 . Bolts & nuts: ASTM Standards. 3 . Primer: Rodda Paint Co. 's "Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer - Oxide Red" or Interim Fed Spec. TT-P-0086F, "Paint, Red-Lead-Base, Ready Mixed", Type II, "Red Lead Mixed Pigment- Alkyd Varnish-Linseed Oil Paint" . 4 . Filler metal for welding: Electrodes for shielded metal-arc welding per AWS. 5. Anchor bolts, standard threaded fastners and anchor studs: a. Anchor bolts: Per ASTM. b. Standard threaded fastners: (1) Standard bolts and nuts: ASTM, Grade A. (2) Plain washers: ANSI. c. Studs: As shown. 6. Masonry ties to steel 22 gage galvanized steel x 1" wide x length required to extend to 1/2" from face of finished masonry joint. 7 . Corrosion protection tape: 3M "Scotchwrap" No. 50 or 51. B. FABRICATION: 1. Fabrication requirements of standards noted per "Quality Assurance" are minimum requirements for all work. Meet addi- tional requirements below. 2 . Clean steel at fabricating plant per Steel Structures Painting Council's specifications. 3 s-z 05120-02 3 . Tolerances: a. Compression members: Straight to within 1/1000 of axial length between laterally supported points. b. Completed members: Free from twists, bends, open joints and without sharp kinks or bends. c. Length variation: Per AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication & Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings". 4 . Connections: a. Shop: Welded types as shown. Plug weld masonry ties to columns so tie, when twisted, tears before weld fails. ,. b. Field: Use threaded fastners for connection to concrete shown bolted. c. Welding: By manual shielded-arc only. Meet requirements of AW AWS. 5. Shop painting: Shop paint per SSPC-PS, one coat of specified primer all structural steel work except steel encased in con- crete or masonry. 05120-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Prior to erection work, examine anchor bolt and anchorage assembly for plumb, level and correctness of elevation, con- dition of bolt threads, and completeness of installation. 2. Notify Contractor of all remedial work required for erection. Make arrangements for proper coordination of structural steel erection with drypack and grout work required per Section 03370. B. PREPARATION: 1. Clean surfaces which will be in permanent contact with concrete immediately ahead of erection. 2. Clean per requirements of SSPC-PS. o" C. ERECTION: Meet requirements of AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication & Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", plus following modifications and additional requirements: iiW 1. Erect columns to within 1/1000 of plumb. 2 . Support attached columns bases with wedges or shims of type and in manner to permit installation of grout work per Section 03370 without undue interference or necessity for removal of wedges or shims. 3 . Wrap portions of tube columns abutting concrete slabs with tape in triple thickness wrap where on-grade exterior slab surrounds column. C. CLEANING UP: 1. Upon completion of work of this section, clean up rubbish and remove from site. 2. Remove tools, equipment and surplus materials from each area as erection work is completed. r w. 5.3 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 05500-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Furnish, for installation under this section and other sections in Division 2 thru 14, metal items 10 gage or more in thickness required to complete work and items less than 10 gage specifi- cally noted in General Contractor's Check List, unless otherwise specified. Items consist of fabrications per check list and all channels, angles, plates, anchors, bolts, clips, etc. , shown on drawings and not specified as either provided or furnished in other sections. 2 . Related work in other sections included, but is not limited to: a. Work in other sections of Division 5, Metals. b. Providing catch basins and catch basin gratings in Section 02510. c. Installation of metal fabrications in poured-in-place con- crete in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. d. Installation of metal fabrications by mechanical fastners (not welding) used for wood framing and sheathing and other fabrications not specified to be installed in other sections k are installed in Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing. e. Providing gate hardware indicated by manufacturer and catalog number in Section 08710, Finish Hardware. f. Providing finish painting in Section 0990, Painting. 3. General Contractor's Check List: Following metal fabrications are listed as check list for Contractor's aid. List is by no means represented as complete. Final responsibility for supplying all required items rests with General Contractor. a. Angle thresholds, galvanized. Provide with stud anchors for securing in cast-in-place concrete. b. Gate anchors and fabricated of rolled plate, shapes and tubes. c. Tube posts and steel brackets with fastenings for supporting carved wood signs. Galvanized. d. Channel frames of rolled steel at exterior coiling service doors. Galvanized. e. Connection steel of 10 gage or more in thickness for wood to wood framing, including wood beam hangers and wood post caps fabricated to details on drawings. See builders hardware in 06110-02 for exclusions. f. Rolled steel shapes and plates, not specified in Section 05120, Structural Steel Framing. g. Fastenings for assembly and for installation of metal fabri- cations and anchor bolts for wood plates on concrete and masonry, including nuts and washers. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Requirements of regulatory agencies and precedence of require- !1 ments: a. Building code: Uniform Building Code (UBC) , 1985 Edition. b. Contrary to requirements of Supplementary Conditions, structural drawings take precedence over specifications. 5-4 i 05500-01 wr c. In absence of specific requirements and unless otherwise specified, provisions of following standard specifications govern work: (1) American Welding Society's "Code for Welding in Building Construction", (AWS) . (2) Steel Structures Painting Council's "Steel Structures Painting Manual". 2 . Qualifications for welding: a. Welding procedures and operations• Qualified per AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction" . b. Welders and tackers: Currently certified welders with certificates for arc welding. Certification by AWS for type of work welder and tacker performs. C. SUBMITTALS: Submit per 01340, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures. 1. Shop drawings: a. Indicate all shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, splices, holes, threaded fasteners, welds, member sizes, items to receive shop primer or galvanizing (indicate which) and fabrication tolerances. b. Indicate welds by AWS "Welding Symbols" . c. Indicate welding electrode for each weld. d. Where possible, use same detail reference numbers as on Architect's drawings. Note location of items detailed on shop drawings which do not have Architect's reference numbers. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installa- i,., tion of anchor bolts and other anchorage devices at time of delivery. D. PRODUCT HANDLING: 1. Deliver built-in metal fabrications, anchor bolts and other anchorage devices to be installed under work of other sections before start of cast-in-place concrete work for anchors in concrete and before start of masonry work for anchors in masonry. Deliver loose connection materials not installed under work of this section prior to erection work of other section to assure adequate time for installation of these materials, without causing delay or interference with installation. 2 . Storage at site: Store metal fabrications above ground on platforms, skids or similar supports in undistorted position, braced so as to be subjected to no unusual bending or over- turning. Store packaged materials in original, unbroken containers in dry, weathertight, place until ready for use. +r Position steel assemblies to minimize water-holding pockets and protect from soiling, contamination and deterioration of shop prime coat. 3 . Welding rods: Handling per AWS Standards. w 5-5 05500-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Steel: New and meet requirements of ASTM A36-70a for rolled shapes and plates; ASTM A500, Grade B, for shaped tubular square and rectangular sections; ASTM A120, Schedule 40 for round sections; ASTM A36-70a, Table 1, for other sections and materials. 2 . Bolts and nuts: a. For casting into concrete or setting into masonry grout: Steel per ASTM Standards 1/2" diameter, unless otherwise shown, with shank bent to right angle and extending 2" to side of shank. 10" long where in concrete and 12" long for plates and sills on masonry, unless otherwise shown. b. For other locations: ASTM. Plain washers: ANSI. 3 . Finishes: a. Galvanizing (Symbol GALV) : Hot-dip method, per ASTM Standards on rolled steel with minimum of 1.2 oz. slab zinc per square foot of actual surface wire materials. Touch-up for galvanized metal: "Gale-Weld" or "Galvicon" . b. Primer: Rodda Paint Co. 's "Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer - Oxide Red" No. 2447 or Interim Fed. Spec. TT-P-0086F, "Paint, Red-Lead-Base, Ready-Mixed" , Type II, "Red Lead Mixed Pigment-Alkyd Varnish-Linseed Oil Paint" . 4 . Filler metal for welding: Electrodes for shielded metal-arc welding per AWS 5.5 (ASTM A316) for ASTM 500 steel (Electrode: E70XX) and per AWS 5. 1 (ASTM A233) for ASTM A36 steel (Electrode: E60XX) . 5. Anchors: As shown for anchorage to concrete masonry. Gal- vanized at exterior. Where type not shown: Phillips "Red-Head" 5-34 anchor or "Wej-it" standard 3/4" type. B. FABRICATION: 1. Fabrication requirements of standards noter per "Quality Assurance" are minimum for work. Meet additional requirements below. 2 . Clean steel at fabricating plant per Steel Structures Painting Council's specifications, "Hand Tool Cleaning: . 3 . Tolerances: a. Compression members: Straight to within 1/500 of axial length between laterally supported points. b. Completed members: Free from twists, bends, open joints and without sharp kinks or bends. c. Length variation: Per AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication & Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" . 4 . Connections: Bolted and welded types as shown. a. Bolting: Make holes where required for bolted installation. b. Welding: By manual shielded-arc only. Meet requirements of AWS. Grind and buff all welds smooth on work exposed-to-view of building users, not including maintenance personnel. 5. Fabricate steel to accurate sizes and shapes. Punch and shear to leave clean surfaces. h w / r; 05500-02 6. Finishes: a. Shop painting: Shop paint per SSPC-PS and one coat of specified primer on all metal fabrication items except: (1) Steel encased in concrete. (2) Surfaces within 2" of field welds. (3) Galvanized metal fabrication. b. Galvanizing: Galvanize all exterior steel items. Galvanize •► interior steel items where either specifications or drawings indicate galvanizing. Clean and chemically degrease steel to be galvanized immediately before hot-dipping. See "Contractor's Check List" for items specified galvanized. All galvanizing after fabrication. See 05500-02-A3 for required quality of galvanizing work. err 05500-03 EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Specified in other sections. k> `r �r Yrwr i rr 1 it w 5-Z .9frr DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS FRAMING & SHEATHING SECTION 06110 �w 06110-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide wood framing of lumber, plates, ledgers, backing, cross bracing of wood trusses, plywood sheathing, plywood floors, preservative treatments, builders hardware, and provide fire- stopping, miscellaneous wood blocking and nailers specified in this section. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing work in other sections in Division 6, except installation of glue laminated structural wood members furnished per Section 06181 and installation of wood trusses furnished per Section 06190. ikw b. Installation of hollow metal frame anchors and anchor bolts for wood framing embedded in masonry and installation of hollow metal relite frames surrounded by masonry in Division 4, Masonry. c. Furnishing nuts, washers and steel angle struts for anchoring wood framing to bolts in concrete and masonry in Section 05500, Metal Fabrication. d. Providing firestopping, and attic area separations with gypsum board at certain locations per 09250, Gypsum Drywall. e. Providing wood blocking and backing required for mechanical rw and electrical work, except as specified in this section for mechanical and electrical work, is in Divisions 15 and 16. 3 . Install items furnished under following sections: a. Metal fabrications specified in Section 05500, except angle thresholds, anchor bolts and items with stud anchors embedded into concrete. b. Glued laminated structural units: Section 06181. c. Composite wood roof trusses: Section 06191. d. Hollow metal frames: Section 08100, except relite frames in masonry. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualifications of wood products grading agencies: a. Lumber: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB) . b. Plywood: American Plywood Association (APA) 2 . Requirements of regulatory agencies: a. Lumber grading rules: Meet requirements of "Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber" of WWPA. b. Plywood grading rules: National Bureau of Standards. c. Pressure preservative treated material: Quality marked by American Wood Preservers Bureau. ` 06110-02 PRODUCTS k, A. MATERIALS: 1. Lumber: a. Species: Douglas Fir & Larch. rr b. Moisture content at time of surfacing: 19% maximum, "S-Dry" . rr c. Surfacing: S4S. 06110-02 d. 2" nom. studs, joists and rafters to be kiln dried (K.D) . e. Grades: ITEM WCLIB GRADE (1) Studs 2" & 3" thick, 3" & 4" wide. . . . . . . . . "STANDARD" - LIGHT FRAMING (2) Studs 2" & 3" thick, 6" and wider. . . . . . . . . "NO. 2" - STRUCTURAL JOISTS & PLANKS (3) Joists, plates, furring and miscellaneous framing members 2" & 3" thick, 4" wide . . . . "NO. 2" - STRUCTURAL LIGHT FRAMING (4) Joists, plates and blocking 2" & 3" thick, 6" & wider. . . "NO. 2" - STRUCTURAL JOISTS r & PLANKS (5) Joists and beams 4" thck 6 & wider . . . . . . . . . . "NO. 1" - STRUCTURAL JOISTS " & PLANKS 2 . Plywood: a. Roof sheathing: (1) Grade: (a) Roof: Unsanded, (CDX) , EXT type. (2) Size: (a) 4' x 81 . No remnants or small pieces permitted. (b) Thickness: 5/8" at roof; 5/8" at walls; 1/2" at interior partition. b. Floors: (1) Grade: B-D, G-I or G-2, INT type. (2) Size: Unless otherwise shown. (a) Thickness: 3/411 . T & G. (b) 4' x 81 . No remnants or small pieces permitted. c. Backing for telephone equipment. (1) Grade: Group I - EXT B-B, HDO, overlaid both faces. (2) Size: 3/4" thick at telephone equipment x largest standard size necessary to minimize number of joints. 3 3 . Building paper: Unperforated and per requirements of ASTM D226-68. Weight: 30 lb. under Metal Roof Application. 4 . Miscellaneous materials: a. Stripping, blocking and backing for mounting fixtures and fittings: Douglas Fir of any grade of 2X material specified for framing. F, f �'2 06110-02 aw b. Insulation stops at roof decks: Douglas Fir of any grade of 2X material specified for framing. C. Firestopping: (1) Gypsum board: 5/8" Type "X" (2) Mineral wool: 2" thick blanket material per Fed. Spec. HH-I-521D, Type I, without moisture barrier IW covering. 5. Pressure preservative treatment: a. Treat all framing lumber, stripping and permanent nailing blocks in contact with concrete or masonry by empty cell or full cell pressure impregnation process meeting current requirements of American Wood Preservers Association specifications. rr Preservative treated lumber to have incised marks to facilitate absorption of salts and identification. b. Treat wood noted on drawings and/or in other paragraphs of this section as "Treated" . 6. Rough hardware: a. General: irr ( 1 ) Includes all nails, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, framing, anchors, hanger straps and other items of builders hardware not specified elsewhere. tAw (2) Fastenings: Furnish per details. In general, furnish thus: (a) Wood plugs for fastenings in concrete and/or masonry not permitted. (b) Screws: Screws exposed to view, weather or dampness: Brass where item secured is brass and stainless steel at all other locations requiring exposed screws. Screws for fastening wood to wood and for wood to sheet metal: Sheet metal type threads to #14 x 2" size. +r. Over #14 x 2" size with wood screw threads, unless otherwise shown. (c) Wood to masonry or concrete where fastening is not shown cast into concrete or grout: Machine bolts and Phillips Self-Drilling Expansion Shells for bolts 3/8" in diameter and larger. Rawl "Caulk-Ins" for machine screws less than i"" 3/8" diameter where anchors are more than 3" from edge of concrete and where concrete is more than 5" thick, otherwise use Rawl yr "Doubles" . Where item to be fastened has pre-drilled holes, use largest possible diameter bolt or screw. b. Detailed fastening and connector material requirements: ( 1 ) Nails and staples: Common, unless otherwise indicated. See 06110-03 for required sizes and locations. Pneumatic and mechanically driven T-nails and staples meeting requirements of ICBO (UBC) may be substituted for specified nails. w. �-3 06110-02 (2) Bolts, nuts and washers: Bolts and nuts per ASTM A307. Bolts all 3/4" diameter, unless otherwise indicated. (3) Power driven pins for 1 1/2" + thick sleeper and plate on concrete slabs: Omark "H-205" or Hilti NK 75 DX - 3" , or similar pin recommended by pin manufacturer for this purpose. (4) Framing connectors (anchors) : Type and size as indicated. All connectors steel, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise shown in manufacturer's catalog. Furnish nail fastened connectors with galvanized nails, one for each nail hole in connector of size required by connector manufacturer. Furnish bolt fastened connectors with bolts and nuts of sizes required. Approved manufacturers: Simpson, Bowan, TECO and Cleveland. ( 5 ) Screws: (a) Wood to wood: Type S Phillips Wafer Head where flush driven screws are required and Type S Pan Head or Type S Bugle Head at other locations. Meet requirements of ASTM. Length as required to nearly penetrate through backing. (b) Wood to metal: Speed Fasteners, Inc. "Plymetal Teks" or "Header Teks" , or other manufacturer, with Phillips "Wafer" Head where flush driven screws are required and Pan Head or Wafer Head at other locations. Length of 1/2" greater than total thickness of materials fastened. Meet requirements of ASTM. 06110-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: 1 . Lay out for framing and sheathing true to lines and dimensions shown. 2. Verify that cement mortar drypack under sills and plates supported on concrete and masonry is to proper level and all wood shims employed in leveling process are removed. 3. Clean surfaces to receive framing units of irregularities and debris. B. INSTALLATION: 1 Install items furnished under other sections per Architect approved shop drawings and as follows: a. Install all metal fabrications furnished per Section 05500 except items embedded in concrete or masonry and items installed by welding to building structure. b. Wood trusses furnished per Section 06190. ( 1 ) During erection exercise care to keep horizontal bending of trusses to minimum. (2) Install temporary bracing to hold trusses true and plumb and in safe condition until permanent bracing and bridging is solidly nailed in place. Install permanent bracing and make all permanent fastenings of components before application of any loads, except weight of erectors. -4 06110-03 (3) Field erection, proper handling, safety precautions, temporary bracing and safeguards or procedures consistent with good workmanship and building erection practices shall meet requirements of AITC. C. Glue laminated wood structural members: Set beams with crown up. Leave wrapping in place until permanent protection is provided by roof or adequate cover. Should moisture accumulate within wrapper, slit bottom of wrapper to allow moisture to escape. Follow storage and handling recommendations of AITC. Drill bolt holes and install bolts per recommendations of National Forest Products Association's "National Design Specifications for Stress-Grade Lumber and Its' Fastenings" . d. Hollow metal frames: Install in accurate location plumb at jambs and level at heads. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Wherever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb, and anchors are securely attached. iw 2. Framing, stripping and blocking: a. Cut, fit and erect framing plumb and level, except where otherwise shown. Where framing is shown other than plumb and level, erect true to lines and slopes shown. b. Walls and partitions: (1 ) Soles and sills: Install single plates at all frame it walls. Plates same size as studs, unless otherwise shown. (2) Studs: Size as shown and space 16" O.C. Arrange three studs at corners to provide nailing for finish or backing material. (3) Top plates: Double top plate, except top plates directly under beams may be single. Lap at each or intersection with walls or partitions. Joints in upper and lower members staggered minimum of 4' -011 . C. Joists: ( 1 ) Set with crown up; lap and spike together over bearings. Spike Joists to studs where Joists bear on ribbons and are at same spacing as studs. Where joist bear on ribbons at different spacing than studs, block joist ends between studs and Joists. At Joist to beam and joist to header connections, install per structural drawings. %W (2) Double Joists under partitions which run parallel to Joists; space to provide clearance for pipes in partitions. Space all Joists at 16" o.c. unless otherwise shown. Install solid box headers at ends of all Joists, except furring Joists on ribbons. (3) Bridging: Bridge rafters more than 6" depth and Joists more than 4" depth at each support by solid blocking of 2X material and between supports at every 8' for Joists and every 10' for rafters by solid blocking with 2X material. d. Openings: Double framing members around openings over 4' wide; install cripple studs under headers in addition to double studs. Provide two cripple studs at each side of openings where wall above opening is a bearing wall. �-s Provide double headers on edge (triple at 2 x 6 or larger stud bearing walls) . Headers approximately same depth in inches as well opening in feet (8' opening requires 2 x 8's on edge) . Minimum header size two 2 x 6. e. Furring: ( 1 ) Partitions and soffits: At areas where wood furring is required, whether specifically shown or not, provide framing of same spacing and sizes as studs adjacent, unless otherwise shown. (2) Ceilings: Unless otherwise shown, install 2" nominal joists where required ceiling height is less than results from roof framing. In sizes required for shortest span per UBC. f. Backing and blocking: ( 1 ) For urinal fillers: Install wood backing for ceramic tile urinal fillers between floor mounted urinals installed at wood frame walls. Where urinals are closer than 24" from room corner, install urinal filler framing from urinals to corners. (2) For attachment to and/or support of recessed and surface mounted items by framing: Install backing and blocking for mounting all surface and recess mounted items to wood framing, except backing and blocking required solely for mounting of electrical outlet boxes, lighting fixtures and electrical conduit and backing and blocking required solely for mounting of mechanical trim items, HVC controls and piping. Install blocking in wood framing for securing door stops, miscellaneous hardware, mirrors, ceiling hung toilets compartments, toilet room accessories, drapery tracks and other items specified in Divisions 5 through 14. Verify requirements of these divisions and make marks or diagrams to show location after concealment. (3) For nailing soffit material: Install 2 x 4 (minimum) blocking: At soffits where soffit material changes direction and at locations shown. (4) Backing for chalkboard and telephone equipment: Install HDO plywood. 3. Firestopping: a. Install 2X wood material to cut off all concealed draft openings (both vertical and horizontal) within the width of wood frame walls, wall furring and partitions and within the depth of wood frame floor and ceiling framing whether or not specifically shown. Install thus: ( 1 ) In all wood stud walls and partitions at ceiling level and floor level and between wood joists where joists cross over top plates. (2) In all wood stud walls and partitions, including wall furring, so placed that maximum dimension of any concealed space is not over 101 . (3) Within any other wood framing not specifically mentioned above, such as holes in framing for electrical raceways, pipes, shafting, behind furring strips and similar places which could afford a passage for flames. 6-40 iw r 06110-03 b. Where width of opening for passage of draft within framing is such that more than one piece of lumber is necessary to block draft, install two thicknesses of 1" nominal lumber with joints broken or 3/4"-thick plywood or gypsum board. See Section 09250 for locations of firestopping with gypsum board required by work of ' " Section 09250. C. Inside furred spaces, except attic spaces, where clear distance between wood frame assemblies (such as walls, 5rr partitions, ceilings, soffits, and roofs) is 1 ' or less provided 3/4"-thick plywood or 5/8" gypsum board, so placed that maximum dimension of concealed spaces is not over 10' in horizontal and vertical dimension. 4. Cutting: a. Cutting limitations: (1 ) Carpenters do all cutting of structural members for other trades or be responsible for same. (2) Maximum boring of joists, 1" hole, but edge of hole not permitted closer than 2" to joist edge. No boring permitted in center 1/3 of joists. b. Cutting treated wood: Saturate cuts with heavy brush coat of touch-up treatment material of same type as treated wood. 5. Coordination with other trades: Provide framing headers, trimmers and cripples for electrical, mechanical and other trades. Verify requirements before starting work. Frame openings in wood for following mechanical and electrical work, in addition to other mechanical and electrical openings required. Frame openings from information furnished to General Contractor before framing in area is started: a. Electrical subdistribution panel recesses. b. Mechanical work roof openings. Verify requirements with work of Division 15. C. Duct openings in floors, walls and ceilings. 6. Sheathing, decks and floors: a. Walls: Apply plywood sheathing with face grain running rr horizontally or vertically; all joints staggered when installed horizontally. b. Plywood roof decks: Apply with face grain at right angles to joists, all joints staggered. All joints on bearing. C. Plywood floors: Apply with face grain at right angles to joists, all joints on bearing. w 7. Building paper: Install at locations indicated on drawings, locations indicated in this section and locations noted in other sections. Lay in full rolls, no remnants or small pieces; protect from tearing; at vertical applications lap horizontal joints 2", vertical joints 6" . Secure with large head galvanized roofing nails spaced 8" o.c. at joints, 16" iW o.c. along middle of sheets at vertical applications. 8. Fastenings: a. Nailing: (1 ) Drive nails perpendicular to grain instead of toe-nailing where feasible. +r.► 6-7 06110-03 (2) Framing connectors secured only with type and size fastenings recommended by connector manufacturer. Where nailing is required, install one nail for each nail hole in connector. Install per drawings. (3) Minimum nailing requirements for typical connections, unless otherwise shown: Per 1985 UBC. b. Bolted connections: ( 1 ) Plates and sills to foundations and walls: Drill holes for anchor bolts not more than 1/32" larger than bolt diameter. Install plate with washer on top of top surface of plate and under nut. Draw nuts tight against washer after leveling drypack has p set. (2) Built-up beams and headers: Bolt members together when over 10" in depth at 24" o.c. Stagger bolts. Install bolts at 2-1/2" from each edge of individual pieces. Install washer under both bolt head and washer. Drill holes of diameter to permit bolts to be easily driven, 1/32" to 1/16" larger than bolt, depending on bolt size. Forcible driving of bolts not permitted. Tighten nut against washer to slightly depress washers into wood. (3) Beams to posts: Per drawings. C. Power driven pin connections: Space specified pins at 3' -0" o.c. and within 4" of ends of members at partition plates and 2X stripping on masonry; at 24" o.c. and within 4" of ends of 5/8" and 3/4" stripping. 10. Erection of wood trusses per AITC. a. Hoist into position with cables for spans under 301 ; spreader bars for spans 30' -601 . b. Exercise care to keep out-of-plane bending of assemblies to minimum. C. Install temporary horizontal and cross bracing to hold assemblies plumb and in safe condition until permanent bracing is installed. d. Install permanent bracing and related components prior to application of loads to assemblies. e. Tighten loose connectors when of bolt type. f. Restrict construction loads to prevent overstressing of assembly members. 9. Do not cut or remove assembly members. NOTE: Frame in for 2 ' sheetrock boxes forl5 light fixtures as described in 09500 -03 for multi-purpose room. (Coordinate) . GLUE-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06181-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Furnish glue-laminated members. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Furnishing connectors for mounting glue-laminated beams to non-glue laminated supporting structure in Section 05500, Metals Fabrications. b•8 lr 06181-01 b. Erection of glue-laminated structural units in Section 06110, Framing and Sheathing. C. Providing temporary and permanent bracing in Section 06110. d. Providing stain in Section 09900, Painting. iw B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified manufacturer: Western Wood Structures, Inc. (Weyerhaeuser) and Timfab, Inc. or equal. 2. Quality standards: National Bureau of Standards , AITC and additional requirements of Section 06181. 3. Source quality control: Stamp all principal members with an indenting AITC or PTL (Pittsburgh Testing Lab) Quality Mark. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Shop drawing: Submit per 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal '&+ Procedures. a. Indicate particulars per AITC Attachments No. 1 and 2. Note grades and locations of laminates and ASTM number *W for adhesives for each unit. b. Show span, camber, size, pitch, location of units and unit's identification mark. C. Show appropriate erection instructions. 2. Certificates: Submit AITC certificates of conformance. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: ,. 1. Individually wrap exposed-to-view (in completed building) members. Wrap per AITC. 2. Wrapping of concealed members: Not required. 3. Unload per AITC. 4. Beams stockpiled or stored prior to erection in on-edge Position, resting upon temporary bearing supports and braced so as to be subjected to no unusual bending or to overturning. yr 06181-02 PRODUCTS W A. MATERIALS: 1. Lumber: Per "General Notes" on structural drawings. 2. Adhesive: ASTM wet-use adhesive. 3. Shop primer: None. B. FABRICATION: %W 1. Per PS 56-73 and additional requirements in Section 06181. 2. Camber beams as detailed. 3. Appearance grades: As defined in "Standard Appearance Grades + „ for Glue-Laminated Timber, " AITC and as further called for below. a. All locations concealed from persons other than err maintenance personnel: Industrial grade. b. All locations exposed-to-view (in maintenance building) : Industrial grade except misses not permitted in surfacing exposed faces and all exposed faces surfaced smooth per "Architectural Appearance Grade. " �"" 6-9 06181-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: Per Section 06110. B. ERECTION: Per Section 06110. TRUSSED ROOF JOISTS SECTION 06190 y:r 06190-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Furnish supplier designed trussed roof joists of open-web type fabricated from solid lumber. Furnish for locations shown and with x-bridging as indicated. See "General Notes" on structural drawings. 2. Related work in other sections includes erection of trussed roof joists in Section 06110, Framing and Sheathing. 3. Design conditions: Meet requirements of "Uniform Building Code" (UBC) of 1985 and criteria indicated per "General Notes" on structural drawings. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualifications: a. Of manufacturer: All work accomplished in properly equipped manufacturing facility of permanent nature, open to inspection by General Contractor and Architect. All manufacturing by experienced workmen, using precision cutting and fabricating equipment, under direct supervision of qualified foreman. b. Of truss engineering: ; Approved by Oregon registered professional engineer employed by truss manufacturer. C. Of lumber grading: Graded by WCLIB or WWPA or other rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee of West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau on or after September 1, 1970, unless higher stress ratings are shown on drawings or required by truss engineering design. C. SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings as indicated in "General Notes" on structural drawings. k 06190-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Lumber: Meet stress grade and dimension requirements indicated on engineering drawings. Moisture content at time of fabrication between 7% and 19%. All members from lumber grade stamped by qualified grading agency or association. q b-l0 w.r 06190-02 2. Connectors: In accordance with approved shop drawings. 3. Accessories provided by Joist supplier: Anchors for wood r. trusses, bridging and bearing plates. B. FABRICATION: 1. Members and connectors accurately placed. err 2. No open joints which depend on stiffness of metal connector plate to transmit stresses nor improperly fitting joints permitted. 3. Permanently stamp each Joist with name and address of fabricator. 06190-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: Per Section 06110. B. ERECTION: Per Section 06110. FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06200 Orr 06200-01 GENERAL w. A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Section 06200 specifies certain requirements common to work of Sections 06201, Wood Trim; and 06220, Millwork, in addition to installation specifications for following items furnished under other divisions: a. Metal Doors, Section 08100. rw■ b. Hardware listed in Finish Hardware Schedule and specified in Section 08710. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing wood trim in Section 06201. b. Providing millwork in Section 06220. C. Providing aluminum entrance doors in Section 08120. d. Providing plastic laminate casework, including cutouts insuch casework, in Section 12310. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualifications of wood products grading agencies: a. Lumber: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB) . b. Plywood: American Plywood Association (APA) . 2. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 6W a. Lumber grading rules: Meet requirements of "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules for West Coast Lumber" of WCLB, or "Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber" of 6W WWPA. b. Plywood grading rules: National Bureau of Standards U.S. Product Standard. %W to-II 06200-01 C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Submit shop drawings for detailed items of trim and other special millwork items. Submit per 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures. 2. Hardware installation tools: On completion of work, turn over to owner's representative two sets of special tools furnished by hardware supplier. Obtain signed receipt for same. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1. Delivery: Deliver materials ready to install without further machining or sanding needed before installation. 2. Moisture content: Between 6% and 12% on delivery and in storage. 3. Protection: Protect from damage through exposure, dampness and handling while in transit and storage. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Conditioning wood: a. Condition wood in location for installation to average prevailing humidity of location before installing. b. Place for installation: For interior installations, meet same temperature and humidity requirements as required per 01513-D for casework. 2. Allowable tolerances: a. Doors with warp or twist: 1/4" , maximum, from true plane. b. Other tolerances: Unobjectionable deviations from dimensions shown. 3. Protection: Take positive measures to keep work to receive transparent and semi-transparent finish clean and free of skin oil. 06200-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Wood: a: Grade and species: As shown and where not shown as specified in Sections 06201, Wood Trim; and 06220, Millwork. 2. Fastenings: Wood plugs for fastenings in concrete and/or masonry not permitted. a. Nails: In general, provide steel nails with diamond point for softwoods and blunt point for hardwoods. b. Screws: Screws exposed-to-view, weather or dampness: Brass where item secured is brass and, unless otherwise noted, stainless steel at all other locations requiring exposed screws. C. Concrete anchors: Rawl Products "Rawlplugs" , minimum 1" long, #9005 for #6 screws. �-12 tirw 06200-02 d. Glue: Waterproof adhesive (Phenol, resorcinol or ibw melamine base) meeting requirements of CS 253-63 for "Wet-Use" or ASTM, unless otherwise specified in Section 06220. B. FABRICATION: 1. Field Dimensions: Take such field dimensions as required. Report any major discrepancy between drawings and field L. dimensions to Architect. 2. Cut moldings, wood door and window frames, trims and stops clean, sharply defined. Ease edges to approximately 1/16" iW radius where edges are painted, varnished or stained. 3. Machine sand all flat work. 4. Finish and assemble millwork and finish trim at mill properly equipped and experienced in type of work required. 5. All glued work assembled under uniformly distributed pressure of minimum of 100 psi for softwood and 200 psi for hardwoods y until glue has cured to glue manufacturer's requirements. kw 6. Protective treatment: Treat in mill items specified treated by complete immersion for three minutes (30 seconds for veneer products) . rr rw. 06200-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: Allow painters time to stain and prime paint work required to be stained and primed per Section 09900, Painting, and allow time for stain and primer to dry before installation. Immediately after doors are fitted for hardware and before attaching hardware to doors, allow painter to seal entire wood 60 portions of door with two coats of finish. B. INSTALLATION: Yrr 1. Set all wood finish straight, plumb or level, in true alignment, closely fitted and rigidly fastened in place. Countersink heads of exposed fastenings for face putty. Conceal other fastenings where possible. 2. Make flush Joints carefully and leave smooth and even. Remove sharp external corners. Fit all Joints not flush on face by dressing off back. No face planing, excessive or cross grain %W sanding permitted. Clean up after installation with fine sandpaper and steel wool. 3. Doors and wood frames: Install per NWMA Standard Door Guarantee requirements and in accurate location, plumb and level. Fit doors to frames with following clearances: Top and lock edge 3/32", hinge edge 1/16", bottom 3/16" unless greater clearance is shown on "Door Schedule" for undercut doors. These clearances are after finishes are applied, yi 06200-03 including carpet. Bevel lock and hinge edges approximately . 1/8" in 2" . Clearance for transoms at top and sides of 1/16" . Machine doors for hardware to same clearance tolerances specified in 08210-02-B6-b, Premachining. 4. Finish hardware: Install hardware listed in Hardware Schedule and required to complete project. Set door hinges flush with edge surface and in a straight line. Drill and tap hollow metal doors for exit devices after doors are hung. Leave all hardware clean, securely fastened and in perfect working order. Fill under exterior door thresholds, except thresholds at aluminum doors, with full bed of sealant. Remove hardware, with the exception of prime coated hardware items, tag, box and reinstall after finish paint work is completed. See 08100-03 for additional requirements. 5. Cutouts: By carpenters only in finish carpentry items. C. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: 1. Hardware: Make adjustments to finish hardware, when required, during one-year guarantee period. See Section 08710 for , replacements for defective hardware. 2. Leave work clean, free from warp, twist and disfigurement, within allowable tolerances. MILLWORK SECTION 06220 06220-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide millwork as shown, as specified below, and as specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Work noted in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. b. Furnishing brackets for mounting wood chair-rails and handrails in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. 3. Following items of millwork are work of this section and are listed as a check list for Contractor's aid. List is by no means represented as complete. Final responsibility for providing all required items rests with General Contractor. a. 2"x 8"Oak Chair Rail at window openinqs. b. 1"x 4"Oak Base (See room finisil schedule) . .n �. i4 L. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION COLORLESS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07171 07171-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide colorless dampproofing on all interior and exterior unit masonry. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Cleaning and patching masonry in Section 04001, General Masonry Requirements. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Thoro System Products or equal. 2 . Qualifications of applicator: Minimum two years experience in comparable size projects. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Submit manufacturer's literature, specifications, equipment and safety recommendations and application instructions. 2 . Submit per 01341, Manufacturer's Instructions. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver materials in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name and type of material. r.+ 2 . Clearly mark percentage of acrylic resin and other solids on label of each container. 3 . Store materials in area where temperatures are not less than 50 degrees F. or over 85 degrees F. , unless otherwise authorized by manufacturer. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental requirements: a. Do not proceed with application of materials when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. W b. Do not apply water repellent in rainy conditions or within 7 days after surfaces become wet from rainfall or other moisture. c. Do not apply materials when low temperature of 40 degrees F. or less is predicted within a period of 24 hours after application. ` d. Provide ventilation or forced air circulation during and after interior application until all fumes are no longer evident. 2 . Application equipment: a. Apply with power driven low pressure (less than 20 psi) air- less coarse nozzle spray. b. Do not use equipment with rubber hose, as solvent reacts with some hose materials, causing discolorations in dampproofing 6' material. {1rr (lir 3 . Protection: 07171-01 a. Protect surfaces of materials not to receive colorless damp- proofing by positive means. Allow no spillage and overspray on surfaces not specified colorless dampproofed. Replace items from which colorless dampproofing cannot be removed to satisfaction of Architect which are not specified to receive colorless dampproofing. b. Follow all manufacturer recommended precautionary and safety measures. 4 . Sequencing: All sealant work per Section 07900, Sealants, completed before work of this section. 07171-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Thoroclear 777 manufactured by Standard Drywall Products, Inc. or equal. B. MIXES: 1. Do not dilute or alter material as packaged. 2 . Agitate per label directions. Keep cover on container when removal not necessary. 07171-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Examine surfaces to receive water repellent treatment to assure conditions are satisfactory for application of materials. 2 . See sections for substrate materials for cleaning in preparation for colorless dampproofing. B. PREPARATION: 1. Clean off foreign matter and efflorescence with stiff, dry, non-metallic bristle brush. 2 . Use no acid for cleaning substrates. 3 . If, under work of other sections, removing dust and dirt was done with water or detergent solution in water, allow 5 days drying time in dry weather and relative humidity above 50o and at least 3 days in dry weather and more favorable drying condi- tions, unless lower moisture content of material to receive colorless dampproofing is required by material manufacturer. C. APPLICATION: This is a clear, silicone, water repellent which provides invisible protection for above grade application where masonry is to be left exposed and unpainted. It meets U.S. Federal Specifications SS-W-110 b (GSA-FSS) and Canadian Specifications 58-GP-1. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean, free of stains and efflores- cence, thoroughly dry, sound and in good repair. Tuckpoint any , loose or defective joints. Caulk joints where required. Apply two coats completely flooding entire masonry surface with Thoro- ?-2 07171-03 clear 777 so there is a run down of 6-12 inches. Low pressure spray applications are preferred, but brushing is acceptable. Do not use high pressure spray. Allow 24 hours between coats. W Thoroclear 777 shall not be applied on surfaces which have been wet or rained upon during the 4 preceding days or if rain is anticipated within 2 hours after application. If walls cannot be thoroughly dried out and dampproofing is deemed necessary, allow 4 days for surface drying and apply first coat. Apply second coat when wall thoroughly dries. iw D. COVERAGE Thoroclear 777 should be applied in 2 coats with total coverage at 60-80 square feet per gallon. E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: I. Spray test: After water repellents have dried, spray coat sur- faces with water. ow 2. Recoat surfaces that show water absorption. FLEXIBLE BLANKET INSTALLATION SECTION 07210 07210-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: I. Provide flexible blanket insulation in all roof framing, except exterior breezeways. im 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing mineral wool insulations used for firesto Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing. PPing in b. Providing mechanical work insulation in Division 15, W Mechanical. 3 . Definition: R-value designations is thermal resistance of i insulation only, not including alleged air spaces or other factors assumed to result in higher R-values. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: I. Requirements of regulatory agencies: Meet U.L. hazard classifi- cations (fire) thus: a. Flame spread: 25 or less per ASTM E-84 . b. Fuel contribution : 15 or less. iAW c. Smoke developed: 30 or less. C. PRODUCT DELIVERY & STORAGE: I. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original 6" acka packaging. 2. Clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable standard and R-value. 3. Store materials off ground. 4 . Protect against weather, condensation and damage. 5. Immediately remove damaged material from site. 4r. -7-3 ;A 07210-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Blanket insulation: Owens Corning "Fiberglas" , or U.S. Gypsum "Thermafiber", Standard Building Insulation in rolls with asphalted Kraft vapor barrier having permeance of not over one perm and 1" face nailing flanges for nailing. a. Widths: As required by framing to fill spaces between framing members. b. Minimum "R" values of insulation only. (1) Above ceilings: R-30. 2 . Insulation anchorage: Staples, flattened, galvanized. Crown: 7/16" . Shank: 1/211 . 3. Fiberglas insulation required on interior walls of all baths and mechanical rooms. (bat insul . R-11) 07210-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Examine areas to receive flexible blanket insulation to insure protection against inclement weather and other hazards and determine that work of preceding trades is completed 2 . Examine space allocated for insulation for proper depth to receive material . 3 . Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory. B. PREPARATION: Remove or protect against projections in construction framing that may damage or prevent proper installation. C. INSTALLATION: 1. General: a. Fit insulation snugly between framing. b. Maintain integrity of insulation over entire area to be insulated. c. Insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members. d. Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduits and other obstructions. 2 . Faced insulation: a. Staple facing flanges to sides of wood framing at 8" centers, or closer as necessary to hold flanges tightly to framing members. b. Exercise care to insure integral vapor barrier is continuous over entire surface. c. Patch and seal punctures, tears or voids integral vapor barrier. d. Install faced insulation with integral vapor barrier toward warm-in-winter side of assembly. D. PATCHING: 1. Patch damaged vapor barrier with undamaged piece of vapor barrier place over damaged area to overlap undamaged portions of vapor barrier minimum of 8" . 2 . Secure patch with adhesive acceptable to Architect. E. CLEAN-UP: Remove accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, excess insulation materials and containers. Dispose of waste materials off site. 7-4 METAL ROOFING SECTION 07400 07400-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide standing seam metal roofing system over plywood sheathing. ( Show sample to owner Prior topurchase) . 2. Related work in other sections include: a. Metal gutters, and flashings in Section 07600, Sheet Metal rrr Work. b. Metal soffit system in Section 07500, Metal Soffits. c. Manufacturer: ASC Pacific, Inc. or approved equal. d. Klip Rib system: 24 gauge, 16" coverage, polyvinylidene finish (PVF2) . Color: Weathered Copper. Provide and install flashing and matching flat sheets, as required. If required, obtain panel lengths greater than 40 feet to eliminate endlaps. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: I. Qualifications of fabricator: Minimum of 5e ears equivalent projects. Y experience on 2. Qualifications of installer: Minimum of 3 years experience on equivalent projects. rrr C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Shop drawings - Submit complete details including vented hori- zontal and hip ridges, interface with continuous gutter system and fascia and barge cover flashing. 2. Manufactures instructions for installation of gutter and trim supplied by others. 30# tarpaper must be installed on top of Plywood. D. GUARANTEE: 1. Guarantee in writing, for materials and workmanship for water- tight installation for a period of 2 years after final accep- tance, and to repair any leaks at no cost to the Owner. 2. Provide 20 year guarantee from manufacturer covering color fade, chalking, rust, and film integrity per terms stated in Manufacturer's Warranty. 3. Submit guarantee per Section 01700, Project Closeout. 07400-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: I. Roof panels - 24 gage roll formed, Grade C steel - ASTM A-446 w/ zinc alum alloy coating conforming to ASTM A-792. 2. Surface coating - factory applied, baked-on, Polyvinylidene Fluoride PVF2 with 20y ear warranty. 3. Hold-down clips - manufacturer's concealed, stainless steel hold-down clips. E 4. Fastenings - wood grip screws or ring shank nails at 1 Roof sheathing ' naplywood. per manufacturer's specification. B. FABRICATION: „ 1. Lines and edges sharp and true. 2. Surfaces free of waves and buckles. 3. Shop formed corners, flashings, closures, etc. 7-5 07400-02 4. Makeproper ro er allowances for thermal movement. seams. 5. Fabricate materials for continuous runs with no horizontal 6 . Exposed air vents shall be installed on west roof of admin. bldg. and south roof of main. bldg. 07400-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Verify that plywood surface to receive metal roof system is clean and true and free of buckles. 2. Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. B. INSTALLATION: 1. Per manufacturer's recommendations and directions. 2. Install continuous gutters, metal soffit, flashings, and vent penetrations in coordination with roofing application. 3. Bed overlapping metal to metal thermal movement joints in seal- ant as specified by manufacturer. C. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Leave work clean, free of dents and objectionable blemishes. 2. Remove excess material from jobsite. METAL SOFFIT SECTION 07500 07500-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: panels with concealed 1. Provide continuous, flat interlocking p fastners. 2. Related work in other sections include: a. Metal gutters and flashings in Section 07600, Sheet Metal Work. b. Metal Roofing in Section 07400. 3. Manufacturer: ASC Pacific, Inc. or approved equal. 4 . PS (R-1) -12, 24 gauge, 12" modules, smooth and perforated (for ventilation) in 12" widths. Color: white. 5. Vertical soffit ends: Smooth, non-perforated panels. Install r flashing and (roof) matching (Weathered Copper) flat sheets. 6. Install soffit panels perpendicular to walls with liner caps at wall and fascia. 2x4 blocking at wall and fascia and center ry span is required for fastening. (Fastening spacing not to exceed 3' 0" ) . 7 . Soffit at breezeways (between beams or beams in wall) is same as para 4 above, with no perforations - perpendicular to walls. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualifications of fabricator: Minimum of 5 years experience on equivalent projects. 2. Qualifications of installer: Minimum of 3 years experience on equivalent projects. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Submit complete details including layout of joints, mitered corners and joint trim for architects approval. 2. Manufacturers instructions for installation of gutters and trim supplied by others. 7-6 07500-01 D. GUARANTEE: 1. Guarantee in writing, for materials and workmanship for water- tight installation for a period of 2 years after final accep- tance, and to repair any leaks at no cost to the Owner. %W 2. Provide 20 year guarantee from manufacturer covering color fade, chalking, rust, and film integrity per terms stated in manufacturer's warranty. 3. Submit guarantee per Section 01700, Project Closeout. 07500-02 A. MATERIALS: or er 1. Soffit Panels - 24 gage roll formed, Grade A/ steel - ASTM A-446 w/ zinc alum alloy coating conforming to ASTM A-792 . 2 . Surface Coating - factory applied, baked-on, smooth finish, polyvinylidene fluoride PVF2 with 20 year warranty. 3. Fastenings - concealed wood grip screws into 2" non-roof framing at 24" o.c. per manufacturer's directions. 4. Soffit panels: install perpendicular to eave. B. FABRICATION: 1. Lines and edges sharp and true. 2. Surfaces free of waves and buckles. 3 . Shop formed, corners, flashings, closures, etc. 4 . Make proper allowances for thermal movement. + 5. Fabricate materials for runs as long as possible, with horizon- tal seams in accordance with approved shop drawing layout. 07050 -03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Verify that wood framing members at 2'-0" true. o.c. are level and 2 . Verify that blocking and nailer installation as required is complete. r.► 3 . Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. B. INSTALLATION: 1. Per manufacturer's recommendations and directions. 2. Install continuous gutters, metal soffit, flashings, and vent penetrations in coordination with soffit application. ' " 3. Bed overlapping metal to metal thermal movement joints in sealant as specified by manufacturer. C. ADJUST AND CLEAN: iW 1. Leave work clean, free of dents and objectionable blemishes. 2 . Remove excess material from jobsite. rr r. r. 7-7 } SHEET METAL WORK SECTION 07600 . (GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS & FLASHING) 07600-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide pre-painted galvanized steel sheet metal work fabricated from flat rolled sheet or strips of 24 gage metal as shown for roof flashings, counterflashings, gutters and gutter outlet tubes. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing wood nailers for securing sheet metal work, Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing. b. Providing flashing of pipes and ducts passing through roofs, and piping from roof drains in Division 15, Mechanical. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualifications of fabricator: Minimum of 5 years experience on equivalent projects. 2 . Erector qualifications: Minimum of 3 years experience on equivalent projects. C. JOB CONDITIONS: Deliver work to be embedded in roofing to jobsite at start of roofer's work. D. GUARANTEE: 1. Guarantee, in writing, material and workmanship of all parts of building made watertight at sheet metal work for period of two years after final acceptance with normal usage, and to repair any such leaks as may occur without cost to Owner. 2 . Provide 20 year guarantee from manufacturer for pre-painted flashings covering color fade, chalking and film integrity per terms stated in "Warranty" . 3 . Submit guarantee per Section 01700, Project Closeout. 07600-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Galvanized steel: a. Pre-painted sheets: 24 gage "ColorKlad" as manufactured by Vincent Brass & Aluminum Co. For local distrributoor call r selected Eagle Metal, Inc. of Oregon (288-6861) . by Architect from 8 standard colors. (Owner to approve) . b. Un-painted sheet: Steel coated with minimum of 0.80 oz . zinc per square foot, meeting requirements for G90 coating per ASTM A525. Gage, unless otherwise shown: Hold-down cleats of 16 gage. 2 . Solder: Best commercial quality, 50-50 tin and lead or approved. 3 . Wire basket strainers: 0.054" diameter wire in type 400 series stainless steel. 4 . Fastenings: 7-0 07600-02 „ a. Nails: Ring shank or drive screw type with large head and length to penetrate wood 111, minimum. Exposed nails with galvanized steel washers backing neoprene washers. Gal- vanized for G.I. work, unless otherwise noted. low b. Screws: Pan head Teks/2 , No. 8-18 x length required to penetrate into wood 1” and thru metal 3/811, unless other size and type shown. Furnish with neoprene sealing washer at i. exposed weather locations. Galvanized finish. Teks "Twin Seal" type washer where screw head exposed to weather. 5. Sealant: One part acrylic polymeric. Tremco "Mono" or Pecora 1160 + Unicrylic", or Glidden "Maccolastic" . Color to closely match abutting finished surface. 6. Paints: a. Primer: Rodda Paint Co. No. 2913 "Zinc Dust Primer" or SSPC- Paint 5-64T. b. Finish enamel paint to match roof color exactly. B. FABRICATION: 1. General: a. Lines and edges sharp and true. b. Surfaces free of waves and buckles. c. Surfaces cleaned per SSPC-SP 1-63 . d. Shop prime all un-painted galvanized metal one coat, except surfaces to receive silicone sealant and field applied solder. e. Corners for flashings, coping caps and roofing stops: Shop form corner units for structure corners. Form to extend at least 1' each side of structure corner. f. Hem free edges to produce columnar rigidity. g. Make proper allowances for thermal movement of sheet metal and for movement between sheet metal and other building elements. h. Fabricate materials for runs in longest practical lengths, unless other lengths are shown. Gutters to be continuous (unseamed) . i. Extend downspout eave tubes 6" below gutter, unless otherwise shown. 2 . Prefinished material: a. Cut, form, nail, solder and rivet using conventional hand and power tools. b. Where soldering is required, mechanically remove coating only bw to extent necessary for sound joint. Use minimum of heat, protecting finish beyond joint area from heat which damages paint finish. c. Keep cutting edges of tools, sharp, clean, properly dressed and closely aligned. d. Fabricate with strippable film in place, except at areas of lapped joints. e. Touch-up painting: After fabrication but before installa- tion, thoroughly clean sheet metal to remove all traces of grease, oil, dirt or other surface contaminants. Paint iW 7-9 07600-02 , ,31 surfaces of prefinished steel where coating was removed for soldering 3 coats. (1) First coat: Specified primer. (2) Second and third coats: Specified touch-up paint. 07600-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Verify that work to receive sheet metal is in condition to receive sheet metal; wood and other anchorage items to receive sheet metal work are securely anchored, correctly located, and in proper alignment; surfaces are dry, free of frost and protru- sions interfering with sheet metal installations; preceding work is free of conditions that will adversely affect permanence. 2 . Assure that treatments and coatings required on prior work are completed and have dried. 3 . Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. B. PREPARATION: 1. Coat concealed portions of sheet metal with bitumen or separate with building paper where electrolysis may occur. Use acrylic sealant at exposed-to-view locations for electrolysis control. 2 . Install hold-down cleats where required. C. INSTALLATION: 1. General: a. Make exterior work as permanently weathertight as best prac- tices permit. b. Install proprietary materials per manufacturer's printed directions and recommendations. c. Install sheet metal work embedded in metal roofing in coordi- nation with roofing application. d. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. e. Wherever possible, prime paint field soldered joints after soldering. f. Neutralize acid fluxed soldered joints with sodium bicarbo- nate and wash clean with water, allow to dry before priming. g. Bed overlapping metal-to-metal thermal movement joints in full bed of sealant over entire lapped surfaces. Minimum lap 311, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2 . Joints: a. Stagger joints horizontally in flashings 6" minimum where runoff from sheet metal above has joint. b. Use rivets, where practical to reinforce joints. Solder rivets weathertight. Tin soldered joints 1/211 , minimum, beyond laps. 3 . Counterflashings: a. Vertical joints lapped, corners with closed miters. b. Width to overlap base flashings 4" minimum, unless otherwise shown. 7-10 07600-03 4. Fastenings: a. Gutters: Secure as shown and as required for permanent installation, allowing for thermal movement. Surround building side of gutter with "Combination Sheet" . Kraft side toward gutter. 5. Install basket strainer at each downspout outlet from gutter. 6. Install all work with proper allowances for thermal movement of n work and substrate. In general, allow for 160 degrees F. over- all temperature range. 7. Field painting: Field paint field soldered joints same as specified for shop painted joints. Field paint fastenings heads and accessible surfaces of installed pre-painted sheet metal with touch-up paint. D. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Leave work clean, free of stains and foreign matter, watertight and free of objectionable blemishes. 2 . Remove excess material and debris from jobsite. �r lrr j 7-11 SEALANTS SECTION 07900 07900-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide sealant caulking at all locations shown, except those locations noted in 112" below. Provide sealant caulking between all wall mounted plumbing fixtures, both surface and recess mounted, and abutting finishes and between masonry units and electrical finish plates at electrical boxes. 2 . Related work in other sections include: a. Providing sealant bedding for thresholds in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. b. Providing sealant work for: (1) Sheet metal work per Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal. (2) Concealed joints within and concealed by aluminum windows per Section 08520. (3) Installation of glass per Section 08800, Glass & Glazing. c. Providing sealant work for making weathertight mechanical and electrical installations where opening requiring sealant work is not shown on architectural drawings in Division 15, and Division 16, Electrical. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified sealant manufacturers: a. General Electric Co. b. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Qualifications of applicator: Minimum of 3 years experience on equivalent projects. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Submit manufacturer's instructions per 01341, Manufacturer's Instructions. 2 . Warranty: Submit silicone rubber sealant manufacturer's standard warranty on applied material. Indicate date on which warranty expires. Submit per guarantee requirements of Section 01700, Project Closeout. "F D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver packaged material in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing date of manufacture and brand name of manufacturer. 2 . Store packaged material in the dry and at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Existing conditions: Allowable deviation in joint width dimen- sion in preceding work requiring caulking from width shown: a. Between concrete elements: 50% greater and 50% less. b. Between concrete and metal or masonry elements: 25% greater and 25% less. c. Between metal elements: 25% greater and 25% less. 1-12 iW 07900-01 ,. 2 . Environmental requirements: a. Ambient temperature in area of joint work: Above 40 degrees F. from two hours before any sealant work is done and during time of application of sealants. ' b. Surfaces to receive sealant: Dry, frost-free. 3 . Protection of surfaces not to receive sealant: a. Allow no primer for sealant to contact exposed-to-view sur- faces more that 1/4" from location to receive sealant. b. Allow no sealant to contact exposed-to-view surfaces more than 1/8" from location shown at recessed joints and more that 1/16" at flush joints. 4 . Sequencing: Complete sealant work before colorless damp- proofing, glaze coating and jobsite painting of sealant abutting surfaces. 07900-02 PRODUCTS i`. A. MATERIALS: 1. Sealants: a. Type: Silicone rubber, exterior type at exterior and interi- or, one-part, except only G.E. 1700 or Dow Corning 785 (nonporous surfaces) at plumbing fixtures. b. Brand names, product series numbers and colors. (1) G.E. SCS01300. (2) G.E. Silpruf. (3) Dow-Corning 790. (4) Dow-Corning 780. 6w 2 . Primer: Per sealant manufacturer's latest recommendation for securing maximum bond. 3 . Back-up filler: Polyethylene foam sealant backer. Dow "Ethafoam SB" rod or P.R.C. "Minicel" of size to have in-place compressed width across joint of between 60% and 75% or original diameter. 4 . Bond breaker tape: Polyethylene film tape with one adhesive w face. 07900-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Examine surfaces to receive sealant to assure that they are fully installed, cured, patched and cleaned as required by work %P of sections relating to that material. 2 . Check joint widths for conformance with acceptable tolerances. 3 . Assure that sealant substrates are dry and free from conditions iw that will adversely affect execution, permanence and quality of work. 4 . Proceed only when conditions are satisfactory. B. PREPARATION: Within 24 hours of sealant application perform following: 1. Wash concrete and masonry to remove soluble alkaline salts. 1-19 07900-03 2 . Remove all loose friable particles on concrete and masonry with wire brush. 3 . Remove dust and loose dirt by blowing out joints with compressed air which is free of oil and moisture or by vacuum cleaning. 4 . Wipe metal with oil-free solvent on solvent soaked clean cloth. 5. Apply bond breaker tape to back of finish plates at electrical outlets and switches in slump block where sealant contacts plate. C. INSTALLATION: 1. Where sealant manufacturer recommends priming or indicates maximum adhesion developed if primer is used, apply primer per sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. Prime only those surface areas to receive sealant. 2 . Install backer rod with plain faced roller, without stretching rod longitudinally and without puncturing surface skin on rod. Compress backer to between 60% and 75% of original diameter. Recess backer at concrete and masonry joints to maintain exposed face of sealant 1/4" back of beginning of parallel sides of joint. See details. Depth of sealant at thinnest point half width of joint for joints over 1/4" wide up to 3/4" wide. Joints 3/4" wide and wider with 3/8" depth of sealant at thin- nest point. For joints 1/4" wide and under, depth of sealant 1/811. Back rod not required at plumbing fixtures and electrical finish plates. 3 . Apply sealant under continuous pressure with pressure type equipment. Fill joints solid without voids. Remove excess sealant material and leave joint and adjacent materials neat, and clean, with solvent tooled flat faced sealant joint. D. CLEANING UP: 1. Remove excess sealant from non-pourous surfaces while sealant is still uncured, using solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer which will not damage surfaces. 2 . On porous surfaces, allow excess sealant to cure, then remove by abrasion or other mechanical means which will do no damage to these surfaces. 3 . Remove tools, equipment and surplus materials from each area as work is completed. 4 . Upon completion of work of this section, clean up rubbish and remove from site. 7-►4 } DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS HOLLOW METAL DOORS & HOLLOW METAL FRAMES SECTION 08100 08100-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Furnish following hollow metal work as shown and indicated by symbols. Symbol "HM" for non-fire rate assemblies and Symbol "HMU" for fire rate assemblies. Furnish steel doors, mullions, sidelight frames, relite frames, exterior wall louver subframe and door frames. See drawings, "Door Schedule", and details for sizes, arrangements, styles and locations. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Installation of frame anchors embedded in masonry and relite frames fully surrounded by masonry in Section 04001, General Masonry Requirements. b. Installation of hollow metal door and relite frames, Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing, except relite frames fully surrounded by masonry. w+• c. Installation of hollow metal doors and hardware on doors and frames in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. d. Providing aluminum doors and frames in Section 08120. e. Providing coiling doors in Section 08330. f. Furnishing hardware in Section 08710, Finish Hardware. g. Providing glass and glazing in Section 08800. h. Providing finish paint coats over primer in Section 09900, Painting. J B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified manufacturers: Grand Metal Products, Curries Mfg. Co. Corp. or approved equal. 2 . Requirements of regulatory agencies: Provide U.L. labeled hollow metal doors where indicated on "Door Schedule" . Provide "Fire Class" doors with U.L. labeled hollow metal frames. Provide doors with U.L. rating indicated on schedule, and provide both doors and frames with required labels. Modify Architect's specifications and details, if required, to secure labels. C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Delivery: a. Pad doors to prevent contact with anything but padding. b. Deliver frames fully assembled and with spreaders to assure alignment. i 2 . Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work in manner to prevent damage and deterioration. 3. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least 1" or 1' more off ground or floor and at least 1/2" between individual kw pieces. 4 . Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer. "r r. 6-1 08100-01 D. JOB CONDITIONS: Hardware: Arrange attachments for hardware as follows: Hardware supplier will supply door manufacturer with correct and complete templates for all items installed at jobsite. 08100-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: F 1. Steel: a. Sheet steel: Prime grade, cold rolled, stretcher leveled, full pickled by treatment at mill; free from scale, warp and buckles. Sheet steel of United States standard gages noted in these specifications. b. Hardware reinforcement steel: Per ASTM standards. 2 . Primers and surfacers: a. For frames: Rodda Paint Co. , Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer - Oxide Red, or Fuller Paint Co. , or approved equal . b. For doors: Rodda (Grey) Synthetic Primer and Surfacer or Fullers, or approved. 3 . Glass stops: 18 gage furniture stock steel. 4 . Shims: Galvanized steel of size and thickness to fully distri- bute loads without distortion. 5. Fastenings: a. For glass stops: Cadmium plated screws with oval head, sheet metal threads. J, b. Sizes: As required for rigid installation. Not less than 3/8" diameter bolt for fastenings into concrete. 6. Wall louvers: Provide 2 adjustable 32" x 54" air louvers ("Z" blades) w/bronze fly screen 1 ft. above finished floor. (RM 2104, a. Manufacturer: Grand Metal Products, Portland, Oregon. b. Model No. 1100. c. Color: Dark Brown: 7 . Hardware Reinforcements: Hinge, door closer and exit device reinforcement 3/16" steel. Latch tapping plates 3/16" x l 1/4" x 4" long, minimum. 8 . Sealant: Tremco Mfg. Co. "Mono" , 1 part acrylic, tan color. B. FABRICATION: 1. Hollow metal doors: 1 3/4" thick flush type hollow metal doors of size indicated on Door Schedule; steel not less than 18 gage for face sheets, internal reinforcing channel stiffeners, etc. Hinge, door closer and exit device reinforcement 3/16" x 1 1/2" x 10" flat bar steel. Pan form door face sheets to meet in center of door edges. Install internal bracing channels around entire pan perimeter and full height of door, space not over 6" o.c. , spot welded not less than 4" o.c. Install sound deadening fireproof insulation between vertical stiffeners full height and width. Weld edges of doors full length and grind flush. Weld into top edge of exterior doors continuous channel cap, set with web of channel approximately 1/16" below door top. Seal all channel web perimeters to face pans with specified �r> Af 8 na bw 08100-02 sealant. Bevel doors 1/8" in 2" at latch stile. Fit doors to 3/32" clearance in frames, 3/8" over finished floors, including carpeted floors, and 3/16" over thresholds, unless other clearances at threshold is required by threshold hardware or drawings indicate greater clearance. 2 . Frame fabrication: a. Hollow metal door, and louver subframe: Frames, integral, of 16 gage steel. Wall ties of steel in gages and design per UL requirements where Fire Class doors occur. Furnish ties for frame installation in masonry adjustable for r position on jamb, one tie for each 16" of jamb length. Furnish floor anchor clips, Phillips "Red Head" type con- crete anchors, bolts and other items shown or required. Make corners and rises sharp and 'clean cut, miter all frame corners, fit miters to within 0.025" of closed, fully weld trim face joints and tack weld joint at rabbets and stop on interior side of frame to maintain joint alignment. Grind exposed-to-view joints to produce invisible joint. Seal unwelded portions of joints on interior of frame at frames for exterior locations and frames in masonry walls with specified sealant or by welding fully across interior depth of frame to watertight condition. Hinge reinforcement: Full depth of jamb x 10" long x 3/16" thick with four spot welds at each point of contact. Furnish stops for glass mounted in sidelights. Provide drip cap per detail. 3 . Hardware preparation: Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface applied hardware. a. Drill and tap mortise reinforcements at factory, using tem- plates, except for exit devices which finish carpenters drill and tap after doors are hung. b. Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to develop full strength of reinforcements per details. c. Prime coat painting: After completion of fabrication, thoroughly degrease, clean and bonderize work by steam chemical process. Give external surfaces of doors 2 coats, minimum, of primer surfacer. Sand first coat(s) on doors so visible surfaces are free of spots or depressions and final *A coat of primed work presents flat, smooth appearance. 08100-03 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: Per Sections 06110 and 06200 and thus: 1. All shimming of steel frames by use of specified steel shims. Place shims to give full bearing under connectors and select shim size to prevent warping of frame and to make permanently rigid installation. Shims concealed by minimum of 1/2" covering by abutting finish. 2 . Hollow metal doors projecting beyond frame when door is closed will be rejected. (ir bw 8 3 ALUMINUM DOORS & ALUMINUM FRAMES SECTION 08120 08120-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide entrance doors, door frames, sidelight and transoms frames of aluminum at locations indicated in "Door Schedules" by Symbol ALUM. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing sealant compound between exterior frames and abut- ting materials in Section 07900, Sealants. b. Furnishing all hardware in Section 08710, Finish Hardware. c. Installation in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, of hardware items furnished per Section 08710. d. Providing glass and glazing in Section 08800, Glass & Glazing. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified manufacturer: Kawneer Architectural Products, Fentron Industries, U. S. Aluminum or equal. 2 . Erector qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience on comparable projects. 3 . Allowable tolerances: a. Members straight to within 1/1500 of length. b. Openings to receive frames: True in size, shape and in true plane +/- 1/18". c. Completed assemblies: Free from twists, bends, and open joints. d. Door clearances: As indicated in manufacturer's full size } details. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Submit shop drawings to show materials, arrangements, profiles, thickness, size of sections, size of openings, door clearances, assembly and erection details, fastenings, anchor locations, anchors, reinforcement, clearances, weatherstripping, hardware coordination and necessary connections to work of other trades. 2 . Submit shop drawings per 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver product in manufacturer's original unopened packages with labels legible and intact. 2 . Identify packages with manufacturer's brand name, size, finish and location of installation. 3 . Store unopened packages in protected dry area. Protect from weather and damage. 4 . Store in designated areas as close as possible to point of installation in upright position off ground on dunnage. 08120-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Aluminum entrance materials, including doors, door frames, transom and sidelight frames and threshold: 8-4 �r 08120-02 a. Extruded sections: AX63-52T alloy with physical and mechani- cal properties equal to 6063-T5 aluminum alloy or 6063-T5 alloy. b. Glazing stops and beads: Snap-on stops, minimum of 1/16" thick, with non-stretch, high shore vinyl of bronze color for both sides of glass. Designed for 1" thick insulating glass. c. Fastenings: Screws, nuts, bolts and fastening devices aluminum, stainless steel or other non-corrosive material. Metallic expansion anchors for anchorage to concrete and masonry. d. Framing sections: Manufacturer's specifications, including pile weather-stripping in frame head, both jambs and mullion. e. Finish: Color anodized, "Dark Bronze". 2 . Sealant: a. For threshold: One-part polysulfide base (Thiokol) with manufacturer's recommended primers. b. For concealed joints: G.E. "Silglaze". +► 3. Bituminous paint: ASTM standards. 4. Finish hardware: a. RIXON 28 door closers on doors 1 and 2; RIXON 30 on door 3. ef , b. 7" wide bronze thresholds. c. TICE Industries No. 33 bronze back to back push bars. d. ARMS 3-point lock T-turn and indicator with sign posted over exterior doors reading "This door must remain unlocked during business hours" in letters not less than one inch in height on a contrasting background. 5. All shims aluminum and of dimensions to carry loads without deforming supported sections. B. FABRICATION: i. 1. Provide sections with clean, straight, sharply defined lines, free from defects impairing strength and durability. a 2 . Doors: Symmetrical top rails and stiles, completely weather- , stripped, securely joined and reinforced. 3. Make cutout operations accurately for hardware preparation and reinforce. 4 . Fit snap-in glazing beads, ready for glazing. 5. Factory preparation so fabricated that field assembly will pro- duce accurate tightly fitted joints. 6. Fabricate per approved shop drawings and hardware list. 08120-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Examine openings to receive frames for completeness and accuracy of preparation called for in other sections. 2 . Assure that surfaces to contact frames are clean, uniform, ' sound, dry, free of irregularities, excessive obstructions or projections and other unsatisfactory conditions. 3 . Start work when unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. PREPARATION: 1. Aluminum isolated from concrete and masonry with bituminous paint, including shims. 2. Put weatherstripping in place and correctly adjust. 8-5 C. ERECTION: 08120-03 1. Erect in accordance with instructions furnished by manufacturer. 2. Set work plumb and true, properly aligned, without warp or rack, securely anchored, and with proper provisions for thermal induced movement. 3 . Corner joints sealed with full bead of sealant. Make frames and doors watertight. D. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Adjust movable units to operate smoothly and to be weathertight when closed. 2. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3. Cleaning: Remove protective materials and excess sealant from work. Clean aluminum with household soap or detergent and drinking water. 4 . Remove debris from work site. WOOD DOORS SECTION 08150 .'' A. DESCRIPTION: 1-3/4" Particle core, 7 ply Oak veneer with matching vertical edges. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Qualified manufacturers - Vancouver Door Company, Western Door Co. , or approved equal. C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1 . Delivery: a. Pad doors to prevent contact with anything but padding. b. Deliver frames fully assembled and with spreaders to assure alignment. 2 . Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work in manner to prevent damage and deterioration. 3. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least 1" or more off ground or floor and at least 1/2" between individual pieces. 4. Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer. 8-b OMMMMUMMOMMONOW 1r COILING DOORS SECTION 08330 08330-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide roll-up doors shown on plans. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing structural steel shapes and other steel shapes associated with work of this section and not specified below are in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. b. Providing finish painting over door manufacturer's primer in Section 09900, Painting. c. Providing field wiring and disconnect switches, Division 16, Electrical. . s B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp. , or approved equal. 2. Underwriters Laboratories requirements: Provide UL labeled roll-up door of "Fire Class" . Required for Type V N (Sprinklered) building. C. SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with 01340, Shop Drawings & Samples. Show supporting construction requirements and clearances required, method of anchoring, servicing access re- quirements and other pertinent details as apply to this project. 08330-1 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: The following material and fabrication specifications are based upon the Overhead Door Corporations - 422 Series, Insulat- ed steel sectional doors. 1. 9 - 12' x 14' (nominal opening) sectional upward acting doors. 2 . Top and bottom sections - 2" thick (nominal) , 24 gauge. Gal- vanized steel. 3 . Factory painted both sides (baked on epoxy enamel) . Finish color selected by Owner. 4 . Glass panels at section - 4'-6' above floor at each door. 5. Tracks: Galvanized, angle mounted for steel vamps. 3"wiDE tgy W/ 6. Hinges: Galvanized steel, full floating ball bearing rollers. 7. Optional perimeter seals to prevent air leak. 8. Insulation: Provide manufacturer' s standard polystyrene with 26 gauge backer panel for R- value. 9. Window panes: Provide one row of manufacturer' s standard porthole windows with insulated DSB glass. (Solar bronze tinted) . rw on 8-7 08330-1 10. Electric door operators (9) : Provide model SFL-250 drawbar openers as manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation. Provide 3/4 HP instant reversing with automatic reset thermal overload protection. Furnish heavy duty reversing contactor with both mechanical and electrical interlock and adjustable rotary type limit switches. Provide solenoid actuated drum type brake to lock door in any position. Furnish electrically operated safety reversing door edge. Door to reverse to the full open position if obstruction is sensed. Provide 3-button station marked "open - close - stop" in Type 1 enclosure on inside of wall and key actuated switch mounted on exterior wall. All switches to be keyed alike. 08330-03 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Install per approved shop drawings under supervision of sales representative of door supplier. 2. Install in perfect alignment, free from warp, twist or distortion. Lubricate moving parts and adjust door to operate smoothly, without binding. 88 } r. ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 08520 08520-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide aluminum windows designed for outside glazing at all exterior window openings in size and arrangement shown. Provide complete with all required anchors, hardware, accessories and with preformed gasket between windows and masonry. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing of openings to receive aluminum windows and instal- ling windows in masonry in Section 04220, Clay Unit Masonry. b. Providing caulking and sealants between aluminum windows and openings to receive windows per Section 07900, Sealants. c. Providing glass and glazing in 08800, Glass & Glazing. y d. Providing aluminum doors, including transom and side lights per Section 08120, Aluminum Doors & Aluminum Frames. B. SUBMITTALS: Indicate alloy of materials, arrangement, profiles of sections, thickness of members, size of parts, size of openings, clearance, assembly and erection details, gaskets at perimeter of sash in masonry, fastenings, fastening locations, anchorage materials and locations, reinforcement, hardware and finishes of aluminum and hardware. Submit per requirements of 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures. 08520-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: aw 1. Aluminum window extrusions. 2 . Window frame, ventilators and muntin sections minimum 1 1/2" deep, web total thickness, either single or tubular, not less Yw than 0. 093" (3/32" +/-) and weathering members not less than 0. 095" thick. y 3 . Glazing beads: Extrusions for rock-in installation at insulated panels and insulated glass. Square shape extrusions for snap-in installation, minimum of 0. 050" thick at single glazing. 4 . Weatherstripping Geon vinyl, No. 70 durometer Shore A or equal. 5. Miscellaneous materials such as necessary shims, anchors and fastenings provided in aluminum alloys or austenitic (non- magnetic) stainless steel that will not promote corrosion. 6. Sealant compound: General Electric "Silglaze" or Dow Corning 11781" . 7. Sealant tape: Butyl base rubber with 100% solids, non-volatile material, 1/16" thick, adhesive one side. 8. Neoprene channels: DuPont "Neoprene" . Color: Black. Adhesive: Recommended by channel manufacturer. 9. Mullions of extruded aluminum of sections shown, except mullion sections shall have moment of inertia of not less than that required to have not over length/180 deflection at uniform wind loading of 15 lbs. per square foot, regardless of mullion section shown. 8-9 B. FABRICATION: 08520-02 1. Corners of frames coped and mechanically fastened together or mitered and rigidly welded together. Muntin bars and meeting rails tenoned and air hammer riveted. 2 . Attach gaskets to sash installedin masonry with adhesive. Miter corners. Fill bottoms of gasket pockets with adhesive. , C. FINISHES: Finish all exposed-to-view aluminum thus: 1. Anodized finishes per requirements of "Aluminum Association Standards for Anodically Coated Aluminum Alloys for Architec- tural Applications". 2 . Complete welding, then acid etch before anodic finishing. 3 . Anodic coating: Satin finish producing dark range bronze color. 08520-03 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Examine condition of openings and surfaces to receive windows for conformance to requirements of other sections. Do not proceed with installation at openings found unacceptably out of plumb and level and not acceptably clear of debris and obstructions. Notify General Contractor of deficiencies. 2 . Window work installed by experienced workmen per window manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Windows installed plumb and level. 3 . Windows securely anchored per shop drawings. Anchors as maxi- mum spacing of 24" o.c. and not more than 6" from each side of each end of mullions nor more than 6" from each corner of each window. r; 4 . Seal weathertight all metal-to-metal joints within window units and joints between window and aluminum mullions included in this subcontract with specified sealants applied in accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions using sealant primer when recommended by sealant manufacturer. Apply sealant tape where wood trim is shown abutting exterior sash leg. 5. At time of installation, remove all excess sealants and all dirt, damage, or disfiguration resulting from work. Leave all aluminum window work clean and free of discoloration. Final cleaning in Section 01710. ?F B-10 aw FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08710 08710-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Furnish for installation per Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, all finish hardware and related items necessary to complete the work, unless specifically excepted in this section. If hardware s for specific locations is not described or indicated in this or other sections, furnish required hardware same as specified for similar locations and of no lesser quality. rr Hardware items for each door are indicated by numerical symbol in Door Schedule on plans. Numerical symbols on drawings are keyed to Hardware Schedule in 08710-03. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Angle type thresholds in Section 05500. t b. Installation of finish hardware furnished per this section in Section 06200. c. Prefabricated plastic laminate casework hardware except cabinet locks, in Section 12310. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualifications: a. Of manufacturer: Where manufacturer is named in this section, furnish only that manufacturer's product. Substitu- tion of unspecified items or makes not permitted without prior approval of Architect in writing. b. Of dealer: Hardware furnished only by direct dealer autho- rized by manufacturer at each item specified. c. Of supplier: Operate competent recognized "contract" hardware department. d. Of representative: Experience, competent person, capable of assisting in applying and adjusting all items at jobsite and shops of subcontractors. o C. SUBMITTALS: s 1. Master keys: Deliver directly to Owner, by Registered Mail, all required master keys. Obtain signed receipt from Owner. Submit required number of copies to Architect per Section 01700, Project Closeout. Warning: Unless all master keys are so delivered and receipted for, all locks must be changed to new master key system without additional cost to Owner. 2 . Furnish hollow metal and aluminum door and frame manufacturers with correct and complete templates of items connected with work of Section 08710, and furnish templates on request of Division 10 suppliers. 3 . Samples: When requested by Architect, submit samples of finish +rww hardware before ordering or furnishing. Leave samples with Architect until substantial completion of project. 8-f I 08710-01 4. Hardware schedule: As soon as practical after award of Contract, but not later than 30 days from that date, submit four (4) copies of complete Finish Hardware Schedule per Section 01340. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1. Delivery: Deliver hardware to job or, when specified or re- quested, to subcontractor's shop in time for inspection before setting. 2 . Packaging: Package separately for each location. Mark and number each package to indicate location for installation. Key marking to schedule and indicate on schedule, to accompany each shipment, all items for each location for installation 3 . Special tools: Furnish General Contractor with two sets of specified installation tools for use during construction. 08710-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Fastenings: Furnish hardware fastenings for various locations thus: Exterior fastenings solid bronze or stainless steel to match specified finish of item fastened. a. Solid wood core doors: All hardware items with sheet metal type screws. b. Gypsum core doors: Door closers and exit devices with six bolts. All other hardware with sheet metal type screws. c. Hollow metal doors: Exit devices, closers, butts, push and pulls with machine screws. Kick plates and weatherstripping with sheet metal type screws. d. Door stops and holders: (1) Exposed-to-view locations: All spanner head: (a) Sheet metal USA Type AB threads at wood. (b) Machine screws in tapped holes at steel. (c) Machine screws with Rawl "Caulk-In" type anchors at concrete. (2) Concealed-to-view locations: All Phillips head: Same as exposed-to-view locations except head. e. Thresholds: 1/4 - 20, minimum, machine screws, Phillips head with Rawl "Caulk-In" type anchors. 2 . Hinges: a. Sizes: Furnish in width as required by swing and trim. Projection determined by formula: Twice the door thickness plus trim projection minus 1/211 . Following sizes are length of hinge joint: (1) Wood or metal doors up to 24" wide . . 4" (2) Over 24" and up to 41" wide. . . . . . . 4 1/2" (3) Over 41" and up to 47" wide. . . . . . . 5" Extra Heavy (4) Over 47" wide. . . . . . . . 6" Extra Heavy b. Number required: All regular doors: 1 1/2 pair; any door over 8' high and any over height UL labeled door: 2 pair. g-i2 w 08710-02 c. Ball bearing type: Five knuckle, non-rising full floating, stainless steel pin, flush tip, concealed bearings with full length "Oilite" bronze lateral bearings. Furnish all hinges on outswinging exterior doors with Allen head stainless steel set screws in barrel to make pins non-removable. Groove pins in centerline of top knuckle to re- ceive set screws. Furnish hinges required in Hardware Schedule. 3. Door closers: Furnish per symbol in Hardware Schedule, interior or ex- terior type as appropriate, door closers sized per closer manufacturer's schedule for application involved. Verify conditions. 4. Door silencers, stops and holders: a. Door silencers: Furnish 3 Glynn-Johnson gray rubber Type for each regular door. b. Door stops and holders: Furnish as required. Verify wall and floor construction and furnish specified type fastenings. Hardware supplier must assume that due to job conditions some stops or holders will need to be exchanged for another type. 5. Thresholds: Furnish as required per Hardware Schedule. 6. Finishes: a. Service Building: (1) Locksets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 (2) Hinges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 (3) Push and kick plates. . . . . . . . . . . .612 (4) Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 '- (5) Door stops and holders . . . . . . . . . .612 r (6) Door closers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 b. Office Building: (1) Locksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 W (2) Butts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 (3) Exit devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 (4) Door stops and holders . . . . . . . . . .612 (5) Door closers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 B. KEYING: In general, key thus: See 08710-03 for determination of final key- ing requirements. 1. Key entire project to new Master Key System. 1�r 2. Key each building sector to different submaster key. 3. Key all rooms in each sector differently. 4. Panel locks: Key all alike. No master keying required. 5. Required keys: Furnish thus: a. Three (3) change keys for each "keyed different" lock or cylinder. b. Ten (10) master keys for project. 6. Key and markings: Furnish all keys cut from smooth faced blanks die marked with 1/8" letters "DO NOT DUPLICATE" on one side and smooth blank on other side. Furnish all keys in individual envelopes, marked for identification. 7. Master keying: Master keying accomplished by bonded locksmith. No other arrangement for master keying permitted. 08710-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: 1. Verify measurements, backsets, door thickness, sizes for kick plates, etc. 2. Verification of keying requirements: Visit Owner, explain lock functions and assist Owner in setting key schedule. Make such modifications to specified keying schedule as Owner requires, without cost to Owner. � 813 08710-03 EXECUTION Secure in writing from Owner approval of final keying schedule before ordering any locksets or cylinders. B. INSTALLATION: Installation and adjusting: Have qualified hardware manu- facturer's representative inspect hardware and assist in installation and adjustment of all hardware required by work of this section, both at job- site and subcontractor's shops. Exchange door stops and holders as neces- sitated by job conditions. C. HARDWARE SCHEDULE: 1. MATERIALS SPECIFIED: APPROVED EQUAL Hinges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lawrence. . . . . . . . . . . . .McKinney, Stanley Locksets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Schlage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . None Closers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LCN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None ExitDevices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Von Duprin. . . . . . . . . . .Sargent Stops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BBW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ives (Quality) Push Pull & Kickplates. . . . . . . . . .BBW. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .Ives (Quality) Weatherstrip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pemko. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .National Guard or Reese 2. HARDWARE GROUPS: Group 1 (DRS 1, 2, 3) ) 2 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . .20-001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .613 Group 2 (DR 4) 3 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . .639 2 Ea Exit Devices. . . . .9927)et. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 2 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . .20-021. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 W) 2 Ea Closers. .. . . . . . . .4110-CUSH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 2 Ea Kickplates. . . . . . .37 10" x 2" LDW. . . . . . . . . .612 4 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . Group 3 (DRS 5, 6) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . .D50PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea 4010 (DR 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . Group 4 (DR 7) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Exit Device. . . . . .99jX.8% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . .4110-CUSH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . 1 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 8-14 .r 08710-03 EXECUTION Group 5 (DRS 23, 24) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Push Plate. . . . . . . .47 4 x 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Pull Plate. . . . . . . .57C 4 x 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4010. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Kickplate. . . . . . . . .37 10 x 2"LDW. . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . . Group 6 (DRS 10, 11) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .4181 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . . .D70PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 y 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . . Group 7 (DRS 12, 13, 14, 27, 31) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4/5 x 4/5 NRP. . . . . . .639 1 Ea Exit Device. . . . . . .99)e/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . . .20-021. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .9076X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Threshold. . . . . . . . .171A x 210AV - 36 .. . . . . . . . . .ALUM 1 Set W/Strip. . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0" Group 8 (DR 15) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .4181 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Privacy. . . . . . . . . . .D40S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 *w 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . . wr Group 9 (DRS 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 26, 29, 30, 33, 34, 36, 37, 45, 48) 1. 5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .4181 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . . 'i," Group 10 (DRS 20, 25, 28, 32, 38) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 i` 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Floor Stop. . . . . . . .F9076. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . . Group 11 (DRS 39, 47) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. : . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Exit Device. . . . . . .99/A--BE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110-CUSH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Gasket. . . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0" Ciw 5.15 08710-03 EXECUTION Group 12 (DRS 40, 41) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5 NRP. . . . . . .639 1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . . .D50PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Set W/Strip. . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0" 1 Ea Threshold. . . . . . . . .171A x 210AV - 36... . . . . . . . . .ALUM Group 13 (DR 42) 3 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 2 Ea Flushbolts. . . . . . . .458B10B 1 Ea Co-Ord x UL BKTS(2) . . . .648 x Filler. . . . . . . . . . .600 2 Ea Closers. . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Set Gasket. . . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 20' Group 14 (DRS 35, 43, 44) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . . .D50PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4010. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Threshold. . . . . . . . .171A x 210AV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ALUM 1 Set W/Strip. . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0" 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 Group 15 (DRS 8, 9) 1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639 1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4041-DEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 1 Ea Armor Plate. . . . . . .37 34 x 2" LDW. . . . . . . . . . . . .612 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . . Group 16 (DR 16) 1 Set Bi-Pass Hardware. .HD526D 4 Ea Flush Pulls. . . . . . .Pulls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 Group 17 (DR 46) 1 Ea Pocket Door Frame 1 Ea Pocket Door Pull. .101-613 Group 18 (DR 49) 1 Set Bi-pass Hardware. .HD526D 2 Ea Flush Pulls. . . . . . .2-1/8" diameter. . . . . . . . . . . . .612 D. Hardware suppliers qualified to furnish material: 1. Oregon Washington Contract Hardware, Inc. 2. Chown Hardware Co. 3. Northwest Contract Hardware, Inc. 4. Western Contract Hardware, Inc. 8-Ib GLASS & GLAZING SECTION 08800 sw 08800-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide all float and sheet glass and glazing throughout pro- ject, except glass and glazing work excluded per paragraph 112" below. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Final washing in Section 01710, Cleaning Up & Custodial Services. b. Fitting of glass stops and plastic glazing beads throughout rr. work and furnishings fastenings for glass stops. c. Priming of steel openings and steel stops to receive glass in Section 08100, Hollow Metal Doors & Hollow Metal Frames, and iW priming of wood in Section 09900, Painting. d. Providing mirrors in Section 10810, Toilet Room Accessories. 3 . Glass schedule: a. Exterior of Office Building and Service Building: See "b" below for glass in doors. (1) All exterior glazing with insulating glass. (2) All exterior panes of insulating glass: "Bronze tinted" � . 1/4" thick plate. (3) All panes of insulating glass at interior side: Clear glass, 1/4" thick plate. (4) Panes of glass shown by Symbol TGL: Tempered bronze tinted glass, tempered as required by code. b. Relites in interior partitions. (1) Clear of thickness determined by size of lite per schedule in 08800-02-A, unless shown tempered (Symbol TGL) . „ (2) Panes shown with Symbol TGL: 1/4” thick and tempered. c. Door lites: See door styles and Door Schedule on drawings. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified manufacturers: a. Glass: (1) Clear float and sheet: (a) PPG Industries, INc. (b) Libby-Owens-Ford (c) ASG Industries k„ (d) C-E Glass, Combustion Engineering, Inc. (2) Tinted plate, float and sheet: (a) PPG Industries, Inc. (b) Libby-Owens-Ford (c) ASG Industries (3) Wired glass: (a) C-E Glass "Mississippi" (b) ASG Industries "NuWeld" 2 . Qualified fabricators: a. Insulating glass: (1) PPG Industries "Twindow" (2) Libby-Owens-Ford "Thermopane" w. JW 8-17 08800-01 (3) ASG Industries "Tru-Therm" (4) Mercer Industries, Inc. "Double Lite" (5) Temp-Seal, Inc. Northwest r b. Glass tempering: (1) PPG Industries, Inc. "Herculite" (2) Libby-Owens-Ford "Tuf-Flex" (3) ASG Industries "Tru-Temp: (4) C-E Glass "Arm-R-Clad" (5) Pacific Tempered Glass Corp. (6) American Tempering Co. of Union City, CA. ; (7) Permaglass "Safeglaze" of Torrence, CA. 3 . Qualified glazers: Minimum of 5 years experience on comparable projects. 4 . Requirements of regulatory agencies: a. Building code: UBC, 1985. b. Glass in fire class opening assemblies with UL rating: Per UL requirements. 5. Standards: Unless otherwise specified in this section, provi- sions of following standard specifications and publications govern applicable portions of work. D. PRODUCT HANDLING: 1. Meet most detailed requirements of: a. "General Conditions Governing Glazing" in "Glazing Manual" of Flat Glass Marketing Association. b. PPG Industries "Technical Service Memo" 11-1-70 titled "Care and Storage of Glass". 2. Glazer to advise General Contractor of care required for protec- tion of tinted glass to avoid thermal breaks and uneven fade of tint. x� E. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Glaze only when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F. 08800-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Glass: a. Clear glass (Symbol CG) and where type or symbol is not shown or specified otherwise: Class I (Transparent) . Thickness Maximum Area Type Double Strength To 12 sq. ft. II f= Note: All panes of insulating 1/4" 12-42 sq. ft. I glass 1/4" thick. 8-18 tinted b. Tinted glass: 1/4" bronze/plate thermo-pane Thickness Maximum Area Type 1/4" To 42 sq. ft. I C. Wired glass (Symbol WRG) : Baroque", 1/4" thick. Mississippi or L-O-F "Polished 2 . Glazing materials: All materials for glass and panel instal- r lation of color which is inconspicuous in complete structure matching opening frame when standard matching color is available. L a. Glazing compounds for exterior glass lites: Gun grade one- part silicone rubber supplied with manufacturer's recommended primer. General Electric "Silglaze" or Series "SCS 1200" or Dow Corning "781", or equal. "' b. Glazing tapes: (1) Exterior lites: Polyisobutylene butyl, 1/8" thick by depth of rabbet, reinforced and pre-shimmed with W synthetic rubber rod centered in tape, Tremco 11440 Pre-Shimmed", or approved. (2) Interior lites: Closed cell PVC resin based foam tape with pressure sensitive double faced adhesive, 1/8" thick, unless otherwise noted, by full depth of sash rabbet, Norton "Bear Brand" No. 534, or approved. c. Setting blocks and glass edge spacers: Neoprene with 70-90 Shore "A" Durometer. Setting block of minimum thickness 1/8" thick x length of from 1" to 12" depending on weight of glass with not over 20% decrease of in place and loaded thickness. B. FABRICATION: 1. Insulating glass: " a. Combination of 1/4"bronzelass g per 08800-02-A and 1/4" clear glass per 08800-02-A,bronze glass to exterior and clear glass toward interior, stainless steel edge construction, 1/2" air space, combined overall thickness of i" from outside faces at glass. b. Where both panes are required to be tempered, locate per- manent markings in same sill corner of all lites. 2. Tempered glass: a. Tong marks: If glass is not supported during tempering by air-support, support glass during tempering with tongs Jil" located only at sill edge, spacing tongs not more than 8" o.c. and not more than 1/2" from sill edge. b. Permanent marking: W (1) Permanently mark one corner of sill edge of all TGL glass indicating glass is tempered, glass thickness and fabricators name per 1985 UBC. it (2) Coordinate marking location with fabrication of insula- ting glass so markings occur in required locations. "° 8.19 08800-02 (3) All permanent markings occur in same corner of all installed lites; i.e. lower right or lower left corner when view from interior of building. 08800-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Condition of work to receive glass: Examine openings to receive glass for completeness of preparations called for in other sections. Notify General Contractor of deficiencies in time for correction before glazing. Openings and stops to be: a. True in size and shape +/- 1/16" . In true plane +/- 1/16" overall for openings and +/- 1/32" for stops. b. Without obstructions which may damage glass. Watertight at exterior joints of exterior openings, at rabbet of bottom web of metal windows, at interior glass stopping legs of metal windows, and at sill joints of interior sash stopping leg of metal windows. c. Removable stops on one side of door lite opening temporarily positioned in final location, accurately fitted. Stops on one side of door lite opening permanently fixed in place. d. Neoprene slide-in glazing beads in place. Roll-in beads temporarily in place. B. PREPARATION: 1. Clean unpainted metal glass holding members including sash webs with Toluol, MEK or other non-staining, non-etching, oilfree solvent on clean, solvent saturated cloth. 2 . Check glass for bite. Minimum bite per PPG Industries "Architectural Glass Products" 1975 Edition, pages 29, 30 and 31. C. INSTALLATION: Set tempered glass with tong marks at bottom edge, marks indicating tempered glass at same corner at lights in all runs. 1. Exterior lites installed with metal stops: a. Cut specified glazing tape to length on cutting table. Apply back bed of tape with edge flush with sight line and with tape ends butted tooled, sill and head tape full width of glass opening without joint. Tool all butt joints. Do not x; lap tape. Remove backing paper just prior to setting glass. b. Block under glass with two setting blocks at bottom outer quarter points. Prepare bottom snap-in stop to clear blocks. c. Press glass firmly against back bed tape. d. Apply heel bead of glazing compound around all four edges of in-place glass, filling space between glass edges, sash web and back bed tape. Bed stops with full bed of glazing compound applied under pressure. 2 . Exterior lites with pocket glazing: Permit no glass contact with metal. a. Secure two setting blocks at bottom outer quarter points at sill, full width of rabbet. a-2o 08800-03 b. Apply 8" long pieces of exterior or interior glazing tape full width of "deep" pocket for glass, one at top and one at bottom. i„ c. Joggle glass into position with vertical edge entering "deep" pocket first. Glass shall not touch metal at any time before, during and after glazing. d. Center glass in opening, apply blob of glazing compound at jambs near top and bottom of glass to hold glass from traveling horizontally, then roll in exterior neoprene glaz- ing bead. Straighten sight lines on interior and exterior beads. e. Seal joints in glazing bead and neoprene weathering with specified glazing compound in color to match neoprene bead. 3 . Exterior lites with glazing bead stops: Permit no glass contact with metal. a. Seal joints in interior glazing bead and stops with sealant. b. Block under glass with two setting blocks at bottom outer quarter points. Prepare bottom exterior stop to clear blocks. c. Install glass on blocks, centered in opening. yr d. Install glob of sealant at bottom and top corners of glass to prevent glass from "traveling" in opening. e. Install exterior snap-in stops. Straighten sight lines on interior and exterior beads. f. Seal joints in glazing bead and neoprene weathering with glazing compound matching bead color. 4 . Interior lites: Back and face glaze with specified tape. Set "W glass on setting blocks. Use no glazing compound. Install stops to give firm pressure on glass after stop is secured using tape thicker than 1/8" if necessary to produce required pressure. D. ADJUSTING: At final acceptance, make loose glass tight and free of rattles. E. CLEANING: 1. Remove excess glazing compound during normal work life of compound. 2. Trim tape above sight lines with sharp razor blade. 3. Leave glass whole, tight, free of scratches and discoloration j „ and with clean sight lines. tirr 8.2� it DIVISION 9 - FINISHES GYPSUM DRYWALL SECTION 09520 lwr 09520-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide gypsum drywall board work, including gypsum wallboard, gypsum backing board, fastenings, caulking and accessories at gypsum drywall locations shown on drawings and Room Finish .r Schedule. In addition, provide gypsum drywall firestops where specified in this section and provide attic area separations where shown. Definition of core types per ASTM. I ow a. GWB . . . . Single ply of regular core wallboard. b. WP-GWB. . . Single ply of regular core wallboard with special moisture resistant core and face papers. c. Type X GWB. Single ply of "X" core wallboard. d. Type 1/2" concrete (wonder) board. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing wood framing and stripping to receive gypsum dry- wall in Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing, including gypsum wallboard firestopping per 06110-03 . b. Providing gypsum drywall joint taping; nailhead, screwhead 4" and joint finishing; and surface texture coatings on drywall surfaces in Section 09270, Gypsum Drywall Finishing. 3. Definitions: Terms "wall" and "partition" are used interchang- ably in this section. The term "edge" in reference to gypsum * boards refers only to paperbound edges at long dimension of wallboard. tw B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Requirements of regulatory agencies: a. Standards: Meet requirements and recommendations for materials and workmanship of ANSI current Edition, for "The Application and Finishing of Wallboard". b. Fire resistive standards" At all corridors meet fire re- strictive requirements for 1 Hr. rated walls insofar as ANN gypsum drywall materials and their assembly form a part of specified fire resistive construction. Terms are defined in 1985 Edition of UBC "Standards" based on "Standard Methods" (Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials) of ASTM. -� C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1. Delivery, handling and storage of materials per ANSI Standards. 2 . Deliver fire rated materials bearing testing agency label and required fire classification identification. D. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental requirements: Install gypsum drywall only in spaces protected from precipitation and free of standing water. 2 . Adhesive laminate installation work at 55 degrees F. , minimum. 09250-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Gypsum boards: 5/8" thick and 4' wide, unless otherwise specified. 9-{ 09250-02 a. Gypsum wallboard type "X" : Meet requirements of ASTM "Gypsum Wallboard", for type "X" wallboard with tapered edges or USG Type SW eased edges. Edges paper bound. Type III, Grade X, fire retardant core. b. Gypsum wallboard - moisture resistant: Meet requirements of "Watertite" , U.S. Gypsum. Edges paper bound, tapered or USG Type SW. 2 . Fastenings: a. Nails: 5d, 1 5/811 , 19/64" diameter head, No. 13 1/2" gage, "Parkerhead Dritites" or 6d, 1 7/811 , 1/4" diameter head No. 13 gage, cement coated or chemically etched. b. Screws: 1" in metal framing and 1 1/4" in wood framing No. 6 self-drilling screws for single layer construction, USG brand "Hi-Lo" screws, Type S, bugle head or approved. 3 . Sealant: Butyl rubber meeting requirements of Fed. Spec. TT-S-230a, May 5, 1967, amended September 6, 1967, Type II (nonsag) , or PRC "Rubber Caulk 700011 , Eternaflex "One Part" , Tremco "Mono", any Thiokol "tested and approved" one part polysulfide base sealant, or acrylic latex sealant by Pecora Chemical Corp. 11AC-2011 , or Eternaflex Acrylic Latex Sealant" . 4 . Backer rod: Polyethylene foam, Dow "Ethafoam SB" rod or PRC "Minicel" of size to have in-place compressed width across joint of between 60%-75% of original diameter. 5. Accessories: 26 gage galvanized steel. a. Corner bead: Casings-Western, Inc. No. 220 "Corner Guard" ; USG "Dur-A-Bead" ; J-M No. 220. Leg 1 1/8" x 1 1/8" , minimum. b. "U" shape edge: Casings-Western, Inc. No. 108; USG No. 200-A; J-M No. 108. c. "L" shape edge: Casings-Western, Inc. No. 106 "Wide Flange 1 1/411' USG No. 200-B; J-M No. 106. Angle leg over ends and edges of wallboard same dimension as wallboard thickness, fully covering wallboard ends and edges. 09250-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Condition of framing to receive drywall: a. Drywall bearing surfaces of minimum or greater widths re- quired per ANSI Standards. b. Maximum moisture content of wood framing and stripping to receive drywall 15% of oven-dry weight of wood, as measured by moisture meter at time for board application. c. Wood framing and furring aligned per 06110-01-B3 . B. INSTALLATION: 1. In general, install ceilings before walls. 2 . Apply with all edges and ends of wallboard and backing board in i moderate contact between abutting pieces of board. Where less i than moderate contact occurs at wallboard to receive finished type joints per 09270-03, correct contact conditions, and where F less than moderate contact occurs elsewhere, either correct I contact or rough tape loose joints. 9.2 4r,r 09250-03 3. Where interior angles receive joint treatment, apply board by "floating" interior angle method, unless prohibited by fire resistive construction requirements. 4. Firestopping concealed spaces in wood frame construction: ii• Inside furred spaces, except attic spaces and sound isolation partitions, where clear distance between wood frame assemblies (such as walls, partitions, ceilings, soffits, floors and roofs) w is greater that 11 , provide 1/2" or 5/8" "regular" core or "X" core wallboard or gypsum backing board firestopping, so placed that maximum dimension of concealed spaces is not over 10' in horizontal and vertical dimension. bw" 5. Attic area separations: Where attic area separations are shown, install gypsum board, rigidly supported and extending from ceiling tight to bottom of roof deck. Thickness of wallboard r 1/211, except where attic area separation is continuation of partition with drywall on exposed portions, in which case con- tinue same thickness and number of plies of drywall to bottom of roof deck. 6. Install moisture resistant type wallboard at lowest 4' of wainscots and walls to receive gypsum board in spaces in which finished floors are ceramic tile or concrete. This requirement shall govern when Room Finish Schedule shows any type of gypsum board finish to occur within 4' of floor in above note spaces. 7. Install 1/2" concrete (wonder) board on walls of shower (part w of Rm 205) and hose-off booth (part of Rm 207) behind tile. 8. Fastening drywall: a. All gypsum board nail or screw applied with fastenings spaced not less than 3/8" nor more that 1/2" from edges and ends of perimeter of board. b. Perimeter fastening into plate and sole at top and bottom is required. c. Nails and screws driven home with heads slightly below sur- face of board and in manner to not fracture face paper with fastener head. Screws driven with electric screwdriver. .. d. Fastener schedule: Maximum Maximum Thickness o.c. Spacing o.c. Spacing & Type of Plane of of Fasteners of Fasteners Gypsum Board Framing (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) Surface Nails Nails Screws 5/8" Face Horizontal 16 6 -- w. & Ceilings Vertical 16 7 8 @ board perimeter and 12 intermediate w 8. On wood framed partitions, vertical and horizontal wood furring, wood framed ceiling of joists or suspended wood framing: a. Apply board in maximum practical lengths, with long dimension parallel or at right angles to vertical framing members and at right angles only to horizontal (ceiling) framing members. Stagger joints in board when applied at right angles to 9-3 09250-03 framing members and allow maximum possible distance between joints. All abutting ends and edges occur over framing mem- bers except edges when joints are at right angles framing to framing members. Joints of vertically applied board on opposite sides of partition arranged to occur on different framing members. b. Nailing to proceed from central portion of board toward the end and edges. Double nail where board is not tight to framing. c. Sidewall vertical angles: Overlap board at internal corner framing per floating angle method. Overlapping board applied to bring underlying board into firm contact with face of framing member behind it. No fastenings to corner stud permitted in underlying board. 9. Where partitions abut walls or ceilings other than of gypsum board, provide a uniform perimeter relief space a minimum of 1/4" and maximum of 3/8" by holding gypsum board back from abutting walls, columns and decks over top of partitions. Provide minimum 1/8" and maximum 1/4" space between bottom of gypsum board and floor and 1/8" space around plaster rings for electrical fixtures, outlet boxes, electrical panels, duct openings. 10. Seal between gypsum board and abutting vertical surfaces materials other than gypsum board wherever casing beads are not required. Where framing for gypsum board provides back-up for sealant and joint is not over 1/4" wide, fill entire space with specified sealant or install specified backer rod, allowing for approximately 1/4" depth of sealant in joint. Install rod with plain faced roller, without stretching rod longitudinally and without puncturing surface skin on rod, then fill remainder of space with sealant to give slightly concave face, holding sealant back just far enough to permit installation of metal control joint. Install backer rod, to give 1/4" depth of seal- ant, and apply sealant at control joints on both faces of partitions. 11. Installation of accessories: Install accessories straight, plumb, level, square and true to required angles and required building shapes. Install in longest lengths possible and with tight joints. Trims installed with mitered corners. Shim if necessary using metal shims of same metal and finish as acces- sory. Attachments rigid enough to hold accessory in required location. Fastenings at maximum of 12" o.c. Install tight to materials abutting drywall. a. Locations: At corners and edges exposed-to-view where dry- wall receives paint or glaze coating, where flexible wall covering or other decorative coating occurs. Corner guard behind room base, but no metal trim required along floor where rubber base occurs. b. Types: (1) External corners: Corner bead. 9-4 Wr 09250-03 (2) Drywall edges and ends: "L" shape edge trim, unless otherwise shown. (3) Drywall edges and ends shown to receive "U" shape edge AW trim: "U" shape edge trim. C. CLEANING: 1. As rapidly as drywall work is completed in each space, clean all rubbish, utensils and surplus materials from space and leave all surfaces broom clean. 2 . Before final acceptance of project, remove drywall equipment and drywall debris from project site. firr err Mr iW l"" 9-5 GYPSUM DRYWALL FINISHING SECTION 09270 09270-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide gypsum drywall joint taping and finishing treatment for fasteners and for metal drywall beads, trims and control joints. In addition, provide texture finish on gypsum drywall where indicated in Room Finish Schedule. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: Gypsum drywall board, metal trim and accessories for drywall in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Requirements of regulatory agencies: All gypsum drywall finishing at single ply board to meet requirements rr for 1 hour fire resistive type of construction. C. SUBMITTALS: Samples: Submit samples of texture finish on 12" x 24" pieces of drywall board of same type and manufacture as used on work to receive texture finish. Submit samples per 01340-02 , Samples. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: Delivery, handling and storage of drywall finishing materials shall meet requirements of ASA and pre-mixed compounds shall not be allowed to freeze or have been frozen. E. JOB CONDITIONS: Environmental conditions: Where materials are being mixed or used for joint treatment, and for texture finishing, continuously maintain temperature between 55 and 85 degrees F. from two days before starting work in area and maintain temperature within this range until other finishes are to be applied in area. See Section 01513 , Temporary Heat & Ventilation, for additional requirements. 09270-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Joint compound, joint tape and finishing or topping compound: Meet requirements of ASTM, be made or recommended by gypsum board manufacturer whose material is to receive drywall finish- ing, and meet additional requirements specified below. 2 . Joint compound: Plant mixed vinyl base joint taping compound in either machine or hand tool consistency for type of equipment employed except joint prefill for U.S. Gypsum wallboard type SW shall be USG "Durabond" joint compound only. 3 . Joint reinforcing tape: Spark perforated or fully perforated and where used for corner applications, pre-creased. 4 . Finishing-topping compounds: a. For painted or glaze coated drywall: Special purpose finishing or topping compound designed for finishing over tape and not all-purpose type. Compound USG "Durabond Joint Compound-Topping", Kaiser "FC" finishing compound, National Gypsum "Gold Bond Topping Compound" , J-M "Topping Compound", Georgia Pacific "Topping Compound" . 9.10 09270-02 +.r b. For drywall other than painted or glaze coated work: Plant mixed vinyl based compound all-purpose type. USG "Ready- Mixed Joint Compound All-Purpose", Kaiser "Dual Purpose Pre-Mix", National Gypsum "Gold Bond Ready Mixed Joint Compound", J-M "Ready-Mix" joint compound, Georgia Pacific "Ready Mix Joint Compound" . Finishing-topping compounds per "a" above may be substituted for plant mixed compounds at 'w drywall finishing subcontractor's option. 5. Texture finish material: U.S.G. "Spray Texture Finish" . B. MIXES: 1. Compound mixing: Finishing-topping compound and joint pre-fill mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed direc- tions. Ready mixed compounds used as they come from container. ""` 2 . Texture finish, job mixed in strict accordance with manufac- turer's printed directions adding water as required to produce consistency suitable for light finish. ow 09270-03 EXECUTION ion A. INSPECTION: 1. Examine work to receive gypsum drywall finishing and determine acceptability of surfaces and installation, as application of to finishing work without objection to unsatisfactory, or in- complete wallboard installation constitutes acceptance. 2 . All edges and ends of gypsum wall board to be in moderate con- tact. Where this condition is not met, either have wallboard ow contact corrected or rough tape joint, regardless of joint location. 3 . Assure that all drywall fastenings are tight. ON B. APPLICATION: 1. Locations of drywall to receive joint and fastener depression treatment: Where joints are required to be finished type aw joints, fastener depressions also finished. a. Provide finished type joints at locations exposed to view of person other than locations normally seen only by maintenance personnel. b. Provide drywall to receive paint, and texture finish with finished joints. c. Provide drywall in concealed locations having eased edges, tapered edges or any edges which are not in moderate contact with rough taped joints. d. Provide drywall shown on drawings to have rough taped or r finished joints with type of joint treatment shown. e. Rough tape joints in drywall used for attic area separations where drywall joint does not occur on framing member. 2 . Types of joint treatment: a. Finished type joints: (1) Taping or embedding: Joint compound applied in thin uniform layer to joints and angles to be finished. Tape applied immediately, centered over joint and seated into compound leaving approximately 1/64" to 1/32" remaining i.. 9-7 09270-03 under reinforcing tape. Skim coat shall immediately follow tape embedment but shall not function as fill or second coat. Tape folded on center pre-crease and embedded in all angles to provide clean angle. Allow compound on tape to thoroughly dry prior to application of fill coat. Pre-fill USG type SW wallboard per manufacturer's printed directions. (2) Filling: Joint compound, same material as taping- embedding compound, applied over embedding coat to fill board taper flush with board surface, cover tape and feather out slightly beyond tape. On joints without taper, fill coat shall cover tape and feather out minimum 4" beyond each side of tape, except at interior angles no fill coat is required. �� (3) Finishing: Spread specified finishing or topping com- pound required for type of wall or ceiling finish drywall is to receive evenly over and extended slightly beyond fill coat on all joints. Finish and feather to smooth uniform finish. Over tapered edges, do not permit finished joint to protrude beyond plane of surface of wallboard. Give all taped angles finish coat to cover tape and taping compound; providing true, clean, sharp, straight angle. (4) Sanding: Sand between coats where necessary to prevent excessive build-up of joint thickness and sand final coat of compound to provide smooth surface, free from roughed-up face paper, ready for decoration. (5) Where spray texture finish is shown, modify sanding requirement for finished type joints and for fastening depression sanding thus: Sand in manner which produces no more than minor degree of roughed-up face paper, so that finish will not be objectionable after spray tex- ture finish and painting and glaze coating work is completed. b. Rough taped joints: Finish same as finished joints per 09720-03-B2-a(1) and (2) only. No finishing or sanding required, but hold compound below plane of board face to receive tile or board finish material. 3 . Fastener depressions treatment: Taping or all-purpose compound applied as first coat to fastener depressions requiring finish- ing, followed by minimum two additional coats of required finishing or topping compound for type of wall or ceiling finish drywall to receive. Leave depressions requiring finishing level with plane of wallboard surface. 4 . Finishing beads and trims: a. Fill coat: Joint compound applied to all bead and trim, feathered out from ground to plane of wallboard surface, allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of second fill coat except USG "Durabond Joint Compound-Taping" need only have hardened prior to application of next coat. b. Second fill coat: Joint compound applied same as first fill coat and extended slightly beyond. 9-6 09720-03 c. When all fill coats are thoroughly dry, apply finish coat of finishing or topping compound specified for type of wall or ceiling finish drywall is to receive. Extend finish coat slightly beyond second fill coat, feathered from ground to 6W plane of wallboard. d. Sand finish coat to provide smooth surface, ready for decoration. #Am 5. Texture finishing: On drywall construction, prior to applica- tion of texture finish, joints finished type joints and fastener depressions finished, scratches and scuffs smoothed and spackled. Apply a uniform coat of spray texture finish with light "orangepeel" texture to all gypsum drywall to be painted or glaze coated. Match Architect approved sample. C. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Remove all excess compound from edges of beads and trim, electrical outlet boxes and from other surfaces not to receive drywall finish. 2 . As rapidly as drywall finishing is completed in each space, clean all rubbish, utensils and surplus materials from space, leaving surfaces broom clean, ready for decoration specified in other sections. 3 . Remove drywall finishing equipment and debris from site before time for substantial completion of the work. err llirr GYPSUM PLASTER SECTION 09280 09280-01 GENERAL A. Wrap glu-lam beams and built up framing to match concrete trim bands. B. Materials: Gypsum plaster over 3. 4 lb. self-furring expanded diamond mesh-metal lath and 2h" wide flanged expanded metal corner beads. C. Finish: Sand texture, painted to match concrete trim band appearance. D. Joints: Locate at center line of brick pilasters. bw ir. "" 9-9 CERAMIC TILE SECTION 09310 09310-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide ceramic tile, where called for on Room Finish Schedule and details. 2 . Related work specified in other sections includes: Providing gypsum wallboard for ceramic tile base backing in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Tile work and materials shall meet only those portions of The Tile Council of America, Inc. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" which are specifically called for herein except all ASTM specifications listed in "Handbook" under design numbers called for in 09310-03-A, Installation,* shall apply to this pro- ject and no ANSI specifications shall apply except those portions of ANSI standards specifically noted in 09310-02-A and 09310-03-A. C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: The Certification Mark of The Tile Council of America, the "Standard Grade" stamp and the manufacturer's name shall appear on each carton of tile. Tile shall be delivered to project in sealed cartons. Keep grade seal on cartons intact and keep cartons and materials containing portland cement dry. �.4 D. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental: a. Set and grout tile in portland cement mortar when ambient temperature is at least 50 degrees F. and rising. b. Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of manufacturers for bonding and grouting materials in other JA than portland cement mortar. 2 . Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins. 09310-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: Installation per manufacturer' s specifications. Exact colors to be selected by Owner. 1. Lobby floors: Thompson - "Fiandre" (8" x 811 ) J., Restroom floors: American Olean - Unglazed Porcelain (2" x 2" ) Restroom walls : American Olean - Matte finish (4" x 4") J 9-10 09310-02 2. Grout: Custom Building Products acid resistant grout or Upco "Hydroment" or L&M "Acid-R Grout" or Chicago Mastic Co. Color of grout for tile as selected by Architect. 3 . Divider strips: Half-hard brass divider strips of type specified below and shown on drawings, The American Terrazzo Strip Co. , Inc. , Type "K", or approved. 4 . Water repellent admix: Sonneborn "Hydrocide Powder" or Master Builders "Omnicron Mortarproofing". 5. Bonding agent: Masons Supply Co. "Masco Concrete Bonding Agent" or Madden Construction Supply "Unicon 240 PVA" or Standard Drywall Products "Acryl 60". 6. Base tile adhesive: Upco Mastic 5100 or Architect approved. 7. Cleaning detergent for unglazed tile: Sure-Klean No. 600 masonry detergent. B. MIXES: 1. Setting bed mix: Meet requirements of ANSI for proportions and mixing of setting bed and dope coat (pure coat) mix. 2 . Grout for floor and base tile: Add specified grout to clean water in mixing container. Use proper ratio of grout to water per manufacturer's printed directions. Mix to smooth consis- tency by machine mixer. 3 . Admixtures: Integrally treat all setting bed mortar for all floors with admixture and bonding agent specified in 09310-02-A4 and A5. Use in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. 09310-03 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile floors over concrete slabs on grade: Per Cement Mortar, bonded. No control joints required. 2 . Ceramic base tile over gypsum board and ceramic tile base over bw masonry: Per Gypsum Board Organic Adhesive. 3 . Divider strips: Install at junction between ceramic tile floors and abutting floor coverings of other materials. Set flush with top of tile, centered under door when door is closed. to 4 . Grouting floor and base tile: Grout all base and floor tile to full depth of joint with materials specified in 09310-02, using a trowel, squeegee, brush or finger application. Use sufficient too grout to completely fill air pockets and voids. Remove excess material and before grout sets, smooth joints to depth of cushion edge. 5. Cleaning: After joints have become firm, clean with cleaning detergent specified in 09310-02-A6. B. CLEAN-UP: Remove accumulation of waste materials, rubbish, excess 6W insulation materials and containers. Dispose of waste materials off site. +t- 9-i SS ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT SECTION 09500 09500-01 GENERAL- A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide acoustical tiles, acoustical panels and metal suspen- sion system at ceilings where indicted on drawings and Room Finish Schedule. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing temporary facilities in Sections 01511 and 01513, including temporary electricity, heat and ventilation. b. Providing ceiling air diffusers in Division 15, with support for diffusers from flexible connectors to diffusers by ceiling suspension system. c. Providing light fixtures and speakers furnished and installed per Division 16, Electrical, supported by ceiling suspension system. 3 . Definitions and identification of terms and standards: a. AIMA: Refer to Bulletin of Acoustical and Insulating Materials Assoc. for: (1) Tables classifying materials according to appearance and composition, indicating thickness, light reflectance, flame spread index per ASTM, flame spread class per Fed. Specs. (2) Definitions of terms. (3) Installation recommendations, when not otherwise speci- fied in this section. b. ASTM: Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. c. ASTM: Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile & Lay-In Panels. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Acceptable installer: Approved for installation work by manufacturer of acoustical materials and installer of minimum of 3 installations of comparable extent and type as required for Project within past 2 years. 2 . Allowable tolerances: a. Deflection: (1) Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grilles and acoustical units: Maximum deflection 1/360 of the span. b. Allowable tolerance of finished suspended acoustical ceiling system: (1) Level within 1/8" in 12' when measured in any direction, noncumulatively. Measure after completion of installa- tion of entire ceiling work in space. (2) Exposed members parallel and perpendicular with one b another so 45 degree diagonal measurements between any 1 intersecting ceiling grid points in common within a ceiling field do not deviate more than 1: 1000. 9.12 09500-01 (3) Maximum deviation of any line of exposed members from parallel with averaged c. 1. axis between walls where axis is indicated parallel to walls: 1/16" in 121 , non- cumulative. on- cumulative. (4) Cross runners installed within 1/32" of required center distances. This tolerance noncumulative. (5) Exposed surface of two intersecting runners lie within 0.015" vertical distance of each other. (6) Butt joints at exposed surfaces of two abutting main runners lie within vertical and horizontal distance of bw each other of 0. 015" after ceiling loads are imposed. (7) Horizontal gaps between exposed surfaces of both abutting and intersecting members do not exceed 0.020" . Yew C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Samples: a. Submit 2 full size samples of each type of acoustical unit to be supplied to illustrate range of appearance, trueness of edges, quality of paint finish, etc. b. Submit samples per 01340-02, Samples. �w 2 . Maintenance materials: a. Furnish Owner minimum of 1% of each type acoustical unit used on Project. Furnish suspension system components for each type of system in amount sufficient to install all extra units of type supported by that suspension system. b. All materials packaged in plainly marked cartons and of same "run" as those installed. 6W c. Obtain written receipt from Owner's representative for extra stock. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name, pattern, aw size, thickness, flame spread rating, and for light fixture protection boxes, UL Fire Hazard Classification marking. Labels legible and intact. 2 . Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent 6W soiling, physical damage or wetting. 3 . Store cartons in heated building, off floor, open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. 4 . Do not begin installation in a space until sufficient material to complete space is received. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental requirements: Per Section 01513 , Art. D. 2 . Sequencing: a. Dampening materials work completed before acoustical work. b. Acoustical ceiling work completed before carpet and casework installations. 9-13 09500-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: To maximum extent possible, furnish materials of one manufacturer's products. 1. Acoustical units: Provide and install acoustical Armstrong Fissured Travel-tone (white) 24" x 24" x 3/4" , Tegular Edge, panels (Item No. 507A) . Panels are rabbeted on all four sides and rest on exposed-grid suspension system. Surfaces of individual panels extend 11/32" below grid. 2 . Staples: For hanger wire support as wood joists: Stronghold "Fence Staple", 1 1/2" x 9 gage, flattened head, or USS "Griptite" staples. 3 . Suspension systems: All components of a system from one manufacturer and per requirements of ASTM, unless otherwise noted. a. Acoustical unit support materials: Furnish complete with all required accessories. (1) Exposed grid tee. Electro-galvanized steel, white paint finish on exposed-to-view parts. b. Suspension system type, fire resistance rating, and struc- tural classification requirements: Per ASTM "Furring Bard Suspension System" is specified in other sections. "Intermediate-duty main runners, direct hung". c. Hold down clips: Type as supplied by suspension system manufacturer. d. Rough suspension: (1) Hangers: Minimum 12 gage but heavier gage capable of carrying 5 times design load where loads exceed capacity of 12 gage wire. Wire galvanized, soft annealed, mild steel wire, with 3/8" diameter threaded rods for fixture support. 3/16" thick x 1" wide, zinc coated, flat steel straps for fixture support. (2) Wire ties: 18 gage, galvanized annealed steel wire. (3) Hanger clips: Prefabricated metal clamps for fastening hangers to furring channels dovetail anchor slots in concrete steel joists structural steel bulb tees. (4) Carrying channels: 16 gage, 1 1/211, cold rolled steel weighing 475 lbs. per 1000 lineal feet, electro- galvanized or painted black. 09500-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: Condition of surfaces and of prior work: Starting installation work in a space indicates acceptance of space as ready Y for acoustical installation. Report to Architect in writing defects in conditions which prevent satisfactory installation. Determine that work above ceiling level and at abutting walls is ;3' completed to degree necessary for satisfactory ceiling installation and that interference requirements of ASTM are met. B. PREPARATION: 1. Coordinate layout with other trades to assure symmetrical place- ment of grilles, light fixtures and other items exposed thru ceiling. Meet requirements of ASTM. 9-14 09500-03 2. Determine fixture loads to be supported by suspension systems. Determine locations for and install additional hanger wires and suitable accessory devices to support fixture loads when fixture loads exceed 3 .5 lbs. per lineal foot on main runner members and also when ceiling support system, including both main runners and cross runners, will not resist more than 2 degrees rotation due to fixture loads. C. INSTALLATION: iW 1. General requirements: a. Install ceilings per manufacturer's printed instructions; per AIMA recommendations, and as futher supplemented in this section. b. Make border units more than half acoustical unit width when measured perpendicularly to wall or edge of acoustical panel perimeter. 6W 2. Suspension systems: Per this paragraph; per additional printed instructions from manufacturer or specified proprietary products where such instructions are more explicit; and, where not otheriW - wise required by preceding noted requirements, per ASTM. a. General suspension system installation requirements: (1) Erect ceiling system level within 1/8" in 12' when measured in any direction, noncumulatively. Measure after completion of installation of entire ceiling work in the space. (2) Exposed member parallel and perpendicular with one another and also parallel with perimeter walls. (3) Cross runners installed within 1/32" of required center distances. This tolerance noncumulative. (4) Exposed surface of two intersecting runners lie within 0.015" vertical distance of each other and with abutting cross member above continuous main member. (5) Splines longer than dimension between edges of supporting members running perpendicular to splines placed so splines rest either all above or all below main running members. 10 (6) Butt joints at exposed surfaces of two abutting main runners lie within vertical and horizontal distance of each other of 0.015" after ceiling loads are imposed. (7) Horizontal gaps between exposed surfaces of both abutting and intersecting members do not exceed 0.020" . (8) Provide hanger, main runners, cross runners and rough suspension headers for support of light fixtures, sound WW system speakers and air diffusers and grilles. (9) Ceiling to be installed with use of lasers and seismic or laterally braced in accordance with UBC No. 47-18 . W b. Rough suspension: (1) Hanger wires: (a) Secure to sides of wood joists at 511, minimum, from bottom edge of joists. Use on staple per hanger wire. Drive staple so both legs are fully embedded into joist. (b) Hanger wire clips: As recommended by clip manufac- w' turer to carrying channels. f 09500-03 (c) Space hanger wires 4'-0" o.c. along lengths of carrying channels or main runners. (d) Install additional hanger wires 6" from walls, parti- tions, columns and other vertical surfaces at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures and air diffusers and additionally where loads exceed 3 . 5 lbs. per lineal foot and at draper track supports at 4'-0" o.c. along supports. (e) Wires not splayed more that 5" in 4' of vertical drop. (f) Top and bottom ends or wires wrapped around portion of wire in tension 3 times horizontally and as close to support points as possible, ends turned upward. (2) Carrying channels: Saddle tie to hanger wires, leveled to 1/8" in 12' per 09500-03-C3-a(1) and with wires taut to prevent downward movement when ceiling loads are imposed. Local kinks or bends in wires as means of leveling not permitted. Clips or other attachments to hanger wires by other trades not permitted, unless ceiling systems subcontractor has given permission for attachment per 09500-03-B2 and local kinks or bends resulting from such attachment are not subject to straightening under ceiling loads. Install additional << carrying channels, suspended by hanger wires, or wire tied to carrying channels, as required for support of mechanical and electrical work supported by ceiling suspension system. c. Finish suspension: (1) Main and cross runners: (a) Space main runners at centers required by specified acoustical unit size. Wire clip with furring clips to channels at all intersections. (b) Space cross runners at centers required by specified acoustical units. (2) Wall molding: Install at intersection of ceiling with vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect. (3) Hold-down clips: Install as required at AB-13 1 Hr. rated ceilings and as recommended by manufacturer for AB-9 ceilings. d. Ceiling fixture protection batts: Install at ceiling with acoustical units per Symbol AB-13 on each light fixture that penetrates ceiling and on loud speakers with opening thru ceiling. e. Acoustical units: (1) Install in level plane and in straight line courses. (2) Units bear all around on suspension members. (3) Minimum width of border tiles: One-half unit dimension. x 9-i6 W 09500-03 D. REPAIR OF DEFECTS: 1. Dents and deformations: Replace with specified new material where paint alone is not adequate to correct damage. No spackle or fillers permitted for repair of dents and deformations. 2. Scratches and abrasions: Repair acoustical work slightly scratched or abraded following installation by painting with paint of same type, color and manufacturer as on material to be repaired. Apply in manner to match unblemished work. E. CLEANING: j 1. Acoustical work: Clean soiled and discolored acoustical work surfaces after installation by methods and with materials recom- mended by acoustical materials manufacturers. If cleaning causes damage or is not adequate to correct condition, replace unsatisfactory work. 2 . Remove from site packaging and excess acoustical work materials from work of this section on completion of work in each area. SPECIAL NOTE FOR MULTI-PURPOSE ROOM: The 15 parabolic louver light fixtures in this room require a higher unit backing than can be provided in the air space between the suspended acoustical ceiling and the truss joists with bat insulation. Components of the 15 lighting fixtures must be o extended into the air space between trusses. Therefore, the ceiling installer must ensure that the T-bars in this room coincide exactly and parallel with the truss system 2 ' o. c . General contractor will ensure that fire-proof sheetrock boxes, 2 ' x 2' , are installed in these areas, appropriately framed with wood. 60 9-i-7 Fer SHEET VINYL FLOORING SECTION 09660 09660-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide resilient tile flooring work at locations noted on Room Finish Schedules. Resilient tile flooring work includes all: a. Sheet vinyl floor covering work. b. Rubber base work. The work of this section does not include installation of floor covering and of base beneath and behind built-in equipment such h as fixed cabinets having enclosed bases. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: } a. Providing forming of concrete surfaces; type and locations for control and isolation joints; use of form release coating and agents; and use of bond breakers specified in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. b. Providing finishing of concrete floor slabs per 03310-03-B4 ; curing of concrete per 03310-03-C; patching of concrete per 03310-03-E; and cleaning of concrete per 03310-03-F. c. Providing metal saddles and thresholds in Section 08710, Finish Hardware. d. Providing painting in Section 09900. e. Providing casework with finished fixed bases in Section 12310, Prefabricated Plastic Laminate Casework. B. SUBMITTALS: 1. Maintenance instructions: Submit floor covering materials manufacturer's printed maintenance instructions per Section 01725, Operating & Maintenance Data. 2 . Extra stock: Furnish to Owner at time of final acceptance of project a minimum of 1% of each color and pattern of vinyl used on project. Furnish Owner with minimum of 2% of each color of each type of based used on project. All pieces of this base to be 4' long or longer. All of this extra material to be of same factory run number as material installed in project. Get signed receipt from Owner's representative on delivery of extra stock. C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver materials to project in manufacturer's original, un- opened containers with labels indicating brand names, colors and patterns, and quality designations legible and intact. 2. Store and protect materials per manufacturer's directions and recommendations. Unless otherwise directed, store materials in original containers at not less than 70 degrees F. for not less than 24 hours immediately preceeding installation. ;. D. JOB CONDITIONS: Environmental requirements: Per Section 01513 for temperature in spaces where sheet vinyl flooring work takes place. j, 9-15 wr 09660-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: (Color to be selected by owner) 1. Preparation materials: Cleaning agents and equipment, moisture testing units, patching and leveling compounds, substrate aw sealants and similar materials and equipment as recommended by floor covering material manufacturer for type and location of substrate and other conditions involved. 2. Sheet vinyl: The following description is based upon Armstrong, Classic Corlon series - vinyl sheet flooring. a. 6' wide rolls. chips in vinyl b. Gauge: .085 overall. . 050 gauge vinyl composition/matrix we &W c. Reference specs: L-F-475A(3) , Type II, Grade A mil standard ayer 1623D for deck covering. d. Fire test data: ASTM E 648. 3 . Rubber base: Top set, 4" and 6" high, rubber roll goods. a. Flexco (continuous roll) or approved equal. 4 . Application materials: Primers and adhesives recommended by manufacturer of floor covering material to be applied for types and locations of substrates involved. When floor covering manufacturer markets application material for conditions involved, use floor covering manufacturer's material. 5. Tile colors and patterns: Selected by Owner. In general, colors and schemes per Section 09900, Painting. 09660-03 EXECUTION A. INSPECTION: 1. Examine substrates for excessive moisture content and for 6W acceptability, within specified requirements of work of other sections. Performance of work of this section without objection to work of other sections constitutes acceptance of job condi- tions at locations where work of this section is performed. 2 . Do not proceed with work of this section until defects in work of other sections have been corrected, moisture levels in concrete and masonry are satisfactory, and resilient tile flooring subcontractor is satisfied that he is providing a satisfactory, permanent installation. Y B. PREPARATION: 1. Fill cracks less than 1/8" wide and depressions less that 1/4" deep with crack filler at remodel areas. 2 . Prime surfaces where and as recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 3 . Roughen surfaces of hard, glossy materials to receive base. C. INSTALLATION: 1. Adhesives: Mixed and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and printed recommendations for each material, location and job condition involved. 2 . Vinyl: Lay vinyl symmetrically, square with axis of space and, where possible, borders at all perimeters. Install vinyl with edges tight to floor and joints tight. 9-(9 WW S: 09660-03 (Color to be selected by owner) 3 . Base: / Install base around perimeter of room or space, at toespaces of fixed cabinets and casework and, unless otherwise indicated, at perimeter of all resilient tiled and carpeted floors. Detailed requirements thus: a. Install with minimum of joints. Internal corner and scribed end joints not over 1/64" wide. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, all joints at internal corners only, and coped. b. Job form external corners without cutting through base, properly relieved, rolled into place. c. Install base after carpet is installed, with top level, and with bottom not over 1/8" from substrate for carpet. Press down cove base so bottom cove edge follows floor profile. No face nailing permitted. d. Where cove base ends with end of cove exposed, not dying into a corner, relieve and trim toe, bring toe back to wall, then cement toe and back of base firmly to wall. 4 . Reducing strips: Install where vinyl flooring terminates at uncovered adjoining floors. Center under door where resilient tile flooring terminates at door opening. Install with minimum possible number of joints. Locate joints well away from ends of strips where possible. Fit ends abutting walls and door frames to within 1/64". D. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Repair of defective work: Replace coverings showing deteriora- tion, ridges, dimples and/or pimples due to substrate roughness, unclean surfaces, or construction damage before substantial completion inspection. 2 . After adhesive materials have set, clean visible adhesive resulting from resilient tile work from all surfaces by methods and with materials recommended by floor covering material manufacturer. 9-?-0 CARPETING SECTION 09680 09680-01 GENERAL A. DECRIPTION: (Color to be selected by owner) 1. Provide carpeting where indicated on Room Finish Schedules. Inspect jobsite areas requiring carpeting installation to determine exact area and dimensions for completed carpet in- stallation. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing quality control in Section 01400, Quality Control. b. Providing concrete slabs with steel trowled finish at carpeted areas in Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified manufacturers: and carpet name: Stratton Ironside 28 a. 28 oz. Antron Nylon b. 9. 0 S.P.I. c. Pile Height . 156 (glue down installation) d. Backing: Unitary with 18# average touch bind. e. Total weight: 63 oz. f. 3 ply yarn. + 3% minimum overage for future repair (give owner) 2. Acceptable installer: Regularly engaged in carpet installation work and completed minimum of 5 comparable type and size instal- lations in past 2 year. 3 . Requirements of regulatory agencies: a. Flame spread: Rating not exceeding provisions of ASTM "Standard Method of Test For Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials" . b. Flammability: Meet Federal Flammability Standards. C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver materials in original, protective packaging with manufacturer's labels, mill register number on each roll and product identification legible and packaging intact. 2 . Deliver adhesives and primers in unopened containers. 3 . Carpeting subcontractor to open carpet packaging at earliest opportunity and visually inspect enough of carpet material to detect obvious deviations from required material, including face yarn color, pattern, type of construction, backing type, pile height, gage or pitch and stitches per inch. Reclose packaging and report all deviations to Architect at time of detection. 4. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage and wetting. 5. Store carpet material in manner and environmental conditions to stabilize moisture content and temperature at levels normally expected to exist when carpeted space is occupied by Owner. 6. Store adhesive at working temperatures per label instructions. 7 . Do not begin installation until sufficient quantity of materials to complete all spaces are received. L 9-Z 09680-01 D. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental requirements: Per Section 01513, Temporary Heat & Ventilation. 2 . Sequencing: a. Install carpet after acoustical ceilings, vinyl flooring and fixed casework are installed. b. Install carpet before room base and rubber skirting. 09680-02 PRODUCTS F A. MATERIALS: 1. Carpet: See 09680-01-B (Quality Assurance) . 2. Accessories: a. For junction between carpet and uncovered concrete floors: Vinyl tile reducing strips in color as selected by Owner. b. Adhesives: (1) Carpet to concrete: Product recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. (2) Carpet seaming cement: As recommended in writing by manufacturer of carpet. c. Substrate sealer: Product recommended in writing by carpet and carpet adhesive manufacturers. B. MANUFACTURE: 1. Carpet of "first quality" and per qualified manufacturer. 2 . Carpet yarn: All from same dye lot. 09680-03 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION: 1. Remove dust from slabs to receive carpet by vacuuming. 2 . Apply concrete sealer per sealer manufacturer's instructions to floor slabs. B. INSTALLATION: 1. Install be direct glue-down method. 2. Secure carpet to floor with specified adhesive per carpet manufacturer's printed instructions. 3 . Install wall to wall except wall to fixed casework toespace base where fixed casework occurs. 4 . Use continuous carpet lengths in widths as broad as possible. No cross seams permitted except where shown on approved layout plan. ; 5. True cut edges and appropriately treat edges to form non-ravel- ing joints. 6. Seam per carpet manufacturer's recommendation using seaming cement. 7. Install carpet to vinyl by "butting" . Use seaming cement on carpet edge at this joint. 9-22 k r. 09680-03 C. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Remove loose pieces of yarn with sharp scissors. 2. Replace frayed and pulled tufts, when permitted by Architect, to correct position. Anchor with seaming cement to tuft bind required. 3 . Remove all dirt, soiled spots, excessive adhesive and scraps from surface of carpet. Use carpet manufacturer's recommended materials and methods for conditions involved. 4 . Replace sections of carpet with objectionable blemishes, includ- ing excessive tears, frays and/or pulls and replace with acceptable specified carpet as directed by Architect. D. REMNANTS: 1. Package in appropriate protective wrapping, label appropriately and deliver to Owner all remnants and usable scrap. 2 . Get signed receipt from Owner's representative for remnants. 3 . Do not include remnants less than 48" in any dimension in tw required overrun quantity. s r Wr 9-23 PAINTING SECTION 09900 09900-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: (Color to be selected by owner) 1. Provide painting work where indicated on Paint Schedule and drawings by notes or symbol which correspond to symbols listed and described in 09900-02, Products. In addition, paint items specified in this section to be painted which are not otherwise indicated to be painted. Where drawings indicate a particular paint material in a praticular number of coats on a particular substrate material, assume drawing indication is typical of painting required for all similar conditions at all similar locations of work under this Contract which are not shown, not indicated or not specified as otherwise finishede. No painting of factory finished items required under work of this section. 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing concrete form coatings and bond breaker in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, and certain extent of concrete patching in Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete. b. Providing primer coat on metal, where required under work of Division 5, is specified in Division 5, Metals. c. Providing primer coat on sheet metal where required in Section 07600, Sheet Metal Work. d. Providing primer coat on hollow metal doors, hollow metal door and window frames, and door grilles and louvers, Section 08100, Hollow Metal Doors and Hollow Metal Door Frames. e. Providing preparation and texture fininshing of gypsum dry- wall for painting in Section 09270, Gypsum Drywall Finishing. f. Providing prefinished casework, Section 12310, Prefabricated Plastic Laminated Casework. g. Providing job and factory painted mechanical items per Division 15, Mechanical. h. Providing factory painted electrical items per Division 16, Electrical. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified materials manufacturers: "Best grade" and "first line" products of specified manufacturer per 09900-02 or Miller Paint Co. , PPG Industries, Dutch Boy, Benj . Moore and Glidden for all materials except stains. 2 . Acceptable applicators: Work done by material manufacturer's authorized applicator where paint material manufacturer stipu- lates this requirement in product literature. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Materials list: Promptly after award of Contract, submit to Architect 4 copies of list of materials proposed for use. Submit List per 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures. List to state name of material manufacturer, name and stock number of each item of material and complete specification by manufacturer on storing, mixing and applying each product. 9-24 09900-01 2 . Samples: Submit per 01340-02, Samples. Make three sets of samples comprised of every substrate requiring painting work with all paint products required on that material. Finish in progressive steps at rate of coverage recommended by paint manufacturer, allowing small strip of each preceding coat to show in sample. Sheet materials approximately 10" x 12" in area. Casings, trim and the like to be piece of the material specified for project, approximately 12" long. Submit samples set directly to Owner. When samples satisfactory to Owner have been approved, Owner will distribute: a. One set to Architect. b. One set to painting subcontractor. Finished surfaces will be checked by Architect and compared to samples. If, in Architect's opinion, coverage is not as good as sample, painting subcontractor will be ordered to apply additional coat(s) of finish, irrespective of number of coats already applied. In accepting subcontract for painting, paint- ing subcontractor agrees to be bound by these regulations without recourse. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original containers, plainly labeled and unopened. 2 . Provide or arrange for suitable storage room. Store all materials not in immediate use in storage room and do all mixing and opening there. 3 . Continuously take proper precautions against fire and daily 4w remove soiled rags, etc. , from premises. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental conditions: a. Paint only under favorable conditions of lighting and humidity. Moisture content of materials painted shall not exceed 12%, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. No exterior painting shall occur during inclement or threatening weather. Apply paint when surrounding air temperature is above 50 degrees F. , or at other temperature recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Maintain areas in process of being painted as clean and free of dust, dirt and rubble as is expected in completed struc- ture at time of initial occupancy. 2 . Protection: Protect own work, and work of others against damage while painting work is in progress. Place drop cloths to protect floors, fixtures and equipment. Exercise care to avoid stains on glass, joint sealant and hardware and remove stains where they occur. Replace items from which stains cannot be removed. ,,, 3 . Sequencing: Sealant work complete before painting. rr. 9-25 09900-02 PRODUCTS 1 A. MATERIALS: 1. General: a. Unless otherwise noted, all material names and numbers listed in products part of specification are products of Rodda Paint Co. , Portland, Oregon. b. Symbols: Symbols on Paint Schedule indicate type of finish and number of coats applied by painting subcontractor thus: (1) ENF/2C indicates flat enamel in 2 coats. (2) At metal, finish schedule indicates number of finish coats in addition to prime coat, thus APE/2C indicates painting subcontractor to apply 2 coats of All Purpose Equipment Enamel over prime coat by supplier of metal item and, at galvanized metal, not specified prime paint- ed in another section, 2 coats of All Purpose Equipment Enamel in addition to one coat of galvanized metal primer, all 3 coats applied by painting subcontractor. (3) Textures - suffix symbol: Where suffix symbol "S" occurs (example ACP-S) final coat of paint to be of stipple mix for roller application to give "orangepeel" texture. c. Colors: (1) Colors selected by Owner and approved by Architect. Painting subcontractor will be furnished Owner-Architect approved color schedule after project is bid. Paint, enamel and stain colors selected from specified materials or, at Owner's option, from qualified materials manufacturer's colors whose materials painting subcon- tractor elects to use. (2) Colors for interior walls in any one room or space will, in general, be all of same color. 2 . Exterior paint materials: a. Symbol APE: (1) TWO FINISH COATS of All Purpose Equipment Enamel by painting subcontractor over shop prime coat specified in other sections and over painter applied prime coat when shop prime coat is not required in other sections. (2) Prime coat exterior ferrous and galvanized metal items to receive enamel which are not shop prime coated before applying finish coats of All Purpose Equipment Enamel.d Prime thus: (a) Ferrous metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. "Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer - Oxide Red" , No. 2447, or approved substitute, one coat. (b) Galvanized metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. "Zinc Dust Primer" No. 2913 , or approved, one coat. 3 . Interior paint materials: a. Symbol ACP: (1) Concrete to paint: (a) First coat: Krillicon paint as it comes in con- tainer. \ (b) Second coat: Krillicon paint as it comes in con- tainer. �Q b. Symbol ACP. (1) Concrete to paint (2 ribbons around buildings) (a) First Coat: Krillicon paint as it comes in container. (b) Second Coat: Krillican paint as it comes in container. 09900-02 (2) Sheet metal dusts and insulated pipes to paint: (a) Clean metal with "Galvaprep". (b) One coat Metal Primer No. 2153 Zinc Chromate. w, (c) Two coats Krillicon as it comes in container. (3) ACP-S-2c: Second coat of stippling consistency. b. Symbol APE: (1) Ferrous metal to enamel: Apply TWO FINISH COATS over r shop prime coat specified in other sections and over painter applied prime coat on galvanized metal. Finish coats: All Purpose Equipment Enamel. ow (2) Ferrous and galvanized metal to enamel, not shop prime coated: Prime coated by painting subcontractor and given TWO FINISH COATS thus: 1 60 (a) Ferrous metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. "Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer - Oxide Red", No. 2447, or approved, one coat. (b) Galvanized metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. , Zinc Dust Primer No. 2913, or approved, one coat. (c) Finish coats: All Purpose Equipment Enamel. c. Symbol EN and ENS: o (1) Wallboard, gypsum and cement plaster to enamel: (a) First coat: Roseal No. 7700, tinted toward final color. (b) Second coat: Semi-Gloss Custom Color Enamel, apply without thinning. (2) ENS-2C: Same as (1) above except second coat of stippling consistency. d. Symbol ENF: Wallboard, gypsum and cement plaster to enamel. (1) First coat: Laysn Enamel Undercoat No. 390 with gloss ratio of 15. Tinted toward final color, without thinning. (2) Second coat: Lasyn Eggshell Finish No. 934 with gloss ratio of 15, apply without thinning 4 . Putty: For small repairs and nail holes: Pure linseed oil, lead and whiting. Color to camouflage repair. 5. Spackles and fillers: a. For interior work at small patches except wood to be stained: Synkloid "Spackle Paste" or Muralo "Spackle" . 09900-03 EXECUTION �r A. INSPECTION: Conditions of surfaces: 1. It is intent of this specification that painter receive surfaces from others ready for finishing with whatever cleaning, sand- papering, defect fillings and other preparative processing that is necessary and not specified in other sections. 2 . Examine surfaces before starting work and if surface to be kw finished is not in condition specified in other sections, ready for painter's preparation, immediately notify General Contractor and Architect in writing, or assume responsibility for and r rectify unsatisfactory finish which may result. 9-z7 09900-03 3 . Application of paint materials without objection to surface or job conditions constitutes acceptance of these conditions by painter. B. PREPARATION: Prepare surfaces for painting by such means as necessary to secure permanent bond for paint and to provide finish free of objectional blemishes. 1. Wood surfaces: a. Wash sap spots and knots with Mineral Spirits, then coat knots and sap streaks with know sealer. b. Putty and spackle, over dry primer, to bring filler material, when dry, flush with adjoining surface. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and defects. c. Stained and varnished work sanded to unblemished condition. Sand again after tinted repair filler work is completed. Tint filler to hide defects and nail holes. Permit no visible sanding scratches. 2 . Ferrous metal: Remove foreign matter from unprimed surface by such means as necessary to produce rust free, bright metal surface with minimum of sound metal removed, then immediately prime. 3 . Zinc coated metal: Clean to free of contaminant condition by washing with Mineral Spirits, then immediately prime. C. APPLICATION: 1. Paint all exposed surfaces in-place work noted, scheduled or specified in this section to be painted. "Exposed surface" means surface of in-place work accessible to painter with paint brush. In addition, paint following thus: a. Visible surfaces behind mechanical grilles and louvers. Paint these surfaces 2 coats flat black. b. Exposed surfaces of electrical conduit and boxes, plumbing fire protection, heating and control piping work in spaces with no other color coat printing required per this section. Paint per APE/2C (one prime coat and two equipment enamel color coats) in color to match background behind these items. c. Mechanical sheetmetal ducts insulated pipes and miscellaneous sheetmetal: Paint per ACP (one coat primer, 2 coats Krillicon) . �r d. Paint all external surfaces of interior and exterior steel doors, including access doors and visible surfaces of instal- led steel door frames, except surfaces concealed by hinges and wall finish, 2 coats of All Purpose Equipment Enamel over prime coats by door manufacturer. e. Surfaces requiring paint under work of this section which will become inaccessible for painting after installations required by other sections: Coordinate painting with work of other sections. Before final placement of hardware, l,+ 9-z8 09900-03 fixtures, finish plates, grilles, louvers, signs, convector covers and similar items, arrange for opportunity to finish areas and items that cannot be properly finished when such items are in place, including grilles and louvers required to be spray painted. 2 . Methods for application of paint materials: a. Apply materials on all surfaces by rollers, except as noted thus: (1) Brush apply on millwork, handrails, conduit and similar irregular shapes. (2) Brush apply on hollow metal doors, hollow metal frames, and similar broad metal surfaces. Immediately following brush application of each coat, roll out paint with short napped roller to give ligth "orangepeel" texture. (3) Spray paint grilled and louvers specified painted by painting subcontractor with hydro-spray (airless) equipment at off-site location or at time and in pro- tected on-site location. b. Where painting subcontractor believes spray application of a paint material will produce superior job, submit written request to use spray method, stating material to be applied and type of spray equipment used. Upon approval, employ approved method, equipment and material on approved surfaces. c. Roller application: Apply material with roller strokes in both directions so as not to leave roller marks or excessive build-up of material at laps. Make final direction of rolling vertical. v 3 . Priming: Treated, prime coat painted and sealed wood required per other sections does not eliminate any coat specified in this section. a. Face, back, edge and end prime all wood to be painted. b. Prime paint wood requiring priming with specified first coat material except prime concealed portions to receive NV 4 finish with sealing satin only. c. Prime paint metal, wood and plywood items requiring primer coat under work of this section after fitting and before jobsite assembly and installation. d. Prime all ungalvanized ferrous metal not specified primed by supplier and not otherwise indicated to be primed. See 09900-02-A for priming of galvanized metal. 4 . Do not apply, spill or overspray paint materials onto copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum, plastics. Do not prime or paint miscellaneous steel items above ceilings, unless otherwise specified in this section. 5. All coatings evenly spead on or flowed on, and free of runs, sags, crawling or other defects. 6. No succeeding coats applied until preceding coat is thoroughly dry and, at wood and metal, has been sanded, unless specifically noted otherwise by paint material manufacturer. 9.29 09900-03 7 . Hand sand with #0 sandpaper or finer as necessary to prevent visible sand scratches, all woodwork surfaces before first coat and between succeeding coats and dust clean except sand wood doors lightly with 3/0 and 5/0 sandpaper using finest abrasive sandpaper which will remove handling markes and effects of moisture. 8. Putty and filler compound applied after surface is primed and primer is dry. 9. Apply coatings without reduction except as specifically required by label directions. 10. Adulteration of materials not permitted. Adulteration means subsitution in part or whole of material without Owner's authorization. 11. Vary shade of paint in succeeding color coats to facilitate inspection. D. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Provide finished work free of all dust and damage. 2 . All moving parts left in proper working order. 3 . Remove or correct any defects resulting from painting work. 4. Remove from site all surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from painting subcontractor's activity. 5. Clean all stains resulting from this work from hardware, floors, glass and other surfaces. Use materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of stained material for removing stains. n dA' rt 9-30 dr 1W DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10110 + FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10110-01 GENERAL A. Fire Extinguishers: 10 lb. ABC multi-purpose dry chemical Amerex #441 or General TGP O-F with all metal valve works. (15 total, incl. one Gen. Data Halon 1211 in telemetry room) B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. FEC #1: J. L. Industries: 1029V10, Academy Series, i"► dark bronze anondized finish, surface mounted, con- temporary V door style, door glazing 10 (double strength glass) , options: aluminum tub, dark bronze color: trim and door. (3 total) . 2. FEC #2: J. L. Industries: 1027V10, Academy Series, iw dark bronze anodized finish, recessed mounted with 22" RT trim style, contemporary V door style, door glazing 10 (double strength glass) , options: aluminum tub, dark bronze color: trim and door. (6 total) . C. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: F 1. Provide and install standard "J" hook wall bracket furnished with fire extinguisher. (6 total) . FOLDING STAIRWAY SECTION 10120 10120-01 GENERAL ow A. Provide and install one (1) Bessler space saver folding attic folding stairway 22" x 54" in Room 206 . ' ENTRANCE MATS SECTION 10130 it 10130-01 GENERAL A. Provide and install FABCO entrance mats (pedigrid/petimat) (carpet tread) at doors 1, 2, 27, and 31. Mats are 1/2" thick and are installed in 3/8" recessed concrete outside of doors. For doors 1 and 2 : 6 ' x 3 ' . For doors 27 and 31: 3 ' x 3 ' . (Color of carpet to be selected by owner) . 10-1 } DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES METAL TOILET PARTITION SECTION 10162 10162-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide overhead supported metal toilet compartments where shown. 2 . Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing blocking in frame partitions and ceilings for mounting toilet compartments in Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing. b. Providing toilet room accessories in Section 10810. 1. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Approved manufacturers: Global, Sanymetal, Robart, Knicker- bocker, Weis or approved. 2 . Acceptable installer: Regularly engaged in toiled compartment installation work for past 2 years on comparable size and type of project. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Submit shop drawings to indicate size and arrangements of com- partments. Show door swing, locations of loafer rails, typical elevations, all pilaster sizes and anchorage details. Submit per 01340-01. 2. Submit color samples on printed color card. 2 cards required. 10162-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Compartments and pilasters: a. Galvanized and bonderized steel with minimum zinc coating of 15 mils each surface. b. All door, panel and pilaster surfaces finished with baked enamel of colors selected by Architect from a minimum of 18 different colors standard with the manufacturer. 2 . Hardware and accessories: a. Pilaster shoes minimum 22 gage stainless steel or chrome plated cast non-ferrous metal. b. Hinges recessed and concealed gravity type with s.s. pintles. c. Loafer rail: Extruded aluminum anti-grip headrail with end caps. d. Furnish one coat hook for each compartment; combination coat hook bumper where in-swinging doors occur; bumpers on out- swinging doors. e. All other hardware bright finished cast non-ferrous metal or s.s. ; (aluminum acceptable only for wall brackets. All finish on aluminum parts anodized to same Aluminum Associa- tion designation) . f. All mechanical fastenings vandalproof type. 10-2 A -02 10162 B. FABRICATION: 1. Compartment: Ceiling supported with headrail. kw a. Doors, panels and pilasters constructed of two sheets of 20 ith fiberboard or honeycomb gage steel (doors 22 gage) w filler cemented under pressure. b. Doors and panel thickness: 1" . c. Pilaster thickness: 1 1/411. d. Openings in partitions required for toilet room accessories are to be framed to size per approved toilet room accessory shop drawings. Frame edge construction to be same as parti- tion perimeter detail. 2 . Size: a. Pilasters: All stalls with doors, minimum pilaster size 6", maximum 1011, no intermixing of sizes permitted. b. Compartment size and arrangement: .► (1) Handicapped stalls with out-swinging doors: 36: wide x 58" deep. (2) Other compartments: 58" deep x width to fill opening between walls. 3 . All other fabrication per manufacturer's standard details and approved shop drawings. 10162-03 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: Install work per Architect approved shop drawings. *w B. ADJUSTING: 1. Adjust hardware for proper operation. 2. Set hinges to hold doors uniformly ajar when not latched. C. CLEANING & TOUCH-UP: After completion of installation, clean and polish exposed compartment surfaces and touch-up minor scratches. SECTION 10441 w. PLASTIC RELIEF SIGNS 10441-01 PRODUCTS A. Provide twenty (20) plastic relief signs as prescribed by owner. (Post as required) . 10-3 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES SECTION 10810 10810-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTIONS: 1. Provide toilet and locker room accessories at locations shown on drawings. 2. Related work in other sections includes: R a. Providing backing for mounting accessories in Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing. b. Providing toilet compartments in Section 10162, Metal Toilet Partitions. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Qualifications of manufacturer: Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers listed below establish standard of quality required, but are not restrictive. Similar and equal products of other manufacturers may be substituted with Architect's approval. C. SUBMITTAL: Submit rough-in drawings for use in locating backing and frame recess. D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING. 1. Deliver product in manufacturer's original, unopened and un- damaged packages with labels legible and intact. 2. Identify manufacturer, brand name, size, finish and location. 3. Store in unopened packages in manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operations. 4. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Replace damaged items. 10810-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Mirrors: 1/4" plate 60" high x 48" wide with 1" beveled edge with chrome clips installed in Rooms 106, 107, 108, 124 and 125 (5 total) . 1/4" plate 72" wide x 48" wide with chrome clips in Room 205 2. Medicine Cabinets: Bobrick B-398 recessed medicine cabinets with mirror installed in Room 108 (west wall near lay. ) and Room 218 (directly above wall lay. ) f 3. Shower Door: Holcam Model MX 35-36. Chrome frame with obscure glass, standard height 63h" . Adjust to width 354" to 36411 . Install in Room 205. r 10-4 r 10810-02 4. Grab bars: Bobrick B-6206 Series, concealed mounting, 1Y" O.D. x 18 gage wall thickness, stainless steel with satin finish. Each concealed mounting with 4 tamperproof stainless steel Allen head screws. Anchor to vertical sur- face by means capable of sustaining 500 lb. load. Clearance between wall and grab bar must be 1h" minimum. Install a 36" and 42" grab bar in Rooms 106 and 107, the two handicapped toilets. (2 bars per toilet) . 5. Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptables: Bobrick B-3944 . Recessed cabinet, equipped with satin finish stainless steel door. One each in Rooms 106, 107 , 124 and 125. Installation of this unit in Rooms 106 and 107 must be at it handicapped height. Bobrick B-369. Recessed cabinet, satin finish stainless steel. One each in Rooms 108 and 218 . 6 . Toilet Paper Dispensers: Bobrick B-288 surface mounted multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser. Stain- steel satin finish. One installed at each toilet in Rooms 106, 107 , 108, 127 , 125, 205 and 218 . (12 total) . 7 . Soap Dispensers: Bobrick B-8221. One at each lavatory i1w in Rooms 106, 107 , 108 , 124 and 125. (5 total) . 8 . Soap Dishes : Surface mounted ceramic tile in shower room, near Room 205. (2 total) . VW 10810-03 EXECUTION iW A. INSTALLATION: 1. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's directions in locations indicated on drawings. Exercise special care to W install in a rigid and secure manner using mechanical fasteners only, not adhesive. 2. Coordinate grab bar and napkin disposal installation with toilet compartment installation. B. ADJUSTING: Adjust hardware and operating mechanisms for proper operation. C. CLEAN-UP: 1. All accessories clean and acceptable for normal maintenance procedures. 2. Remove packaging materials from site. 10-5 r. w. DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11000 91� APPLIANCES SECTION 11300 A. DESCRIPTION: 1. Provide and install in accordance with manufacturer' s specifications. r► 2. Related work in other sections. a. Division 16 - Electrical b. Disision 12 - Plastic laminate - Casework C. Division 5 - Sheetmetal - Ductwork d. Division 15 - Mechanical ' B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Qualified Manufacturer: General Electric or owner approved equal. C. MATERIALS LIST: Provided & Item Quantity Number Installed by Color Refrigerator, 2-door, To be deter- "' No Frost, 19 . 7 Cu.Ft. 2 TFX 27F Owner mined later Built-in cook tops, 30" 2 J.P. 651 Owner of Spacemaker microwave exhaust fan combina- tion, 30" 2 J.V.M. 48 Owner " Dishwasher w/potscrub, 30" 1 GSD 1000G Contractor " Washer (large capacity) 1 Used Owner N/A Dryer (large capacity) 1 Used Owner N/A (Electric) r Garbage Disposer 2 * Contractor *In-Sink-Erator stainless steel Classic. Stainless steel lugs, continuous feed, automatic reversing action, with 1 HP capacitor start motor, corrosion protection shield, self-service wrenchette, 5-year warranty on parts and labor. 11-1 ,wr► DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS PREFABRICATED PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK SECTION 12310 12310-01 GENERAL A. DESCRIPTION: too 1. Provide casework shown in the plans in the following areas: 2. Related work in other sections includes: a. Providing general millwork, wood trim items and wood blocking AW in wood frame walls where required for fastening casework in Division 6. b. Providing sinks and sink trim in Division 15, Mechanical, including piping work serving same, unless otherwise specified in Section 12310. c. Providing electrical work in or on casework in Division 16, Electrical. hr 3. Definitions: Per "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide Specifications" of Architectural Woodwork Institute, except as otherwise defined in Section 12310. "Or equal" shall be understood to mean "as standard" with below listed qualified manufacturer only when manufacturer lists other than specified- material in his catalog for herein specified usage. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Qualified manufacturers: Submit catalog of selected manufac- turer for approval. iW 2 . Qualified installers: a. Trained journeyman, each with minimum of 3 years experience on equivalent size projects in installations of type required on Project. b. Installers employed by either casework manufacturer or authorized representative of casework manufacturer. C. Installation work force under direct supervision of casework manufacturer's authorized representative. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. Shop drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings per 01340-01 for Architect's approval and corrections before fabrication of casework. Show materials, dimensions, locations for electrical runs, fittings, hardware and other accessories. Locate sink centerlines for guidance of other trades. Show connections of cases to each other and to adjacent work, whether or not all materials are furnished by casework fabricator. Show joint locations in countertops and show methods of anchoring casework to building. 2 . Rough-in drawings: Provide 4 sets of rough-in drawings promptly after award of contract for use by mechanical and electrical subcontractors. Indicate locations of sinks, sink trim, electrical outlets, path for wiring, etc. 3 . Samples: Submit samples of laminated plastic countertop cover- ing, laminated plastic facing and lining materials and plastic molding materials for color selection. Obtain approval before fabrication from Owner. 12-I (fir 12310-01 D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 1. Deliver, store and handle cabinets in manner to prevent damage and deterioration. 2 . Defer delivery to job until installation and storage areas are complete and dry of all wet-type construction. 3 . Maintain relative humidity in storage areas not to exceed 60%. 4 . Protect all surfaces of cabinets subject to damage while in transit and storage. 5. Provide temporary skids under all large or heavy units. E. JOB CONDITIONS: 1. Environmental requirements: Per 01513, Temporary Heat & Ventilation. 2. Sequencing: Deliver casework to area where installation is required after acoustical work is installed in that area. 12310-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Vertical surfacing high pressure plastic laminate, .208" to . 036" thick of Formica, or Wilson-Art, of one sheen, and one manufacture. Pattern will be selected by Architect from all standard patterns of manufacturer casework subcontractor elects to use. In general, exterior of casework units will have all vertical surfaces of same pattern throughout Project. 2 . Colored high pressure plastic laminate backing sheet: Neutral color, 0.020" to 0. 035" +/- 0.004" thick, matte finish. 3 . Cabinet liner: Formica cabinet liner grade, 0. 020" +/- 0. 004" thick, in one color throughout project as selected by Architect. 4 . Countertops and backsplashes: High pressure plastic laminate: 0.051" +/- 0. 004" thick, NEMA Forming Grade, Textolite or Formica or Wilson-Art. Color in any one room or space will be same. Color as selected by Architect from all standard patterns and solid colors of one manufacture. Exposed edges finished with same plastic laminate as tops. Backing sheet: Formica, or equal, 0.062" +/- 0.004" thick. Laminating cements: "Heat Resistant" type as recommended by Formica for conditions involved. 5. Plywood and finish lumber: a. Plywood: Interior Grade B-B plywood, 3/4" thick, unless other thickness shown, except 1" thick for shelve spanning over 42" and 1/2" thick for backs of units exposed on exterior. Plywood option in lieu of particleboard finished with cabinet liner at "semi-exposed" vertical interior sur- faces of ends and dividers: 3/4" thick HDO plywood. b. Waterproof plywood: Exterior grade B-B plywood per PS 1-74 , 1/2" thick. c. Lumber: "C&Btr" Finish per WCLIB Standard Grading Rules. 6. Particleboard: Minimum 45 lb./cu. ft. density. Moisture content: 8%, maximum. Maximum warp in 48" of 0. 004" per foot. 11/16" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 12-2 -rrr 12310-02 Imo. 7. High density overlaid plywood: HDO-EXT-DFPA. 8. Hardware: As follows "or equal" per 12310-01-A. a. Hinges: National Lock or Stanley, 2 1/2" high, flat button or button tip, loose pin, steel, Stanley, size No. 2 . Black `" finish b. Pulls for doors and drawers: National Lock. Finish black. c. Catches: + (1) Magnetic: Ives in brown metallic lacquer. Use on doors without cabinet locks; on active leaf of doors; and provide 2 catches at doors over 50" high. (2) Elbow catches and surface bolts: For inactive leaf or pairs of doors at doors with cabinet locks: Doors up to 36" high . . . . . . . . One Ives elbow catch Doors over 36" high. . . . . . . . . Two Ives surface bolts, 9" top and 12" bottom. t`w (3) Magnetic and elbow catches on inactive leaf at doors in pairs with cabinet lock: Use one magnetic at bottom of door and one elbow at upper part of door. Elbow catch - Ives. Magnetic catch - Ives. d. Roller guide for drawers: (1) Typical drawers: Grant or Knape & Vogt. (2) Shallow drawers: Grant where front to back length inside of drawer is less than 12". e. Drawer bumpers: Rubber, Glynn Johnson, 2 per drawer. w, f. Adjustable shelf clips: Knape & Vogt. g. Clothes hanging poles: 1 1/16" chrome plated. h. Fastenings: All cabinet hardware requiring wood screws for fastening furnished with COARSE THREAD SCREWS (Sheet Metal Type "A" or "AB") finish to match cabinet hardware. All screws for assembly and mounting of casework, except where machine screws are required, of coarse thread ("A" or "AB") type with corrosion resistant finish, such as "Parkerized" , at concealed locations and cadmium plating where exposed. All with "Phillips" type screwdriver slots. w i. Provide all other hardware in or on prefabricated plastic laminate casework units as indicated on drawings except cabinet locks. B. FABRICATION: 1. Sizes: Unless otherwise noted, sizes shown on plans and on elevations at each unit of casework indicate width, height and o► depth, respectively, of that casework unit in inches. Actual dimensions determined thus: a. Width: As shown when both exterior sides of unit are exposed, w excluding overhangs of countertop at base units, as shown when one side is exposed and other side abuts another case- work unit, excluding side overhang of base unit countertop; 4 and as shown when unit is between other abutting units. For unit abutting wall as side of unit, add any amount between it 12.5 12310-02 1/2" and 1 1/4" to width shown on drawings for this unit, thus allowing for scribing work at wall. For units abutting other units at right angles, such as at a room corner where casework occurs on both walls and blind corner unit is not required, add equally to widths shown for corner units any amount between 1/2" and 1 1/411, so all corner units in same space have equal width corner filler strips, scribe fitted. b. Height: Dimension shown is distance from finished floor to top of countertop at base units and top of top on full height unit, including 4 1/4" for toespace. Dimension shown for wall hung upper units is from bottom of unit to top of unit. Table, desk and bench heights shown are from floor to top of unit's top. Top of end standards flush with top of unit's top at full height and wall hung units. Bottom edges of doors and end standards at wall hung units flush with unit's bottom. c. Depth: Dimension shown at base unit is depth of countertop from wall, including an allowance of 3/4" for overhang of countertop at front of unit. Backs of units shown with backs against wall to be as close to wall as possible . Dimension shown at upper units and full height units is distance from wall to front face of door or drawer at closed units and to furthest projection from wall at open fronted units mounted against wall. For free standing units, depth shown does not include any countertop overhangs and is from finished face to finished face or finished back above toespace level. d. Other dimensions, unless otherwise indicated in qualified manufacturer's catalog. (1) Shelves: (a) Depth: For adjustable (in height) shelves: 1/4" less than distance from interior face or unit's back to front edge of standards at open shelving and 1 3/4" less than distance between these same surfaces at exposed face frame units with doors in front of shelving. (b) Length of adjustable shelves: 3/16" less than clear distance between standards supporting shelves. (c) Height adjustment for adjustable shelve: 1" increments of height. (d) Thickness: See 12310-02-B1-d(3) . (2) Drawer sizes: Inside length of drawers (from front to back) not less that 3 1/4" less than depth of casework unit, excluding countertop overhang. Inside width of drawers maximum possible, allowing for attachment of roller guides per guide manufacturer's details. Assume drawer fronts are of equal height in a casework unit, unless otherwise indicated. Height of drawer sides above top of drawer bottom: �w 12-4 err 12310-02 r (a) Drawer immediately below countertop: 2 1/2" minimum, which allows minimum of 5" high drawer front with top of front 1/8" below bottom of countertop, except this dimension 3 3/4" minimum where no drawer occurs below top drawer. (b) Bottom drawer in bank of drawers" 3" minimum, which allows minimum of 5" high drawer front with top of drawer bottom 1 5/8" above bottom of casework bottom. (c) Drawers between top and bottom drawer: 3" minimum, which allows minimum of 5" high drawer front with top of drawer front 1 3/4" below top of drawer next above. (3) Thicknesses: See 12310-02-B5 for tops. (a) Shelves: 3/4" to 42" span; 1" over 42" span. These thicknesses for core only of plastic laminate faced shelves. (b) Divider and end standard cores: Each casework unit with own 11/16" sides at both sides to give 3/4" (finished thickness) end standards and 1 7/16" divider where two casework units abut at sides, 1 60 except at open shelving. (c) Door and drawer fronts: 11/16" cores. (d) Drawer sides and drawer backs: 1/211, minimum. (e) Bottoms at all units and tops of units without AW countertops: 3/411, nominal. (f) Drawer bottoms, dust panels and vertical dividers within units: 1/411 . tW (g) Casework backs: 1/4" where exterior face of back is concealed and 1/2" elsewhere. (h) Scribe strips: 3/411. rw (4) Job dimensions: Verify dimensions of spaces for all casework locations in building and verify locations of related work by other trades which enter into casework. 2 . Machining, fitting and joining: All parts machined for accurate fit, with rounded corners on drawer fronts and door corners. Assemble to produce true, square, level, plumb and rigid units. Assemble with quantity of fastenings and type y , of adhesive capable of sustaining all loads so joined materials fail before joint separation occurs. In general, and unless otherwise indicated in qualified manufacturer's catalog, fasten thus: a. Glue continuous full length of joints where gluing is re- quired. Metallic fasteners concealed, unless otherwise noted. Screws with sheet metal type "A" or "AB" threads, black, cadmium or chrome plated where exposed. Minimum penetration of fastener into edge of material fastened to: 1", unless otherwise noted. Into board face: Penetration to within 1/8" of opposite face of board material. b. Base unit bottom to ends: Glue and staple with concealed coated staples. it �w. 12-5 w i, 12310-0 c. Bottoms to bases: Flush, countersunk, flat head, Phillips head screws in neat, symmetrical arrangement or, if levelers are used #8 wood screws thru holes in levelers at each cor- ner of each unit and leveler adjusting hole in base capped with chrome plated steel or inconspicuous color plastic drive-in cap. d. Web frames and/or subtops to unit ends and dividers: Glue and nail at 4" o.c. , plus screw at each front corner of unit with two 1 3/4" x #8 screws. All metallic fasteners concealed. e. Wall unit's top and bottom to unit ends: Glue, screw and f staple with coated staples. All metallic fasteners con- cealed. Minimum of four 1 3/4" x #8 screws per end. f. Full height unit's top and bottom to ends: Glue and minimum of four 1 3/4" x #8 screws. Conceal metallic fasteners. g. Backs to ends, divider standards, top of upper wall hung units, bottoms, web frames and subtop and fixed shelves: ` Glue, staple and screw at single faced units. Glue and staple at double faced units. Screws, #6, at not more than 12" o.c. and staples at 4" o.c. Backs set into dado at double faced units glued and stapled at approximately 4" o.c. , with staples driven at line of junction between back and standards to minimize exposure of fastener heads. h. Top to back of wall hung upper units: In addition to fastenings per "g" above, use 3/4" x 3/4" x 1/16" aluminum angle, Alcoa No. 78-K, or equal, continuous full inside width of unit, located at exposed interior intersection of top with back. Angle secured to top with 1/2: x #8 screws at 6" o.c. thru top leg of angle into unit's top. i. Scribe pieces: Secure with brads at 4" o.c. , driven from exterior of casework unit, not thru interior finish. 3 . Scribe pieces: Locate per typical details. 4 . Surface finishes, unless otherwise indicated in qualified manufacturer's catalog or otherwise shown. a. Exposed vertical exterior surfaces, except scribe pieces, and countertop backsplash surfaces, finished with vertical surfacing high pressure plastic laminate. "Exposed' means exposed to view in finished project. "Exterior" means the outside of casework unit. "Surface" means a face, not an edge such as that on the least dimension of a piece of particleboard. b. Exposed vertical interior surfaces of ends and dividers at open (without doors) casework units finished with same vertical surfacing high pressure plastic laminate as exterior exposed vertical surfaces. c. Following surfaces finished with cabinet liner, unless other- wise indicated in qualified casework manufacturer's catalog: (1) Top and bottom of adjustable shelves. (2) Semi-exposed vertical interior surfaces of ends and dividers. "Semi-exposed vertical interior surfaces" means vertical surfaces behind opaque doors and vertical 4; surfaces to minimum of 6" back of front of drawer fronts 12--6 12310-02 inside units housing drawers. At contractor's option, 3/4" thick HDO plywood may be substituted for particle- board core and cabinet liner omitted on semi-exposed vertical interior surfaces. (3) Top of casework unit's bottom and bottom of top, except bottom of countertop. (4) Bottom of upper wall hung unit's bottom, regardless of height of bottom from floor. (5) Back face of doors and back face of drawer fronts. d. Following surfaces finished with high pressure plastic laminate backing sheet. (1) Underside of countertops at sinks set in plastic laminate covered tops. (2) Underside of table tops with plastic laminate finish to top. (3) Underside of tops not attached to casework unit where top is plastic laminate finish. (4) Wherever unsupported area of top exceeds 6 square feet and is finished on top surface with plastic laminate. e. Following surfaces finished with 0. 051" Forming Grade of 1/16" General Purpose colored high pressure plastic laminate: Exposed face of scribe pieces. f. Other surfaces: Natural characteristics of specified material, without further finishing of surface, except iW countertops and backsplashes fabricated and finished per following paragraph. 5. Fabrication and finish of countertops and backsplashes: Backsplashes 3/4" thick and 4" high, unless otherwise shown. Joints located to minimize number of joints and prominence of locations in finish material. Backsplash and endsplash of plastic finish coved integrally into countertop. High pressure plastic laminate. Fabricate per Formica Specifications with materials specified except overall nosing height 3/411 . End- splashes of same height as backsplashes are required at case- work ends abutting vertical surfaces where backsplashes are also required, except at abutting "vertical surface" plastic laminate surfaces. 6. Edge finishes: a. Plastic "T" type edges: Install on: (1) Front edge of shelves. (2) Partitions inside casework units, except hardboard divider partitions. (3) Front edge of fixed bottom shelf (case unit bottom) behind doors. r (4) Drawer sides and backs at top edge and all four edges of drawer fronts. (5) All other exposed edge locations not shown or specified to receive other edge treatment. (6) Edges of doors. b. High pressure plastic laminate edges: 0.051" countertop type material: �r. 2-? 4W 12310-02 (1) Vertical edges of countertops and edges of backsplashes which are covered with high pressure plastic laminate, glued full height of counter edges, full width of back- splash edges, and with extension for scribing to abutting vertical surfaces at backsplashes. Color to match countertop and backsplash color. occurs on all four edges of island type units. (2) Exterior exposed divider standards, end standards and scribe pieces. Field applied on standards in one piece width where two casework units are side-by-side. Where end standard edge at back of wall attached unit is exposed due to close proximity to an "outside" corner of space or to ground level window, etc. , this edge also requires edge finish. c. Countertop and backsplash edges: End splashes of same materials as tops where backsplashes are shown, unless other- wise specifically noted on drawings, finished same as back- splashed: Plastic laminate edges: Per Formica speci- fications, Cove Type Countertop, with specified materials. 7 . Core and board material locations, unless otherwise specified as qualified casework manufacturer's catalog: a. Countertops and backsplashes: As specified per top fabri- cation for type finish shown. b. Plywood: (1) Scribe strips or, at Contractor's option, of solid lumber. (2) At Contractor's option, for following locations: " (a) Toeboards at toespaces in lieu of solid lumber. (b) Concealed web or skeleton framing in lieu of solid lumber. (c) Any location where 11/1611, 3/4" or 1" board core material is required, except doors and countertops, in lieu of particleboard. Make plywood substitution in same, or thicker, thickness as required for particleboard, i.e. 3/4" plywood for 11/16" particle- board. c. Particleboard: (1) End and divider standards. (2) Bottoms (bases) of base, wall hung and full height units. (3) Tops of upper wall hung units. (4) Doors, removable panels and backs exposed on units exterior. (5) Drawer fronts, sides and backs. (6) Shelves. (7) Backs of free standing units where back is exposed. d. Hardboard, light duty, 1/4" thick: (1) Drawer bottoms. (2) Backs of wall hung upper units. (3) Backs of wall mounted base units. (4) Dividers subdividing interiors of units thus: (a) Mounted vertically at subdivided units. IZ 8 err 12310-02 w► 8. Detailed assembly requirements: a. Bases: (1) Construct base supports for fixed units with top at level line 4 1/4" (+/- 1/811) above floor slab or underlayment or floor finish, face of toeboard straight and in longest continuous pieces practical, using 3/411, 5/4" or 8/4" stock, depending on job conditions. Rigidly secure toeboard to casework bottom. (2) At casework manufacturer's option, use base levelers in lieu of shimming base supports, providing bottom of toe- board is not more than 5/16" above substrate for floor finish at any point and toeboard is rigidly secured to bottom of casework unit. Provide continuous backing for attaching room finish base material to kickboard, using longest practical lengths of 1/4" hardboard to face kickboards when casework units are constructed as indi- vidual units on unit principal. Secure base levelers to give blocks on bottom of case bottom so lower edge of metal bracket supporting leveler foot is approximately flush with bottom edge of kickspace toeboard. Screw fasten leveler bracket at all holes in bracket using largest size screw bracket will accommodate and with top of bracket resting firmly on glue blocks. Itw b. Web frames: Provide web frames or solid subtop immediately under countertops, except above top drawers immediately under solid subtops; and web frames at top of doors immediately below drawer. At Contractor's option, partial web frame of • plywood or particleboard, extending not less than one-half depth of unit, may be substituted for full web frame at top of doors immediately below drawer. Locate partial web frame at front of unit. c. Backs: (1) Backs fully overlap following back edges: (a) Top web frame or subtop of base units. (b) Fixed shelves. (c) Divider standards, except at double faced units. (d) Concealed end standards, except at double faced units. (2) Backs at double faced units installed per "d" below. (3) Backs rabbeted into and overlap minimum of 3/4 of width of following back edges: (a) Bottoms of upper wall hung units. (b) Tops of full height and wall hung units where a plastic laminate finish is required on top surface of these tops. (c) Exposed exterior end standards of upper wall hung units. d. Double faced units: Construct base units under 4' high with separate backs for each face; common ends with one piece core, and common top with one piece core, not joined length- wise of assembly. 12-9 �r 12310-02 e. Drawers: Sides, front of box and back lock-shouldered. Applied front (overlaying front) screwed to box front with 2 or more screws from inside box. Bottoms housed in dado at front, sides and back. Bottoms glued and stapled in dado. Drawers mounted on specified type roller guides corresponding to type of drawer or unit indicated. Stop drawers with two rubber silencers per drawer, located to contact roller guides drawer removal trip lever. f. Shelves: Adjustable for height in unit at i" intervals. Holes for shelf clips 1" from front and back edges of Shelves. g. Face rails and valance boards: Required only at sink units, unless otherwise shown. Height of rail same dimension as depth of sink below cabinet top. , 9. Install hardware per shop drawings and hardware manufacturer's directions. Install 3 hinges per door on doors over 48" high. 12310-03 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Set casework bases accurately in place and level. Secure bases to floor, except at wall attached units, to prevent tipping or dislodging of casework unit. Consider peninsular shaped units as not wall attached. 2 . Fit scribe pieces accurately to abutting vertical surfaces. Secure scribe pieces only to casework unit, using concealed fastenings. Front face of plastic laminate on scribe piece flush with front face of kickspace toeboard at wall side of J exposed end standards, unless otherwise detailed on drawings. 3 . Set casework accurately on base, level and plumb. Install attaching devices, closures and trim members required. 4 . Install continuous 1/4" hardboard kickboard cover on casework units built on unit principal, closely fitted to underside of units bottom and not over 5/16" above substrate for floor covering. All joints over solid backing. Nail heads set flush, ready to receive room base. 5. Scribe fit upper wall hung casework units. 6. Secure casework units at walls thus: a. Base units: Secure to studs with #8 or larger screws at not more than 32" o.c. Locate screws as closely as possible to junction of units back with top web frame or subtop and as close to corner of units as possible. If fastener if thru 1/4" back, shim between back and wall finish at fastener locations to prevent distortion of back. Fasten with oval head screws with finishing rings. Screws to penetrate wood studs minimum of 1" and metal studs minimum of 1/211 . At concrete or masonry walls, use Rawl "Caulk-Ins" with #8 machine screws or, for hollow units, Rawl "Spring-Wings" with 3/16" bolt, also oval head and with finishing ring when thru 1/4" back. 12-10 tirr 12310-03 b. Wall hung units: Secure near top of unit same as for base units, except fasteners at 16" o.c. , maximum. Secure round head fasteners at top thru aluminum angle, without finishing rings and secure units near bottom, approximately 2" above top of bottom, same as for base units. c. Wall mounted units: Secure to backing with #10 or larger screws at approximately 16" o.c. thru back, using finishing r.r rings. Screws to penetrate into backing minimum of 1 1/211 . Place screws symmetrically and in two horizontal rows near top and bottom of unit, equally spaced from ends. Shim behind back of unit, same as for base units. 7 . Tops: Install high pressure laminate plastic tops with scribe fit at ends abutting vertical surface plastic laminate and with backsplashes and endsplashes scribed to walls. Secure tops to web frames and/or subtops with screws. If joint in core of top is not on subframe, use continuous 5"-6" wide butt block center- ed under joint in core, glued and screwed. 8 . Cut all holes in casework units to receive electrical and mechanical outlets, sink trim and sinks required to be installed per other sections. Make cutouts in plastic laminates with rounded corners to prevent laminate cracking per Formica Casework Specifications. 9. Drill holes for cabinet locks installed by finish carpenters under work of Section 06200. B. ADJUSTING: Adjust moving parts to operate freely, without objec- tionable imperfections. Correct misalignments and improper clearances. C. PATCHING AND TOUCH-UP: 1. Where permitted by Architect, touch-up joints and chipped edges of plastic laminates and countertop materials, using laminate and countertop material manufacturers touch-up products for material involved. ,r 2. Secure Architect's approval of means, methods and materials for other required corrective work. D. CLEANING: 1. Remove exposed adhesive materials, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface from which adhesive is removed. 2 . Vacuum clean interior of casework behind doors and inside drawers. iw DRAPERY TRACK SECTION 12510 12510-01 GENERAL. A. DESCRIPTION: Provide ceiling type surface mounted, traverse equipped drapery track where shown on drawings. B. QUALITY MANUFACTURERS: Kirsch, Grant or prior approved. C. JOB CONDITIONS: Sequencing: Install after ceiling and painting is completed. 12510-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Track Kirsch Series No. 9047 extruded aluminum. 2 . Equipment: a. No. 9661 pulley set. b. No. 9641 tilt-in masters. c. No. 9670 plain ballbearing carriers with No. 9671 at every fourth carrier. Provide carriers at 4" o.c. at each track. d. No. 9921 ballbearing tension pulley. e. No. 9965 waxed fiberglass centered cord No. 5 size. f. Additional equipment as required for complete workable installation. 12510-03 EXECUTION INSTALLATION: Mount track in recess at window head per details. 12-12 ru DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL r. INDEX 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 15011 General 15012 Drawings 15013 Codes 15014 Equipment , Materials and Workmanship 15015 Substitutions t 15016 Change Orders 15017 Guaranty 15018 Air Balancing 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15051 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15052 Valves 15053 Piping Specialties 15054 Mechanical Supporting Devices 15055 Mechanical Systems Insulation. 15056 Electrical Work 15057 Miscellaneous 15200 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM it 15201 General 15202 Water Supply Piping 15203 Domestic System aw 15300 SOIL, WASTE AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 15301 General 15302 Piping aw 15303 Traps 15304 Flashings 15305 Cleanouts irr 15306 Floor Drains 5� 307 Catch—Ba---in 15308 Ran—holes 15309 Downspout Connection 15440 SPECIAL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES 15441 General 15442 Underground Storage Tanks 15443 Air Compressor 15444 Car - Truck Hoist ,W 15445 Service Equipment 15460 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15461 General %W 15462 Plumbing Fixtures 15463 Hydrants & Hose Bibbs DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL INDEX - Continued 15800 AIR CONDITIONING 15801 General 15802 Dampers 15803 Ductwork 15804 Air Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15805 Furnaces 15806 Unit Heater 15807 Radiant Heating System 15808 Infrared Heater 15809 Ceiling Exhaust Fan 15810 Roof Exhaust Fans 15900 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15920 MOTOR CONTROLS 5 r ikw �r taw SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS' 15011 GENERAL iW a. The General Conditions and Requirements listed in index of the specifications apply to the work under this Division. Plans and specifications cover furnishing of all labor , materials, equipment , tools , and apparatus necessary for and reasonable, incidental to the installation of complete air conditioning and plumbing systems, as indicated on the drawings and as specified. 15012 DRAWINGS a. Contract Documents: 6r 1 . Drawings and specifications show the extent of the systems and characteristics of the equipment and installation. Items not indicated but required for complete operating systems b• are to be of quality equal to those specified. Obtain actual roughing-in-measurements before proceeding with work. Review architectural and electrical drawings , and coordinate the w, mechanical work as required. 2 . Follow the spirit as well as the letter of the drawings and specifications . Have any alleged or existing error , omission , or conflict in drawings and specifications clarified before formulating bid. iww 3 . Failure to have misunderstandings corrected will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility of supplying the proper materials and labor to install and complete the job as required, or to make good any damage to, or defect in, his work or the results obtained therefrom. 4 . Supplementary details and drawings supplied to the aw Contractor, as required during construction, will be considered part of the Contract Documents. b. Shop Drawings : 1 . Submit for approval manufacturer ' s detailed shop drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all equipment to be "'�" furnished, excepting equipment specified by catalog number, in which case a statement of conformance will suffice . It shall be the Contractor ' s responsibility to see that all deviations from rw drawings and specifications shall be specifically noted and called to the Architect ' s attention on these shop drawings, otherwise approval will be automatically voided. Abbreviations I UM or codes are not acceptable. 15-1 Page 2 Section 15010 2 . Equipment shop drawing submittals shall consist of a single sheet , or sheets , if required , for each piece of- equipment , fequipment , and shall give the specific data needed for consideration of approval . All pertinent data listed in the specifications and in schedules shall be furnished, including all special features. In addition, the items shall be identified with the building, and specifications section they appear in by number, and bound together in an indexed loose-leaf folder . In order to avoid delays in submitting shop drawings, stragglers may be submitted at a later date for inserting in the previously submitted indexed loose-leaf folder . All shop drawings shall be indexed , and the original submittal shall note which shop drawings will be submitted at a later date . Marked-up catalogs are not acceptable . All submittals shall be in proper order . 3 . All materials and shop drawings shall be submitted within thirty ( 30) calendar days of contract receipt . 15013 CODES The Contractor shall perform all work and provide all materials in accordance with applicable codes, state laws, local laws, or ordinances. He shall obtain and pay for all required permits, licenses, and code inspections. 15014 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND WORKMANSHIP a. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine that each piece of equipment meets the detailed requirements of the drawings and specifications , and that it is suitable for the installation shown. The Architect shall be notified of any shortcomings found during the bid period. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the specifications and drawings . Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable , even though specified by name along with other manufacturers . b. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are specified, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of entire system need not be product of same manufacturer . Furnish all materials and equipment , new and free from defects and of size, make , type and quality herein specified or appproved by Architects. rr rr W Page 3 iW Section 15010 15015 SUBSTITUTIONS All requests for approval of substitution for materials other than those specified or shown must be submitted in writing and be received at the office of the Architect at least ten ( 10 ) calendar days prior to the bid date . All approvals granted are subject to complete compliance with the drawings and specifications. Requests shall be accompanied by catalog cuts and complete technical data pertaining to the request and any other data the Architect may require. Data shall include ratings shown on drawings and specified horsepower, voltages, special requirements, etc . Incomplete data will be subject to rejection. No verbal approvals will be given, and all approvals will be listed in an Addendum issued before bid opening date . 15016 CHANGE ORDERS All supplement cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown showing quantities of material , unit cost of material , and labor allocated to each 6W item of work. wr 15017 GUARANTY a. The Contractor shall make good the following guarantee requirements within one ( 1 ) year following date of final acceptance without additional cost to the Owner . b. All work and apparatus shall be free from defects of material or workmanship. C . All apparatus shall be so built and installed as to deliver ow its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. d. Air shall be supplied to or exhausted from all rooms simultaneously in amounts equal to that called for. e . The entire mechanical apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. i5-3 Page 4 Section 15010 15018 AIR BALANCING a. Description: At the completion of the work, a firm which specializes in this work and has been approved by the Architect stall adjust all air systems . b. Scope : The adjusting firm shall : Adjust air flows to within plus or minus 10% of the shown volume . Make required drive changes . Adjust minimum ventilation air settings. Record final fan rpm, amperage, voltage, etc . C . Logs and Data: After completion of air balancing , a typewritten report shall be prepared containing the following information, with three ( 3) copies to the Architect . 1 . Actual air volume readings at all inlets and outlets. 2 . Total CFM air supplies to area from air conditioning system. 3 . Total CFM air exhaust from. area. 4 . Fan data. J, 15-4 rr Page 5 for SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS %W 15051 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS a. Excavations and Backfill : + 1 . Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of mechanical work. Any piping or other work damaged during excavation and backfilling shall be repaired at Contractor 's expense. 2 . Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width. Cost of additional excavations to facilitate utility crossovers, additional offsets , etc . , shall be borne by the Contractor. Excavation material is unclassified. Width of trench shall be widened if the Architect does not consider it wide enough for a wr proper installation. 3 . All underground cast iron piping shall be full bedded i. on sand. A minimum 4-inch deep layer of sand shall be placed on the leveled trench bottom for this purpose . The sand shall be removed to the necessary depth for piping bells and/or couplings to maintain contact of the pipe on the sand for its entire length. All other piping shall be laid on a smooth level trench bottom, so that contact is made for its entire length. o„„ 4 . All backfill under interior slabs shall be bank sand or pea gravel . (Excavated material may be used outside of buildings at the Contractor ' s option. The final 8-inch course shall be soil in any event . ) All backfill shall be placed in layers not "' exceeding 8-inches deep and compacted to 95% of maximum density at optimum content to preclude subsequent settlement . kw 5 . Following backfilling, grade all trenches to the level of surrounding soil . All excess soil shall be disposed of as directed. ir. 6. Instructions for installation of exterior fresh water system are shown on Drawing Number M-1. Owner will pay for and install the three (3) water meters shown. Contractor will be 6"' responsible to ensure that master shut-offs are installed in accordance with the plumbing code. 7 . TWD will perform all tasks related to furnishing and installation of ductile iron (fresh) water pipelines including fire hydrants and appurtenances to within 5 feet of buildings. TWD will also install copper service lines to the three meters. IS-5 Page 6 Section 15050 b. Measurements, Lines, and Levels: Check dimensions at the building site and establish lines and levels for the work specified in this section. C. Piping Installation: Install unions in all non-flanged pipe connections to apparatus and appurtenances for removal for servicing, so located that piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system. Provide dielectric couplings , unions , or flanges between galvanized steel and copper pipe or tubing. Install all piping so as to vent and drain. Run all piping parallel to the building structure and support it sufficiently to prevent sagging . Support all piping independently so that its weight is not carried by the equipment . Note: Gang as many air vents as possible d. Piping Materials: and install on west roof of adm. bldg. and south roof of main. bldg. 1 . Waste and Vent : (No exposure to Hall Blvd. or RR tr. ) a. Underground to 5-feet Outside Building: Standard weight cast iron with either hub and spigot or no-hub ends. b. Underground 5-feet Outside Building Line : Cast or ductile iron or PVC, in accordance with code. C. Above Floor: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe ? with galvanized recessed drainage fittings for 1 1/2 inch and smaller standard weight cast iron with either hub and spigot or no-hub ends. 2 . Storm: a. Above Grade : Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with 150-1b . malleable iron , galvanized screwed fittings . Rain drain risers on outside of building shall be one piece . b. Inside Below Grade to 5-feet Outside Building Line: Standard weight cast iron with either hub and spigot or no-hub ends. C . Underground 5-feet Outside Building Line : Cast or ductile iron or PVC in accordance with code. 3 . Domestic Water : a. Underground (4-inch and smaller) : Type "K" hard- drawn copper tubing with wrought solder fittings . Joints shall be soldered with "All-State" No. 430 with No. 430 flux having a tensile strength of 14 ,000 psi . (U. S. made copper) i5-� Page 7 Section 15050 w Tyton joint, b. Underground ( 6-inch and Larger) : / Ductile iron pipe with cast iron fittings. (All cement lined) . C. Above Floor: Type "L" hard-drawn copper tubing with cast or wrought solder fittings and all joints soldered as specified for underground copper tubing. 4 . Gas Piping: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 psi malleable iron screwed fittings. 5 . Compressed Air: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with 250 psi galvanized fittings. 6 . Lubricant : 14 gauge 0 . 083 wall steel tubing with high pressure fittings. fir. 7 . Miscellaneous: Type L hard drawn copper tubing as t; specified for above floor domestic water piping. (U. S. made) Y.r 15052 VALVES 6. a. Provide valves as shown and at connections to equipment . All valves accessible and fully equal in size to piping. Support all valves where necessary. Valves shall be Jenkins, Powell , `w Wallworth , or approved . Jenkins catalog numbers, except as noted, used as basis for selection. b. Relief Valves: Combination temperature and pressure relief valves as manufactured by Watts Regulator , McDonnell-Miller, Crane, or approved equal . Ser- Type Size Figure Rating Ends Materials vice No . Water Gate 3" & #47U 200# Screwed Bronze & Air under WOG Water Gate 3" & #1240 225# Solder Bronze & Air under or#1242 Cold Water Water Globe 2-1/2" #106A or 300# Screwed Bronze & Air & & #108A WOG Angle under Water Globe 3" & #1200 or 300# Solder Bronze & under #1202 Cold �"" Angle Water Page 8 Section 15050 VALVE SCHEDULE (continued) Ser- Type Size Figure Rating Ends Materials vice No. � Water Vertical 3" & #119 300# Screwed Bronze Check under WOG ., Water Horiz . 3" & #352 300# Screwed Bronze Check under WOG Water Horiz . 3" & #1222 300# Solder Bronze Check under Cold Water Gas Home- 2 1/2" #1601 150# Screwed Semi Steel stead & under Gas Home- 3" & #650 150# Flanged Semi Steel z stead larger d. Notes : 1 . Disc material shall be selected for the intended service and valves shall be tagged with permanent label under handwheel indicating type of disc installed. 2 . All globe , and gate valves shall have Teflon impregnated packing with 25% Teflon minimum. 15053 PIPING SPECIALTIES a. Floor & Ceiling Plates : Provide stamped split type plates on all pipes exposed to view and passing through floors, walls, partitions, and plaster furring. Provide chrome plated plates in finished rooms . Plates shall completely cover opening around pipe . b. Unions : 150 lb. malleable iron, brass to iron seat , ground joint , black or galvanized to match pipe. 200 lb. WOG bronze, ground joint , solder type for copper tubing. Where galvanized pipe and copper tubing join, dielectric unions or couplings shall be installed. .K_A WW Page 9 wr Section 15050 15054 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES a. Foundations & Supports: Supports for all apparatus to be furnished as specified , detailed and as required by the manufacturers of specific equipment . b. Hangers & Supports: W 1 . General : Provide adjustable hangers for all pipes, complete with adjusters, swivels, rods, etc. Size hangers to clear insulation and guide where required, as well as support " piping . Provide hangers within three feet of all changes in direction of mains . Provide all additional structural steel angles , channels or other members required to support piping where building members do not occur as required for proper support . Space hangers as noted below except on soil pipe, which shall have a each at hanger joint with a maximum of one g j per fitting. In areas of multiple fittings , sufficient hangers shall be provided to maintain proper slope without sagging. Pipe Sizes Hanger Rod Spacing Diameter 3/4" thru 2" 3/8" 1/211 , 3/4"-5" o. c . 2-1/2" thru 3-1/2" 1/2" 1" , 1-1/4" & 1-1/2"-7 ' o. c. 4" thru 5" 5/8" 211 , 2-1/2" & 3"-10 ' o . c . 6" 3/4" 4" and above 15 ' o. c . 8" and over 7/8" Provide floor stands, wall bracing, masonry piers, etc . for all lines running near the floors or near walls and which can be properly supported or suspended by the walls or floors. Pipe lines near concrete or masonry walls may also be hung by hangers carried from wall brackets at a higher level than pipe . Hanging of any pipe from another is prohibited. 2 . Hangers: Clevis or band type . Grinnell 260, 269 or similar Fee & Mason shall be provided. w W W Ir'.o 1£e r Page 10 Section 15050 15055 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION a. General : All tests shall be completed and all systems approved before the insulation is applied to equipment or piping. Apply all insulation in accordance with manufacturer ' s recommendations and the Standard of Insulation Application, in a neat and workmanlike manner . Insulation shall be applied over a clean, dry surface. Insulation shall be manufactured by Johns- Manville or Owens-Corning as specified. Insulation shall be manufactured specifically for the service specified. See Item. "Inserts & Sleeves" for requirements . All insulation, jackets and adhesive shall be fire retardant with composite meeting U.L. and NFP A 90A requirements. b. Piping: J-7 1 . All piping insulation shall have the side and end joints butted tightly, and the factory applied jacket pasted smoothly at longitudinal circumferential joints . All exposed ends shall be finished neatly with the jacket materials and mastic . 2 . Vapor barrier of glass cloth covering shall be continuous over insulated fittings . Unions shall be built up 1/2-inch beyond adjoining insulation for identification. All insulation with an integral vapor barrier shall have the joints and fittings covering sealed as recommended by the manufacturer . All other piping insulation shall have the ends sealed with glass cloth at the fittings. All piping insulation shall be the molded type , manufactured specifically for that purpose . Minimum density 3-pound. All jackets shall be factory attached. ` 3 . Domestic Cold Water Piping Above Grade : 1/2-inch thick glass fiber with vapor barrier. 4 . Domestic Hot Water Piping: 3/4-inch glass fiber with glass cloth jacket . 5 . Storm Water Piping: All horizontal lines where exposed and above grade and suspended ceilings shall be insulated with 1/2-inch thick glass fiber with vapor barrier . C . Fittings : All fittings, unions and valve bodies insulated, except unions not insulated in domestic hot water piping. d. Ductwork: Internally lined where shown or specified. `rr Prr t Page 11 Section 15050 6W15056 ELECTRICAL WORK a. General : All equipment and installed work shall be as specified under section, "Electrical Work" . b. Motors shall be of voltage and phase shown on electrical drawings and furnished as integral part of driven equipment . NEMA Standards for the service intended . The name of the manufacturer shall be listed on the Shop Drawings. The motors shall be guaranteed for the voltage specified , suitable for operation within the range of 109 above to 109 below the specified voltage. C . Starters shall be furnished hereunder and shall be suitable low for performing the control functions required. d. All interconnecting wiring within or on a piece of r. mechanical equipment shall be provided with the equipment unless shown otherwise . This does not include the power wiring to motors , starters, and controllers specified and included under section, "Electrical Work" . r,. e . All control wiring for mechanical equipment shall be furnished under section, Controls. 6W 15057 MISCELLANEOUS a. Operating & Maintenance Instructions: Furnish three copies of manufacturers instruction manuals and parts lists of all equipment to the Owner. Literature shall be on 8-112 x 11 ,. sheets or catalogs , indexed and bound in three-ring plastic covered binders with a suitable tab index. b. Inserts & Sleeves: Lay out work in advance of pouring of slabs or construction of wall , and set inserts and sleeves necessary to complete this work. The cost of cutting or patching made necessary as a result of this operation shall be borne by this Contractor . C . Pipe Sleeves : 1 . Floor on grade sleeves shall be cast-iron with top f- inch above floor, caulked and made watertight . 60 15-1 ! Page 12 r Section 15050 d. Equipment Protection: 1 . Keep all pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of foreign matter . Protect all piping, ductwork, equipment and apparatus against dirty water , chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixture , equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 2 . Protect all bright finished shafts, bearing housings, and similar items, until in service ; no rust will be permitted. 3 . Equipment and materials stored on the job site shall be covered or otherwise suitably protected at the direction of , and to the satisfaction of the Architect . If coverings become torn they shall be replaced until the equipment is connected and operating. e. Machinery Guards : Provide guards with shaft holes for easy use of tachometers for all moving machinery such as pulleys, belts and shafts. Guards shall be adequately framed to provide a sturdy installation. Adequate clearance shall be maintained from moving parts. f . Cleaning: 1 . All mechanical and plumbing equipment , fixtures, piping and ductwork shall be cleaned of stampings and markings, iron cuttings and other refuse . 2 . Water systems shall be flushed clean. 3 . Air and Gas systems shall be blown clean. 4 . Painted surfaces which have been scratched or marred shall be cleaned of rust or other foreign matter and painted with matching color industrial enamel , except as noted otherwise. 15-i2 frr Page 13 Section 15050 g. Painting: i 1 . Specified under another Section, except as noted. j „ 2 . All damage to structural steel finishes or the finishes of any other trades damaged by cutting, welding or patching shall be repaired to match original . Materials and work as specified in Section "Painting" . h. Tests : 1 . Test all piping systems as herein specified. 2 . Soil , Waste, and Vent : Close all openings in piping, except the high test opening filling systems with water to the point of overflow. Keep water in system at least forty-five (45 ) minutes before inspection starts . The system must be tight at all joints. tr 3 . Water : Hydrostatic test at 150 psig for a minimum of six (6) hours without a drop in pressure . 4 . Gas : Test in accordance to the serving agency ' s requirements. 5 . Air : Pneumatic test pressure of not less than 1-1/2 times the operating pressure but not less than 50 psi for a minimum of two ( 2 ) hours without drop in pressure. 6 . Lubricant : Pneumatic test pressure of not less than 1-1/2 times the operating pressure, but not less than 50 psi for a minimum of two ( 2 ) hours without drop in pressure . i . Concrete : 1 . Furnish all concrete required hereunder , including hold-down pads etc . , as shown on the Drawings . iw. 2 . Concrete shall be ready mix type with 3/4-inch minus aggregate and strength of 3000 psi minimum. Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615-68 , Grade 40 , and as shown on the Drawings . 3 . Refer to Section 331-02 for concrete, aggregate, and mixes and 331-03 for excavation. iW 4 . Refer to Section 0140 , Quality Control . iw i5-i3 Page 14 SECTION 15200 - WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 15201 GENERAL a. Provide all labor and material required to provide complete domestic water systems hereafter specified and shown on the drawings . Sections 15010 and 15050 apply to the work under this Section. 15202 WATER SUPPPLY PIPING a. General : The Owner will provide the water service from. Owner furnished meter as shown on the drawings. b. Chlorination: Upon completion of all tests and necessary replacements, all domestic water piping shall be disinfected by thoroughly flushing the system with water to remove sediment , the system shall be filled with a solution containing 50 parts per million of chlorine . After four (4 ) hours retention, the system shall be drained, reflushed and returned to service. 15203 DOMESTIC SYSTEM a. General : Provide water heaters, piping systems, specialties, etc . as shown and specified. b. Electric Water Heater : Provide National , A . 0 . Smith, Republic or approved equal complete with glass lined storage tank , controls and limit thermostats , magnesium anodes, code approved temperature and pressure relief valve and tank insulated with 2-inch thick glass fiber enclosed with steel jacket . C. Gas Water Heater : Provide National , A. 0 . Smith, Republic or approved equal AGA certified gas water heater with glass lined tank for 100 psi working pressure, automatic gas shutoff device , 100 percent safety shutoff , high temperature limit control , adjustable operating thermostat , baffled internal flue, magnesium anode , and draft diverter. Set to maintain 140 degrees F. d. Water Heater Installation: Each with relief valve , drip pan and drain, as required by state code . If required, gas water heaters with gas pressure reducing valve as specified hereinbefore to reduce the pressure from 2 psi to the required inlet pressure . 15-14 r. Yr. Page 15 SECTION 15300 - SOIL, WASTE AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 6W 15301 GENERAL a. Provide all labor and materials required to provide complete drainage systems hereafter specified and shown on the drawings. Sections 15010 and 15050 apply to the work under this Section. 15302 PIPING a. Sanitary Sewer: Connect the sanitary sewer to the 8-inch stub where shown, verifying the point of connection. b. Storm Sewer : Connect to 12-inch stub at catch basin shown on the drawing. 15303 TRAPS Provide traps on all fixtures connected to the waste systems except for fixtures having integral traps and arranged so that the discharge from any fixture will not pass through more than one trap . All traps shall have a seal of not less than 2-inches nor more than 4-inches. a. Exposed Traps: Exposed traps for fixtures shall be chromium plated cast brass or 17 gage chromium plated brass tubing as specified. b. Cast Iron Traps : Traps installed in connection with cast iron pipe shall be of the same quality and grade as the pipe . C . Trap Primers: Floor drain traps shall be primed from the nearest water closet or by E & S Valve or J.M. J. , mechanical priming valve as required by Code . 15304 FLASHINGS Provide flashings and counter-flashings on all vents through roof constructed of four pound sheet lead with couplings or slip- nuts on top of counter-flashings 2-1/2 inches and smaller . All roof drains shall be furnished with a 2-foot square , four pound lead flashing clamped to drain. 15-�5 Page 16 Section 15300 15305 CLEANOUTS a. General : Provide Josam , Zurn , Wade or Jay R . Smith cleanouts where shown on the drawings, and required by Code of the same size as the main with a maximum size of four-inches. Josam, numbers are used as a basis of selection unless otherwise noted. b. Types: 1 . Floor Cleanouts ( FCO) : Series 8330 round top floor cleanout with nickle-bronze head. 2 . Wall Cleanout (WCO) : Series 8890 round stainless steel access cover plate secured to plug by countersunk screw. Jnl 3 . Unfinished Areas (CO) : Series 8560 with cast iron body and bronze plug. J-11- 153206 FLOOR DRAINS (FD-1 ) 31 a. Provide Josam, Zurn, Wade or Jay R. Smith floor drains of the sizes shown and types herein specified. Drains will be inside caulked or threaded outlets as required. Josam numbers are used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted . Similar to Josam series 300 A with 8-inch polished nickel-bronze . Note: Special grilled floor drain for six furnaces in mechanical room. 15307 CATCH BASIN (CB) 24 x 24 inch , 1/8 inch welded steel , 36 inch deep basin with heavy duty cast iron or steel bar grate and outlet . City of Tigard Code. Flow line of outlet 12 inches below top with 6 inch water seal . Asphaltum coated inside and out . Outlet size of connected piping. Installed top flush with grade . 15-Ito Page 17 Section 15300 15308 MANHOLES (MH) Manhole shall be 48-inches diameter I . D . reinforced precast sectional type with tapered cone top complete with steel steps. Joints of sections shall be sealed with 1 : 2 sand-cement mortar. Units shall be of depth required. Provide a poured-in-place concrete slab at bottom at least 8-inches thick of 2000 psi concrete . Form channels for flow using half sections of the or concrete pipe and forming of cement to give smooth flow. Pitch slab sides into channels at one-inch per fast grade. Provide an Industrial Iron "Suburban" style traffic pattern manhole ring irr and cover with "SS" case in cover , or Olympic Foundry medium traffic pattern. IW. 15309 DOWNSPOUT CONNECTION (DS) 4-inch cast iron hub extended 6-inches above grade to 5 ft . beyond building line . it w Page-18 Section 15440 - SPECIAL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES 15441 GENERAL Provide all equipment and appurtenances required to provide 3 complete systems for the equipment hereinafter specified and shown on the drawings All equipment in this section to be from one supplier so as to simplify installation and warranty procedures. 15442 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS (BY OWNER) 15443 AIR COMPRESSOR Provide a Saylor-Beall Model VT-PL735-80, pressure lubricated, 5 H.P. , 208 volt 3 phase, two stage air compressor . Unit to be factory mounted on a 80 gallon vertical tank with, automatic tank drain ,totally enclosed belt guard, and magnetic starter with thermal overload protection. Pump crankcase, cylinder body, cylinder head and inter cooler to be constructed of heavy duty cast-iron for maximum strength and service. Pump to have centrifugal unloader for no-load starting, two oversized tapered roller bearings for lower friction and extended crankshaft life, and replaceable needle bearings for longer rod wear . The valves to be of the disc-type and easily removed from the top of the cylinder head. Two stage pump to deliver 17.3 CFM at 175 lbs. with 23 CFM displacement and at a maximum 845 R.P .M. The oil pressure pump to be equipped with dial type pressure guage and to be mounted next to sight type oil level indicator . The complete unit to be American made and have a shipping weight of approx 760 pounds. 15444 CAR-TRUCK HOIST a. General: Provide a Western Model AC88E two post- adjustable cylinder lift with a capacity of 19, 500 lbs . 9,750 on the front cylinder and 9,750 on the rear . Use two 8 5/8" pistons with a stroke of 67 . 5 inches on the front and 72.5 on the rear piston. Wheel base adjustment to be at least 84 inches . b. Accessories : Provide a Western PRM-95 Electric-Oil Pumping unit mounted on a 95 gallon reservoir with 3 phase 208 volt 7 . 5HP electric motor . Provide Double diaphragm pump to go into sump in movable cylinder pit, Graco Model 220-618 with inlet strainer . Fluid outlet hose 3/4" x 5' & ball valve plumbed to drain and air inlet hose 1/4" x 5' and ball valve plumbed to air supply for sump pump. Provide float type switch to turn on air to sump pump. 15-�6 il Page-19 C. Installation: Contractor to have five years experience installing inground vehicle lifts . Install pumping unit and fill with 50 gallons of oil . Mount air pressure regulator and gauge for sump pump air supply near lift pumping unit use Graco 202-156 3/8" regulator and label its function. + Install controls for lift in floor and complete installation according to manufactures instructions . Demonstrate operation of lift and sump pump to owners satisfaction. 15445 VEHICLE SERVICE EQUIPMENT a . General : Provide all service equipment as herein specified with all necessary appurtenances to provide a complete usable facility and demonstrate that the equipment is functioning to the owners satisfaction. Equipment to be few covered by factories standard 30 year warranty on pumps and one year on reels . Equipment supplier to have proven its service to the owner over the last five years, such as 1 6M Mascott Equipment Co. 282-2587 in Portland, Oregon. b. Service Reels: 1. Provide three motor oil reels, Graco model 218-474 with 1/2"x50ft . 1800 psi . hose and Graco 203-444 meter/control valve with inlet swivel . Install with 1/2"x 24" inlet hose 1800 psi . 2 . Provide one grease reel, Graco model 218-467 with 1/4"x50 ' of 5000 psi . grease hose and 218-539 with inlet swivel and 1/8"x16" 8,000 psi whip hose and coupler 3 . Provide one water reel, Graco model 218-484 with 3/8"x60 ' of 250 psi water hose and Fowler-Pem 300 4 . Provide one air reel, Graco model 218-480 with 3/8"x60 ' of air hose( 250psi ) and Fowler-Pem 201-T. 5. Provide six Graco 218-551 and one Graco 218-552 and two Graco 218-681 and one Graco 180-689 service label kit. 6W C. Air Power Pumps: 1. Oil Pumps : Provide three of each, Graco model 225-852, r. 5-1 Fire-Ball wall mount pump with, 3/8"x18" air hose and 1/2"x18" fluid hose, 213-099 suction hose kits, 203-987 wall mount brackets and 203-688 Low-Level Cutoff valves . 2. Grease Pump: Provide one Graco 225-973 Topper pump system for 120 lb. drum, with elevator, base, inductor plate 41air hose and 41fluid hose . d . Oil Drain: Provide Graco 225-272 portable waste oil receiver and Graco 156-789 drain adapter to be mounted in 2" oil drain pipe to be plumbed to inground waste oil tank . 15-19 Page-20a 3F. e. Installation: 1. Install according to Manufactures recommended practices . Provide and install 1/2" ball valves on air line to each pump and one Graco 202-156 air regulator and gauge for each pump. Provide 1/2" full port 1000 psi ball valves on oil fluid lines, and Graco 215-362 "Runaway valves" ( 4) to go in air lines to shut off air supply in case of hose failure. Provide and install in main air line after air compressor one Graco 217-072 Filter, regulator, and lubricator . Provide air quick couplers on air supply lines to pumps 2. Use 1/2" galvanized pipe for air supply lines and 5/8" annealed steel tubing with .083 wall thickness on the oil and grease fluid lines. For turns in the fluid lines use smooth sweeping bends, no ninety degree elbows . Use high pressure compression tube fitting on fluid lines . On air supply lines to pumps and hose reel use a "T" and take the air off of the top of the pipe so as to leave water in the line and away from pumps and tools . Install a drip leg in air line with ball valve near pumps and at location where air tools are used so as to collect water and remove it " from air line. 15445 Vehicle Exhaust System a. General: Provide all equipment and install so as to furnish a complete exhaust system for two bays of shop. b. Provide two Harvey OF-PS-40 high temperature resistant polyethylene floor fittings with 8 ' of 4" hose and tail pipe adapter (HF-350) . Provide 8" schedule 80 P.V.C. pipe to connect the two bays and "t" fitting to connect the piping to the blower . Supply blower Model BD-9 , lj HP, 208/30, belt driven blower, weights approximately 100 lbs . . c. Install blower on shelf between the two garage doors and mount unit as close to ceiling as practical . Use high pressure metal duct from floor level to blower eight inch or larger . (blower inlet 1211 ) and exhaust to outside of building. Insure that the platform is of adequate strength to support the weight of the blower safely. d. All equipment to be installed in compliance with state and local building codes and federal regulations . 15-20 Page 20 SECTION 15460 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM Y. 15461 GENERAL Provide all labor and materials required to provide the fixtures and trim hereinafter specified and shown on the drawings . Sections 15010 and 15050 apply to the work under this Section. 15462 PLUMBING FIXTURES w. a. Provide new plumbing fixtures of the type herein specified and of the quantity shown. rw 1 . Fixtures: Complete with fittings, supports, fastening devices, faucets, valves, traps and appurtenances required. 2 . Exposed IPS Piping and Tubing: Red brass , chrome plated. 3 . Escutcheons: Brass, Chrome plated. 4. Fixtures Set and Connected: To soil, waste, vent and water supplies in neat, finished and uniform manner . 5. Connections : Equal heights, plumb and set at right angles to floor , wall or both unless otherwise required or specified. b. Manufacturers: 1 . China or Cast Iron Fixtures: American-Standard, Crane, or Kohler . American-Standard numbers used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted. (Owner to select color) 2 . Electric Water Coolers : Sunroc or Elkay. 3 . Fixture Trim : American-Standard, Crane , Chicago Faucet , or Kohler . American-Standard numbers used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted. 4 . Single Handle Supply Fittings: Moen or Delta, Delta used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted. 5 . Shower : See Section 10810-02 15-21 Page 21 Section 15460 6 . Flush Valves: Sloan "Royal" . Sloan numbers used as basis for selection unless otherwise noted. 7. Washer Valve Box (W) : Tap-N-Drain or Guy Gray Mfg. Co. Tap-N-Drain Mfg. Co. used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted. 8 . Supplies and stops: Chromium plated angle stops and flexible supply pipes. 9. Toilet Seats: Church or Bemis. Church numbers used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted. c. Fixture Schedule: (Colors to be selected by owner) . 1. Water Closet (WC-1) : Kohler K-4250 ET floor mounted vitreous china, elongated bowl with 110 - 3 flush valve and 5321.112 white open front seat. (10 total) . %t 2. Water Closet (WC-2) : Kohler K-4268 ET floor mounted vitreous china, elongated bowl with 110 - 3 flush valve and 5321. 112 white open fron seat. (2 total for handicapped) . 3. Urinal (U-1) : Stallbrook vitreous china stall urinal with 186 flush valve. (5 total) . 4. Lavatory (L-1) : Kohler K-2894 self-rimming lavatory with supplies and stops, chromium plated trap and Delta Model 500 supply fitting. (3 total) . 5. Lavatory (L-2) : Same as L-1 except supplies and trap insulated for handicap service. (4 total) . 6. Lavatory (L-3) : Kohler K-2861 cast-iron wall hung lavatory with supplies and stops, chromium plated trap and Delta Model 500 supply fitting. (1 total) . 7 . Sink (S-1) : Kohler K-5943 self rimming, cast-iron sink with supplies and stops, chromium plated trap, chromium plated crumb cup strainer and Delta Model 2276 with oak (2 total) . 8. Sink (S-2) : Bradley Washfountain: Bradley Corp. , 54" semi-circular, 3 GPM, foot-operated, AFC White Marmorite, precast, Terazzo bowl material, all standard equipment with trap Type CFC (supplies and vent through wall or floor, 1" supply line, 2" IPT waste) , powdered soap dispenser. (1 total) . 15-22 w. imp Page 22 Section 15460 w 9. Utility Tub (UT-1) : Similar and equal to Williams Utilatub No. 12 with steel legs, stopper, P-trap, supply pipe and stops, and ledge mounted supply fitting. Delta mixing valve with Delta Mode 3579 HDF, chrome. (2 total) . 10. Shower (SH-1) : 2-inch chromium plated drain and Moen shower valve Model 3150, chrome, pressure-balanced. H.A.F. (Head, Arm and Flange) Model 3925. (2 total) . 11. Electric Water Cooler (DF-1) : Sunroc NFR-8 or Elkay EFRC-8 in bronzetone, refrigerated, fully recessed. (2 total) . 12. Electric Water Cooler (DF-2) : Sunroc HCWC-8 or Elkay EHFS-8 in bronzetone, refrigerated, wall hung. (1 total) . 13 . Hot Water Dispenser (IH) : U.L. labeled, In-Sink- Erator GN-B, 1/2 gallon tank to heat 60 cups per hour or water from 100 degrees F. to 200 degrees F. and with 10-inch spout. (2 total) . �r 14. Washer Box (W) : Model 8253 . 015 with hose and angle valves and 2-inch slip joint outlet. (1 total) . 15. Garbage Disposer: In-Sink-Erator stainless steel Classic, automatic reversing shield, 1 HP capacitor start motor. 15463 HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS (2 total) . 1. Wall hydrant (WH) : Key operated brass non-freeze type Yw with nickel bronze face plate and hose end. Valve removable for repairs from outside. Length as required. Galvanized wall sleeve and lock nuts. 3/4-inch hose end unless shown otherwise. 2. Mixing Valve (WDF) : Service sink faucet, American Standard 8340. 234 . (1 total) . (Hose-off booth) . 3. Hose Bibb (HB-1) : 3/4-inch hose end with non-flanged female inlet, loose-key handle and vacuum breaker. (As shown) . 4. Hose Bibb (HB-2) : Similar and equal to American Stan- dard 8341. 075 faucet with integral stops and vacuum breaker. (As shown) . aw Page 23 SECTION 15800 - AIR CONDITIONING 15801 GENERAL a. Provide all labor and materials required to provide complete heating , ventilating and air conditioning system hereafter specified and shown on the drawings. Sections 15010 and 15050 apply to the work under this Section. b. Erect all ductwork in a first class and workmanlike manner, true to inside dimensions indicated, straight and smooth on inside with neatly finished joints lapped in the direction of air travel . Properly brace and reinforce all ducts with steel angles or other members. Fabricate all changes in direction, both horizontal and vertical , to permit easiest air flow, using full radius bends, centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times width, or fixed turning vanes in square elbows. C . The slopes in the sides of transition pieces shall be approximately 1 to 4 . No abrupt changes or offsets of any kind in the duct system will be permitted. Rectangular ductwork is to be free from "oilcanning" effect . d. Duct Hangers and Supports : Hang ducts under 20-inches diameter or maximum side dimension with galvanized strips of No. 16 U . S . S . gage steel 1-inch wide and all larger ducts with steel angles and adjustable hanger rods similar to piping hanger . Support fiber glass ductwork as recommended by manufacturer . t 15802 DAMPERS a. Volume Dampers: Volume dampers shall be provided in supply and return ducts where shown or specified and constructed of galvanized sheets not lighter than 18 gage, reinforced to prevent vibration, equipped at both ends with brass bearing mounts, and of sufficient length to provide a complete shut-off of the duct . 3tr 15-24 Page 24 Section 15800 15803 DUCTWORK rr a. Glass Fiber Ductwork : Nominal 1-inch thick rigid glass fiber with U. L. label for Class I air ducts, an NRC of 0 . 75 for a r No . 6 mounting, a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not over 50 . With integral smooth aluminum foil vapor barrier exterior finish. The taping system shall meet U.L. 181 criteria and shall be rated as Class I materials. With a maximum air friction correction factor of 1 . 3 at 1000 fmp . Fittings may be fabricated of sound attenuated sheet metal . b. Sound Attenuated Ducts : U.L. labeled 1-inch thick moisture resistant , fire resistant , coated 1-1/2 pound density, glass or mineral wool sound absorbing duct liner . With a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not over 50 . Liner adhesives and mechanical fasteners to conform to latest SMACNA duct liner manual . Installed in sheet metal duct specified below. Dimensions of duct shown are net inside of the liner . C . Sheet Metal Ductwork : Of galvanized steel with gages, 1w transverse joints, spacing of joints and intermediate bracing as shown for low pressure ducts in the latest ASHRAE Guide and Data Book . Panels 12-inch and larger cross broken unless standing W seams are used and are spaced less than 36 inches . d. Application: 1 . Sound attenuated: Where shown or specified. 2 . Glass Fiber : All supply and return ductwork unles W shown sound attenuated. 3 . Sheetmetal : All exhaust ductwork unless shown sound attenuated. e . Installation: Anchor all ducts securely to building in such a manner to prevent transmission of vibration to the structure . sw 15.25 ;g Page 25 Section 15800 r 15804 AIR DIFFUSERS , REGISTERS AND GRILLES a. General : Provide registers , grilles and diffusers as manufactured by Barber-Colman, Anemostat , Titus, Tuttle & Bailey r used as a basis of selection or approved equal . Kruege Alternate manufacturers must be resized as necessary for NC 35 and 100 feet per minute terminal velocity. Use maximum shell size . b. Finish : Furnish all outlets with manufacturer ' s standard baked white enamel finish. C . Gasket : Install all sidewall grilles with a sponge rubber gasket on frame perimeter, to prevent air leakage and smudging. d. Types: 1 . Supply Grilles in T-Bar Ceiling: Type PBTD perforated face of neck size shown with 24" x 24" nominal panel size for lay-in installation on inverted tee-bar with deflectrols. 2 . Supply Grilles in Solid Ceilings: Type PBSD perforated face with deflectrol . 3 . Return and Exhaust Air Grilles in T-Bar Ceiling: Type PET perforated face with 24" x 24" nominal panel size for lay-in installation on inverted tee-bar where indicated. 4 . Return and Exhaust Air Grilles in Solid Ceilings: Type PES perforated face with deflectrol . 15805 FURNACES a. Description: Lennox Series G-14 Up Flow pulse gas furnaces with Series HS 14, 2-speed, condensing units and matching coil sections. 1. Furnace: Up Flow 93 percent AFUE pulse combustion with direct drive blower and filter, complete with factory supplied mufflers and vent termination kits. Install per manu- facturer' s instructions. 2. Condensing Unit and Coil Section: Matched air cooled hermatic, 2-speed, condensing unit and A-frame cooling coil.-- Refrigerant piping field fabricated. Install per manufacturer' s installation instructions. �5-Z� ri lfiw Page 26 Section 15800 b. Control: 1. Room thermostat: Honeywell T-7300 programmable system to provide individual seven day programming of occupied and/or r„ unoccupied periods, 3-hour override, automatic change over and switching sub-base. Note: Parallel thermostats for F-3 & F-8 (conference room and general office) . 2. Operation: Fan to operate continuously in occupied mode, cooling and heating to cycle as required. rr 15806 UNIT HEATER W a. Description: Lennox GSR14 Series, AGA approved gas fired, horizontal type with heat exchanger, pulse combustion. b. Control: 100 percent safety shutoff, high limit control, and if required, gas regulator. Thermostat: Honeywell heating only, night setback model with switching sub-base for each unit. c. Manufacturer: Lennox. 15807 RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM a. General : Furnish and install Infrared Radiant Vacuum Gas 41rr Heating System, similar and equal to Co-Ray-Vac . b. Burners (BU ) : Firing units consisting of an integral burner-control device installed in a factory-furnished combustion chamber , natural gas output rating of approximately 75 , 000 BTU/hr. Units shall be certified by the American Gas Association under American National Standards for vented infrared heaters. Err C . Radiant Pipe (piping between burners and 201 - 0" downstream of burners) : 4" O.D. x 0.065" wall C1010 cold rolled electric w weld steel tubing. d. Accessories and Installation: Strictly in accordance with the manufacturer ' s instructions. iW 15808 INFRARED HEATER err 1000 BTUH, gas fired, vent and gas supply as required. r. 15-2-7 a Page 27 Section 15800 15809 CEILING EXHAUST FAN (CEF) a. Description : Direct driven , double width, double inlet centrifugal fan with forward curved blades and motor and fan isolated from cabinet . Cabinet with removable bottom grille inlet , side outlet , back draft damper and sound attenuation. Maximum of 1100 rpm. b. Control : To operate by room light switch. C. Manufacturer : Pace DD, Penn, ILG, Broan. 15810 ROOF EXHAUST FANS a. Description : Belt driven, centrifugal fan with aluminum wheel , aluminum housing, motor outside of airstream, back draft damper and aluminum screen. b . Manufacturer : Jenn-Air BCR ; similar and equal Carnes, Penn, Cook, Greenheck, PACE, Acme , Exitaire , Powerline. C . Installation : Installed on pre-fabricated curb. Curbs constructed with the top horizontal and compatible with the type of roof where installed . Curb flashed and counterflashed to roof . Fan base flashed to curb. Note: Install all air exhaust vents on west roof of administra- tion building and wouth roof of maintenance building. (No exposure to Hall Boulevard or railroad tracks) . } P (7•�S Page 28 LENNOX EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE F-1 1 - G14Q4-60 Up-Flo Pulse Gas Furnace 93/; AFUE 120/1 1 - LB-52057CA Muffler Kit 1 - LB-49107 Vent Termination Kit 1 - C14-41FF Up-Flo Evaporator Coil 1 - C16-4141-00 Coil Cabinet 1 - LB-53031CB Expansion Valve 1 - T7300 Programmable Thermostat With Q73001018 Switching Subbase 1 - HS14-513 4 Ton 2 Speed Condensing Unit 12.55 SEER 203/ 30, MCA 20. 6 Maximum 35 amp fuse or circuit breaker `o F-2 1 - G14Q3-50 Up-Flo Pulse Gas Furnace 93% p.FUE 120/1 1 - LB-52057CA Dluffler Kit 1 - LB-49107CD Vent Termination Kit 1 - C14-41FF Up-Flo Evaporator Coil 1 - 1116-41W-00 Coil Cabinet 1 - LB-53081CA Expansion Valve 1 - T300 Programmable Thermostat with Q73001018 Switching Subbase 1 - HS14-413 3 Ton 2 Speed Condensing Unit w 13.3 SEEP. 208/ 3,0, MCA 14 . 6 Maximum 25 amp fuse or circuit breaker F-3 1 - G14Q5-80 Up-Flo Pulse Gas Furnace 93% AFUE 120/1 1 - LB-52057CA Muffler Kit 1 - LB-49107CD Vent Termination Kit 1 - C14-65 Up-Flo Evaporator Coil 1 - C16-65-00 Coil Cabinet 1 - LB530FlCC Expansion Valve rrr 1 - '77300 Progrnmmable Thermostat with Q73301013 Switching Subbase 1 - HS14-553 5 Ton 2 Speed Condensing Unit 11 .75 SEER 203/3,0, MCA 23.2 Maximum 40 amp fuse or circuit breaker F-4 1 - G14Q3-40 Up-Flo Pulse Furnace 97% AFUE 120/1 1 - LB-52057CA :'tufflor Kit imp 1 - LB49107CD Vent Termination Kit 1 - C14-41FF Up-Flo Evaporator Coil 1 - C15-41W-00 Coil Cabinet 1 - LE-53031CA Expnnsion Vnlve 1 - T7300 Programmable Thermostat with Q73001013' Switching Subbase 1 - HS14-413 3 ton 2 speed Condensing Unit 13.3 SEER 20S/30, MCA 14. 6 Maximum 25 amp fuse or circuit breaker c_e n Page 29 F-5 S:1 IE as F-1 F-5 SAIL: as F-3 F-7 SANE as F-1 w/prefab. 36" x 36" cladlite pad U11-1 1 - GSR14Q3-E0 Horizontal Pulse Gas Furnace 92.4% AFUE 120/1 1 - L3-52057CA Muffler Kit ( 5 Required) 1 - LB-49 Vent Termination Kit 1 - LB56495CA Horizontnl Support Frame Kit (Does Not Include Suspending Rods) 1 - T30r5A "eight Setbac; Thermostat With Fan Switching Subbase 15 amp. k =�x IS-30 Yr iw %W FIRE PROTECTION 15900 GeneAat A. DescA-ipt.ion 1 . Funn-i-sh aU taboA and mateh.ia,Es and penbonm ,such otheA services nece-ssaAy and Aeasonabty .inc.iden-tat to .the design and .in-stattat.ion ob an automatic spA.inkteA .system boA att aAeas indicated on ,the dnaw-ings and as Aequiked by the Tuatatin FiAe MaAshaLs Obb.ice. B. Retated Documents 1. The Aequ.iAement.s ob att other Sections ob these Pehbonmance Spec-ib-ications -shatt appty to the wank .spec.i6 ied .in thi.s section. C. ContAactoA Quae.ib.icat.ion.s AW 1 . ContAactoA bon the b.iAe pAotection <nstattation 6hatt be Aegutanty engaged in the tnstattat�on ob automatic b.iAe spA.inkte t systems and and emptoy woAkmen expeA-ienced and sk.itted .in this thade. D. Design RequiAement-s ' 1. TheA.ink&A iAe :s b � p piping shatt be sized .in accordance with N.F.P.A. StandaAds Pamphtet No. 13 oA be hydrauticatty designed in accordance with ChapteA 7 ob AebeAenced .standand. ?. Design, tayout and -instatt a ct4y pipe system ut.i&z-ing code approved automatic devices designed paht.icutahty boA u,se to this type ob sy-stem, -inctud�ng an automatic aiA pAes-sone maintenance device. A. A-iA ,suppty by Tigand platen D�stA ict E. F.iAe SpA-inkteA CoveAage 1 . As Aequ-iAed by the Tuata.tin F.iAe Man,shat and Jinctud-ing bine pAotection ob aet aheas expec. atty the bottow.ing: A. Obb.ice OpeAat.ions Bu.itd.ing _ B. F.ietd Openat.ions Bu,itd-ing bw *r. 15-31 Fine Pno-teetion 15900 2 F. Manutiactunens 1 . Att spn-inkten spec iatty maten�at; Gn.innett, Gem, Stan, Viking on equal, with UL appnovae bon u-se .in automatic -spAinkteA sy-stems. G. Subm-ittats 1 . Pnepane ti.ine pnoteet.ion -sy-stem wonk.ing dnawing-s showing tocation.s and types, heads on outtets, dry vaeve and dev-iee-s, pipe size-s �. and cutting tengths, test tees and vatves, drain vatves, and other netated .items. ?. Pnov.ide 3 segs ob dnaw.ings showing spn.Enkten head toeat.ions and Layout coond.inated with anchitectunat ceit.ing deta.its to the T.igand water D-istn.iet tion tev.iem pn.ion to submitting detaits to to the Tuatatin Fine Manshats Obti.iee bon appnovaP. 3. Spn.inkten eontnacton to -submit no tess than three sets ob ptan-s to Tuatatin Fixe Mah,shat bon appnovat pn.ion to spAinkteA <n.staffation. 4. One set oti approved ptans bean.ing the stamp ob the T-igand Buitding Department and the Tua eatin Fine Man shat s 06bice must be maintained on the pro j'ect site throughout a t phases ob eonstnuet.ion and must be made ava.itabte to bu.itding and bine .inspectots bon nebehence duA ing nequ,ined eonstnuet.ion ,i"peet.io". H. Penm.it.s 1 . Spn-inketn contnacton is nesponzibte bon any permits bon the -instaetat.ion on construction ob any oti the work inctuded .in this section, which ane tequ.ined tion appnovat and .in stattat-ion ob the bane pnoteett on -sy-stem. 1. Authon.it.ie-s and Agencies 1 . Att work under the section -shatt be .instatted .in accordance with tocat, state and other appticabte ond.inances and satiety ondens. ?. The tiottowing authon,it.ie-s -shatt have 1un-i-sd�ct.ion: A. Tuaeat-in Fine Manshats Otib-iee B. T-igand Bu.itd�ng Department C. T.igand waters Distn-iet �5-31 r. Yew Pine Pnotect-ion 15900 3 Products rw A. Mate, -iats and Equipment 1 . Att mqXA.iats, equipment, vaive.s, and devices -insta ted and/on 6unn.i shed under this section -shah be ti sted and/on approved bon use in a rine pnoteet�on ,in,stattat.ion. ++ ?. Spn-inkteh Heads: Approved heads bon dry pipe systems with tempenatuhe nat-ing.s bon ,seAv-ice tequ-iAed. A. Un6 iwished Areas: Rough brass upn-ight heads B. Finished Axeas: Chrome ptated semi-Aecessed head with ehAome C 60 escutcheon 3. Pnov-ide metal box containing .spoAe -spt inkteA head's and mount neOA the main vaeve; box to contain a minimum of -s-ix spo-Ae heads with +W not .des-s than two o6 each type used. 4. Escutcheon-s: Pnov-ide potiished ehhome escutcheons on pipe extending thhough watts and ee�ting-5. 5. Valve Mon.iton-ing Switches: Pnov.ide and .imsta t etectn.ic tamper iaw switches and pne.s-supe sw.itche.s on eontnot vatves and dry pipe vaeve Located .in the mechan.icae xoom o6 the 066 ice Openat-ion s 8witd.ing. wining by etectx.icat contnacton. 6. Above-gxound water Piping: Use standard weight btaek steet pipe and cast -iron sc4ewed on meehan�cat 6.itt.ings expeeta ty adapted bon spn-ink&A woAk and su.itabte bon 175 pounds wonk-ing pnessune. Use neduc ng 6.itt� ng-s where changes in pipe size oceux. Bushings and .stip-on 6 itt.ings ane pnoh.ib-ited. At contnactons option, thin-watt -steel pipe ASTM A53-76, and meehan.icat 6-itt-ing.s speciJ.icatty appAoved Jon zpn-inkten wank, su.itabte bon minimum 175 pounds wonk-ing pAe,ssme may be substituted Jon the btaek steet pipe 6pecibied above. p. 15-3Z 4 Fixe Pnatection 15900 Products A. Matehiats and Equipment. Cont � 7. Undeh-ground Piping: Connect to water -supply ,source as shown on drawings. SpAinkter contractor to start at 5'-0" out 6rom buitding and in.statt ducttte anon pipe, Cta ss 52, to 1 '-0" above btoon imside mechanical room. x 8. Fane Depahtment Connection: Powhatan 21-201 "Y" type, Stngte clapper �siame�se. Branded: Auto-Spke UL, FM approved, po&,shed brass. Powhatan YY 24-209 hound escutcheon plate, 9j" diameteh Branded: Auto-Spkh, pott-shed bna,s.s. Powhatan 17-217 mage plug-s, 2P pin tug, poti-shed bra-s-s. 9. Baekbtow Preventon: Febeo 806 DCDA double check deteeton ".sembty with O.S.B Y. R(0 . Gate vaeve-s approved by UL and FM bon bane protection systems - ,specs� ed by Tigcvcd (voter D�t,st�cict tUo.ak o Uther Trades 6 1. Fteetrieat wiAing bon tamper and blowsw.itches on spAinkter system. 2. Etect scat wiAing bon atahm system. „ � Provide one 120v circuit". 3. Nee".wy atarm 6y,6tem by aParm company. 4: Smoke Detectors: (low voltage) . Install in accordance Tests with NFPA Standard 72A and 72E and supervised by an approved central station. A. All i"peettons, examinations, and tests requiAed by the authonitie!s and/ on agencies as -speciied, shat be arranged and paid bon by the bine protection contractor. B. Flushing 06 Under-Ground Mains: All under-ground main-s -supptying automatic spAinkteAs -shaet be blushed in accordance with N.F.P.A. 13 Section 1-11 and 1-11 .2. C. Hydrostatic rests: Automatic zpAinkter piping tnsta ted on the down- ztream zide ob baekitow pneventor or pre-s=suAi;fed by bare department connection 4hatt be teeted at not tens than 200 pounds bor not te�ss than Para. 3: 2 hours. Add: "Provide alarm panel in telephone/mechanical room; connect to smoke detectors". 15-33 ik. *•r S C. Hydnosat.ie Tests Cont A xephesentat-ive o6 ,the Tua.bat<n Fine Man.shats 066iee shaft witness the above nequined test. Twenty-�ou,a houh notis.ication shatt be given pn-ion to anticipated test times. Contact Inspector Bob Ray at .the bine maAshats 066.iee. w. D. Te-st Centt6-ieates : Contxactms MateA�ae and Test Ce.7t-i6 icate.s bon att automatic .spA inkteA ,sy.stem5, -inetuding undeh- gnound, shat be completed by ,the -instattat.ion 6W contAaeton, ,signed by pnopeAty owneh ox Us aepnesentat-ive and a copy o6 .said cent-i6 icate 6onwanded to the Tuatat-in Fine MaA,shaLs o66 ice bon permanent neeoAd. CVLt-i6.tate o6 Completion A. Obtain and de&ven to T. gand Wateh D-istn.iet a cehti6ieate, .in duptieate, stating that system, as .instatted, has been .inspected and accepted by authox.ities and/on agencies having juAisd.ict.ion, and that aft negutations a6jeet.ing work have been -sat.i.s5ded. Th.i.s ceAti6 ieate -i-s considered pant o6 .in.sta tat.ion and must be accepted by the T-igaAd wateA D,istxtet begone 6 inat payment is authon.ized. i Note: 1. Horizontal backflow devices will be installed for this installation. 2 . Any device installed after September 1, 1986 must have epoxy coated, resilient seated gate valves or fully ported ball valves. These valves are to be an integral part of the device assembly as sold by the local distributor. 3. All device assemblies larger than 2" shall have a 12- inch clearance on the backside, a 24-inch clearance on the test- cock side, and 12 inches below the device assemblies. Adequate clearance (3 inches minimum) must be maintained above O.S . & Y. gate-valve stem. 4 . Inlet and outlet O.S. & Y. valves on all lines. 5. Oregon State approved pproved double detector check valve on main line. 15-34 MOTOR CONTROLS SECTION 15920 15920-01 GENERAL A. Provide all motor starters for motorized equipment unless specifi- cally shown otherwise. Starter separately installed or grounded as indicated. B. Verify equipment for horsepower, voltage, phase and type of each starter required. 15920-02 PRODUCTS A. MOTOR STARTERS: ; 1. Enclosures: At interior locations NEMA 1, exterior locations NEMA 3 other locations proper for conditions encountered or of type noted. 2. Operating coils for magnetic starter to be of proper voltage for operation with controls. 3. Integral control voltage transformers with 120 volt secondary coils to be provided for magnetic starters as indicated. Capacity of control transformers to be sufficient to supply control circuit components without overheating. 4. Auxiliary contacts: Provide additional auxiliary contacts on magnetic starters as specified. Contacts arranged to be normally open or closed as required. 5. Labeling: a. Surface mounted starters to be provided with black phenolic engraved nameplates with 1/8" white letter indicating use. Nameplates permanently attached to front cover of starter. b. Flush mounted starters with stainless steel finish plates are to have finish plates engraved with 1/8" black letters indi- cating use. 6. Manufacturer: Allen Bradley, Square D, Cutler Hammer, Westinghouse, I.T.E. , G.E. or approved. 7 . All starters for project to be same manufacturer. 15920-03 EXECUTION Verify operating characteristics of each motor installed and adjust overloads as directed by Mechanical Contractor after equipment is in operation and system is balanced. It is this contractor's responsi- bility to coordinate starters to motors furnished under other divisions of the work. 15-35 Irr DIVISON 16-- ELECTRICAL INDEX 16010 General Provisions SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION 16020 Codes, Certificates, Tests 16411 Underground Service ` & Guarantees 16420 Entrance Equipment 16030 General Work 16450 Grounding fwr BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 16480 Feeder Circuits 16101 General Methods & Materials 16481 Branch Circuits 16110 Raceways & Fittings 16482 Equipment Connections 16111 Underfloor Electrical System 16112 Cord Reels LIGHTING 16120 Conductors 16510 Interior Lighting Fixtures 16130 Wiring Devices 16530 Exterior Lighting Fixtures 16134 Panelboards 16135 Relays, Contactors, Time SPECIAL SYSTEMS Switches & Photoelectric 16601 Dimmer System Switches 16190 Electrical Supporting Devices COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 16740 Clock System POWER GENERATION 16750 Telephone 16210 Standby Electrical System 16770 Cable System 16780 Radio System lMrr HEATING 16880 Electric Heating i. lr 6 i. 0 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010 16010-01 GENERAL A. The work to be performed under the contract documents includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to construct and install the complete electrical system as shown on the Electrical Contractors approved shop drawings and specified herein. Code requirements shall be considered a minimum guide for f , work. Where specifications require wiring or materials in excess of Code minimum, install work as called for in contract documents. B. The drawings indicate outlet and equipment locations only. All locations are to be verified with actual field conditions, and architectural, structural, plumbing, heating and ventilating plans to avert installation conflicts. Raceway connections between out- lets, outlets and panels and equipment panels, with raceways sized according to governing codes unless otherwise noted. No homeruns or branch circuits are to be combined. C. Electrical service to buildings to be 16010-02 EXAMINATION sized 25% over required capacity. OF SITE AND CONTRACT iW DOCUMENTS See General Conditions, Article 1.2.2 and 4.2. VhW 16010-03 SUBSTITU- TIONS too See Instructions to Bidders, Article 5. 16010-04 SHOP iw. DRAWINGS & MATERIAL LISTS In addition to the requirements of General Conditions, Article 4 . 13, w Shop Drawings and Samples, and Part 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures, submit shop drawings and material lsits covering all electrical materials as follows: " A. Assemble shop drawings and submittal data in hard cover loosele af ring binder. Provide cover with permanently attached typewritten or printed label with name of project, and heading reading o" "ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL DATA". B. Group information contained in submittals in sets containing one copy of data for each item. Organize data in sets in basic categories listed in index for Division 16. C. Provide submittal data with typewritten index having same sequence, numbering and wording as index for Division 16. In addition vide divider sheets between each section with identifying tabspro- having same designations as index. Organize material in each iW section in same order and indentify with same number and wording as paragraphs of specification section. 60 60 Jb-1 16010-04 D. Submit neat, clean copies of data, 8 1/2" x 11" size. Accordian fold required drawings to 8 1/2" x 11" size and include in submit- tal binder. E. Include only information on exact equipment installed; not complete "line" of manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. F. Diagrams for systems to be complete drawings for specific system installed. "Typical" line diagrams not acceptable unless properly marked to indicate exact system for this project. G. Submit all items for complete project at one time. H. Data not in conformity with above requirements will be returned for resubmittal. J. In lieu of requirements for the number of copies of shop drawings required in General Conditions Article 4 . 13, Shop Drawings and Samples, and Part 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures, submit 3 sets of shop drawings and submittal data for review and approval. One set of data will be returned stamped and marked approved, or with modifications, additions, or resubmittal. Where modifications, additions or resubmittals are required, submit 3 copies of revised data. One copy of corrected and approved data will be returned. Remaining copies of original submittal and revised data will be kept by Owner for his use. Make any addi- tional copies of approved, stamped and marked data required for execution of contract beyond the one returned marked copy. Note requirements of Article 4 . 13, Shop Drawings and Samples, require Electrical Contractor Subcontractor to mark his approval on shop drawings prior to submittal. r 16010-05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAINTEN- ANCE MANUAL A. Provide hard cover looseleaf bound maintenance manuals for servicing of all equipment installed. B. Group information contained in manuals into sets containing one copy of data for each item. Organize data in sets into basic categories listed in index for this Division. C. Provide data with typewritten index having same sequence, numbering and wording as index for this Division. In addition, provide divider sheets between each section with indentifying tabs having same designation as index. D. Incorporate in manuals neat, clean data copies, 8 1/2" x 11" size. Accordian fold drawings to 8 1/2" x 11" size and include in binder. ry; Ifo•Z 16010-05 E. Information included must be exact equipment installed, not complete "line" of manufacturer. Where sheets show equipment in- stalled as well as other equipment, identify installed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. F. Diagrams for each system to be complete drawings for specific system installed. "Typical" line diagrams not acceptable unless properly marked to indicate exact system for this project. G. Assemble completed manuals in hard cover looseleaf ring binders. Provide front covers with permanently attached typewritten or printed label indicating name of job, owner, architect, electrical engineer, electrical contractor, and year of completion. Label back edge with job, owner and year of completion. H. See 01725, Operating & Maintenance Data, for further requirements. 16010-06 RECORD DRAWINGS A. REPRODUCIBLE RECORD DRAWINGS: See Section 01700, Project Closeout. B. RECORD DRAWINGS: See Section 01720, Project Record Documents. CODES, CERTIFICATES, TESTS & GUARANTEES SECTION 16020 16020-01 CODES iW A. See General Conditions Article 10.2.2. B. Install work to conform with the National Electrical Code, National i1w Electrical Safety Code, and all rules and regulations of the local serving utility, National Board of Fire Underwriters and Uniform Building Code. All codes, rule and regulations to be the current or latest addition at the time of bidding. 16020-02 CERTIFI- CATES See Section 01700, Project Closeout. ww 16020-03 TESTS In addition to the requirements of General Conditions Article 7.8, test W all circuits, devices and equipment for shorts, continuity, safety, defects and proper operation. Provide all test instruments required. 16020-04 GUARANTEES In addition to the requirements of Section 01700, submit the following guarantee: Lamps to be guaranteed from date of acceptance thus: 6W Incandescent lamps 30 days; fluorescent, mercury, reflector and projector lamps, and 90 days; other lamps verify requirements. to. Ib-3 GENERAL WORK SECTION 16030 16030-01 EXCAVATION All work work to be performed per Section 02220, Excavating & Backfilling. 16030-02 BACKFILL Do all for own work but not before test and approval of lines t be buried. All work performed as specified under Section 02220. 16030-03 WATER CONTROL Do all work per Section 01563 , Water Control. 16030-04 CUTTING Do or arrange andpay for all required cutting of concrete, masonry, wood, structural framing, etc. Limitations: No cutting or channeling or underpinning or structural members permitted without prior permission of General 1Contractor and/or Architect. No serious weak- ening of structural parts permitted and any work impaired will be corrected by others and cost charges to this Contractor. 16030-05 PATCHING Where trenching is done through existing paving, walks, curbs, etc. , responsibility for patching and repair to original condition rests with this Contractor. Patch all openings in and through concrete and masonry wit drypack as per Section 03370, Drypack and Grout. In new work, patch and refinish all finish surfaces damaged by this Contractor to match adjacent work. Where patch is major in judgement of Architect, refinish entire surface where damage occurs "border to border" . 16030-06 FRAMING AND BLOCKING Rough and/or structural framing will be by General LContractor except that changes in work already installed caused by inadequate or inac- curate information furnished by electrical subcontractor will be responsibility of this subcontractor. Miscellaneous and minor blocking required for sole use of electrical work such as fastening and support of outlet boxes, fixtures, panels, conduit, etc. , will be by this subcontractor. 16030-07 PROTECTION Cap or plug all pipe openings during construction. Protect all completed work against dirt, water or chemical damage, mechanical accident or injury. Responsibility is entirely this subcontractor's. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be re- jected as defective. �(0-4 16030-08 SLEEVES Where conduit passes through masonry or concrete, install sleeves during construction of same. Where conduit must be necessity pass through beams or columns, install sleeves and locate as directed. See 16030-04 above. 16030-09 CLEANING UP Cleaning up and custodial service necessitated by work under Division 16 to be per Section 01710, Cleaning Up and Custodial Services. GENERAL METHODS AND MATERIALS SECTION 16101 16101-01 GENERAL Yrr A. Install wiring complete to every outlet with all devices shown and/or required. All wiring to be in raceways and concealed throughout finished areas unless specifically noted otherwise. For the purpose of the electrical specifications, all areas with the exception of Electrical Room and Equipment Room are to be considered as finished areas. wir B. LOCATIONS: Verify all locations with actual field conditions, architectural, structural, plumbing, heating and ventilating plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Architect reserves the right to make minor changes prior to installation without cost to Owner. Coordinate work with that of other trades to assure symmetrical placing of fixtures in respect to ceiling tile, grilles, etc. Where electrical outlets occur in face, decks or base of cabinets or in wall above counters, carefully coordinate with details and arrangements of same. Any work which in incor- rectly installed without prior verification with General Contractor, Architect and/or architectural drawings will be ordered removed and relocated and any damage to other work will be charged to this Contractor. In general, locate outlets thus: 1. Flush mounted panels in general 7'-0" to top. 2 . Surface mounted panels in general 6'-6" to top. 3. Light switches: 4'-0" 4. Receptacle outlets - typical: 1'-011 . 5. Receptacle outlets at counter and toe spaces mounted horizon- tally: Verify height. 6. Telephone outlets: 1'-011. 7. All other outlets: Verify. NOTE: All mounting heights listed above and shown on drawings are from finish floor to centerline unless otherwise shown. Verify mounting heights at non-typical locations. Outlets located in masonry walls or the walls are to be adjusted in height to coordinate with modular joints of the materials. Verify requirements with Architect prior to installation. 16101-01 C. LABELING: 1. General: The complete electrical system is to be clearly and properly labeled to indicate the loads served and the function of each item equipment provided under this work. 2 . Install black phenolic or plastic engraved nameplates with white letters minimum of 1/8" high for all items as listed below. Nameplates to designate use or function of each item and are to located on the inside of panel and cabinet doors and to the out- side covers of such items as disconnect switches, pull boxes, k starters and time switches. Nameplates to be securely attached to each item with epoxy glue. Where outlets with stainless steel or plastic finish plate require labeling, provide engraved finish plates. Embossed tapes, metal tags, and the like, are not permitted. Items requiring labeling: a. Junction boxes: Larger than 4-11/16 all system. b. Pull boxes: All systems. c. Terminal cabinets: All systems. d. Time switches: All systems. e. Disconnect switches: When remote from equipment controlled, or where use is not obvious. f. Starters, contactors and relays: All systems. g. Dry transformers. h. Main distribution, subdistribution and branch panels. D. FUTURE PROVISIONS: Provide pull line in each empty conduit provided for future installation of wiring by others. Pull line ` "Polefin" as manufactured by "Jet Line" or approved. E. NOISE CONTROL: r 1. To minimize noise transmission between occupied spaces, outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions are not to be placed back and straight through boxes are not permitted to be installed. 2. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices are not to be placed on walls which are common to occupied spaces unless no other location is available. Where equipment is mounted on wall common to occupied spaces, provide J4 shock mounting or noise isolators to effectively prevent trans- mission to occupied spaces. F. QUALITY: Unless otherwise specified, all material to be new of recent manufacture, carrying fully factory warranty, Underwriters Laboratory approved or approved by local inspection authority. { G. CONSISTENCY: All like materials of same manufacture throughout project. y. RACEWAYS & FITTINGS SECTION 16110 16110-01 GENERAL A. Provide all raceways and fitting as required for the complete project. B. See Section 16140 for Electrical Supporting Devices. 16110-02 PRODUCTS A. RIGID GAVLANIZED CONDUIT: Rigid steel zinc coated complying with ASA specification and Fed. Spec. WWC, latest revisions. B. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Complying with Fed. Spec. WC latest revision. C. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) : Steel zinc coated complying with ASA specification and Fed. Spec. WWC, latest revisions. r. D. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: Steel zinc coated. E. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: Zinc coated steel core with smooth, gray, abrasion resistant, liquidtight, Polyvinyl Chloride cover. F. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT: 1. Plastic conduit (Polyvinyl Chloride) : a. type 40-Heavy wall rigid: Underwriters Laboratory listed for underground and exposed applictions per code. G. WIREWAYS: All steel with screw covers. Parts coated with rust inhibitor and finished in color to match adjacent distribution equipment. Where installed separate from distribution and control equipment finish gray enamel. See drawings for size and length of gutters. H. FITTINGS: 1. Rigid steel and rigid aluminum conduit: Iron and Steel only, in sizes up to 1 1/2" plastic insulating type, sizes above 1 1/2" insulated metallic bushings. 2. E.M.T. : Sized up to and including 2" steel factory prein- sulated, indent, sock or tap-on, or compression type. 3. Flexible metal conduit: Factory preinsulated. 4 . Conduit plugs: Ideal "Conduloc" sizes 1/2" thru 1" and Thomas & Betts, Push-Penny Plugs Series 1470 for 1 1/4" and larger or equal for sealing conduits during construction. Steel City PL-200 series screwdriver slot threaded meter plugs for per- manent plugs. 5. Floor and wall entrance fittings: Install entrance seal at all points where conduits enter or exit from walls, floors or basements, tunnels or trenches below finish grade. irr i.. ; I�-7 16110-02 6. Expansion fittings: At all locations where conduits cross structural expansion joints or wherever conduit is firmly attached to two independent structures, install expansion u couplings with bonding jumpers of type to provide up to 4" movement. 7. Conduit seals: Vertical or horizontal type for hazardous or other locations. I. Boxes: Steel City, National, or approved, steel boxes as best suited for the purpose intended and as follows: 1. Lighting outlets: 4" octagon. 2 . Switch, receptacle and signal outlets: 4" x 4" square with proper device covers. 3 . Gang boxes: One piece pressed steel minimum 1 1/2" deep x 4" high x length required with proper device covers. 4 . Masonry outlets: Standard boxes as specified above with square cornered tile wall covers with raise of depth required for specific condition encountered. JA 5. Junction boxes: Minimum 4" square x 1 1/2" deep accessible after completion of building. In finished areas boxes provided with 2 gang device cover and blank matching finish plate. 6. Floor boxes: See Section 16111 for floor box requirements. 7. Pull boxes: Interior locations galvanized steel, code required size and gage with removeable screw covers. Exterior locations. 8. Special outlet boxes: See other sections of specifications for for special outlet box requirements. 9. Device covers for outlet boxes: Raised pattern, with rise equal f to total wall material thickness. Surface boxes with 1/2" raise and rounded edges. 10. Extension rings: 1 1/2" deep with no more than one added to any box. Maximum depth of box and extension ring not to exceed 311 . J. JOINT COMPOUND FOR ALUMINUM CONDUIT: T&B joint compound, or approved, specifically manufactured for use on aluminum. 34 K. Explosion proof junction boxes at fuel island, flush mounted with conduit openings drilled and tapped with sealed hubs of size and number required. Jl 16110-03 EXECUTION A. Install all conductors in raceways sized per National Electrical Code. B. Raceways to be complete with boxes and fittings required. In general, conduit runs of more than 1001 , or with more than 3 right angle bends are to be provided with pull box located at an inter- mediate location. Pull boxes or junction boxes are not to be located in finished areas. C. EXPOSED RACEWAYS: 1. In unfinished areas to be run parallel with or at right angles to building structural lines and closely follow surfaces wired I(o-8 iYrr 16110-03 over. Conduits offset at panels, outlets, junction boxes, etc. Conduit 1 1/2" and larger suspended at locations as required. 2. In accessible void and furred spaces, conduit may be run in a direct line between outlets with long sweep bends and offsets closely following surfaces wired over. Suspend conduit 1 1/2" and larger to be run to allow maximum access to space and located as required. 3 . Wiring above accessible ceilings to be run against the underside of the roof or against the bottom of the lower cord of the trusses except for vertical extensions of wiring to ceiling outlets and fixtures. At areas where the underside of the roof or bottom cord of the truss is more than five feet above the ceiling, run conduits to allow maximum access to the ceiling cavity. Coordinate work with other trades. D. CONCEALED RACEWAYS: May be run in a direct line with long sweep bends and offsets. In cavity walls run conduit in hollow space and do not chase interior and exterior masonry. E. UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS: Run in a direct line with long sweep bends. Raceways inside of building to be run below slab in gravel fill. Raceways run outside of building buried minimum of 24" below finish grade, unless otherwise noted. Primary conduits buried minimum of 42" below finish grade or as required by serving utility. F. RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT: Employed for runs embedded in concrete, underground in wet or damp locations, where subject to $rr mechanical injury and where exposed within 8' of floor. Runs underground, in moist locations or exposed to weather made water- tight with threads painted with bituminous sealer (solvent type cut back) before assembly. G. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT allowed only where EMT is permitted and is not to be used for mechanical protection of bare copper conductors, or to be mixed with other types of conduit in same system. Apply joint compound to all fittings to prevent adhesion of threads. Use nylon cord for pulling conductors in aluminum conduit. 0 H. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING: May be used in dry locations, in con- cealed work and where exposed more than 8' above floor. H I. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUITS permitted only where flexibility is required in length not over 1811, minimum size required 1/211 , unless specifically noted otherwise. err J. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT: Used only at locations as called for under other sections of specifications. All conduit offsets and bends made with factory fittings. All 90 degree ells and conduit en- trances into buildings to be with rigid galvanized conduit. K. OUTLET BOXES finished flush with finish surfaces and to be level and plumb. I6-9 16110-03 L. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: For connection to equipment. M. CONDUIT SEALS: Provide at exits and entrance from hazardous locations. Not that cells of masonry walls in The Service Building which contain electrical raceways are to be filled with concrete by the General Contractor to a height of 18" above the finish floor eliminating the need for conduit seals in hazardous areas as race- way will be embedded in 2" of concrete and therefore considered outside of the hazardous area. In addition, concrete bases will be provided by the General Contractor at surface mounted panels for the same reason. N. Hazardous areas in this project occur at the following locations. Electrical Work in these areas to conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code and Administrative Rules of the Bureau of Labor, State of Oregon. 1. Maintenance Building, Rooms 213, 214, 215. w 8 I1o �� 60 k UNDERFLOOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION 16111 16111-01 GENERAL A. SCOPE: 1. Provide flush floor boxes for power as indicated on the draw- ings. 16111-02 PRODUCTS A. FLOOR BOXES: gangable, flush mounted, fully adjustable, con- crete light formed steel, with rectangular forged brass cover and flange. Shallow type 3" depth with conduit entrances for 1/2" or 3/4" conduit, Hubbell, or approved. Provide each floor box with pedestal type service fitting with blank end plate and single receptacle plate. Finish satin chrome with stainless steel plates. 16111-03 EXECUTION A. FLUSH FLOOR BOXES: Boxes set plumb and true and adjusted after installation to be flush with finish floor. Verify location of all outlets prior to installation. a 60 CORD REELS (By Owner) SECTION 16112 16112-01 GENERAL Provide cord reels with receptacles in Service at locations on the drawings. (Column between Service Bays 1 & 2) . 60 16112-02 PRODUCTS A. CORD REEL: Automatic rewind cable reel, three conductor No. 12, with guide roller. Cable length required to limit outlet to point 18" above floor directly below reel. Terminate drop cord with double duplex receptacle. (Furnished and installed by Owner) . imw 16-11 CONDUCTORS SECTION 16120 16120-01 GENERAL A. Provide conductors, connectors, lugs, cable ties and terminiations for all systems. B. Primary cables and terminations at primary equipment to be by the Serving Utility. 16120-02 PRODUCTS �x A. SECONDARY SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUCTORS: Copper 600 volt Type "THW" stranded. B. FEEDER CONDUCTORS: 1. Copper, 600 volt, Type "THW" . 2 . Color identifications: See "Execution" part of this section. C. BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS: 1. Copper, minimum size No. 12, 600 volt, sizes 12 and 10 Type "TW" or "THW" ; size No. 8 and larger, stranded Type "THW" . Special conductor types where required. 2 . Factory color coded to comply with National Electrical Code. D. CLOCK SYSTEM CONDUCTORS: 1. Copper, minimum size No. 12 , 600 volt, with code grade insula- tion for conditions encountered. E. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUCTORS: 1. Speaker conductors: Two conductor No. 22, solid copper, poly- ethylene insulation, with tape shield and overall vinyl jacket. 2 . Microphone: Two conductor, No. 22 stranded, tinned copper cable, low impedance, polyethylene insulation, tinned copper braid shield, vinyl jacket. a F. CORD DROPS AND PORTABLE CORDS: Copper Type "S" , heavy duty, rubber insulated, flexible unless otherwise noted. G. SPLICES, CONNECTIONS, TERMINATIONS AND CABLE TIES: 1. Conductors #6 or larger, spliced, taped, or termination with solderless pressure type connectors unless otherwise required. 2 . Connectors: Conductors smaller than #6 made with approved, spring connectors. 3 . Lugs: Conductors No. 6 and larger except on molded case circuit breakers pressure tool set Thomas & Betts, Burndy "Hydent" , Anderson Electric or approved. 4 . Terminal strips: Molded base screw terminals "Buchanan" Medium Duty Cat. 525 with tubular clamp flat base for direct mounting s and center designation strip or equal. Label center designation strip with W. H. Brady wire markers. 5. Cable ties: Thomas & Betts "Ty-Raps" of size and length re- quired. 7 Ib-12 16120-01 6. Color identification for feeder conductors Brady B-500, vinyl cloth piping banding tapes, Scotch Vinyl Plastic Electrical Tape No. 35 or equal. 7. Fluorescent lighting fixture ballast channel tap connectors: "Scotchlock" self stripping, size as required. 16120-03 EXECUTION A. No conductors or cables to be pulled in raceways until raceway system is complete and has been cleaned of all foreign matter. Blow out or vacuum smaller conduits andpull mandrel through larger ger conduits prior to installing conductors. B. Identify feeder conductors by stripping with plastic tape as follows: Where more than one stripe is required, space approxi- mately 1 1/2" o.c. 1. 120/208 volt system: Phase "A" one 3/4" yellow stripe; Phase "B" two 3/4" blue stripes; Phase "C", three 3/4" orange stripes; and neutral with 3" white stripe. 2. 277/480 volt system: Phase "A", one 3/4" red stripe; Phase "B" , two 3/4" brown stripes, Phase "C", three 3/4" violet stripes and neutral with 3" white stripe. C. Leave 6" single were pigtails for connection of fixture leads and devices to branch circuits. D. Splices and taps only where specifically shown or approved to be made in approved splice boxes. E. At all locations in panel gutters, wire gutter, motor control centers, dimmers, etc. , where multiple conductors are run in accessible wireways, the conductors are to be neatly bundles and tied with cable ties. Spacing as required to neatly group and support conductors. 6t F. Feeder and service conductors at switchboards and panels to be neatly cabled together as a group and not combined in same cabling j as other feeds. Cabled conductors to be supported from devices built into switchgear and/or supported by lugs. G. No conductors to be installed in raceways containing non-electrical utilities such as air, water and oil. H. In general, control conductor to be installed in separate raceways, lam unless specifically required otherwise. WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16130 16130-01 GENERAL A. Provide all wiring devices and finish plates as required unless specifically noted otherwise. B. EXTRA STOCK: Provided 10 extra keys for key operated switches. 16130-02 PRODUCTS A. GENERAL: Where devices are specified by Federal Specification numbers, the acceptable manufacturers will be considered as any company who manufactures devices stamped with specified Federal Specification number. B. SWITCHES: Minimum rating 120/277 volt, 20 amp unless otherwise noted. 1. Toggle switches. 2 . Key operated switches: Same manufacture and quality as toggle switches specified above. 3 . Pilot light switches: Illuminated red handle lit when switch is "ON", 120 volt, 20 amp. 4. Momentary contract switch: 3 position, 2 circuit with center "off" , 15 amp, 120/277 volt. C. RECEPTACLES: Conform to Fed. Spec. 1. Duplex, double parallel slot 20 amp, 125 volt grounded. 2 . Special purpose receptacles: Comply with (1) above as to make and quality. New NEMA configurations where applicable. See drawings or other portions of specifications for additional requirements. D. FINISH PLATES: 1. At surface wiring, raised galvanized industrial type. 2 . At all typical locations Sierra, or approved, stainless steel type, satin finish. 3 . At damp or wet locations Sierra stainless steel type (18% chromium and 8% nickel) , or approved. 4 . Marked plates: Where switches control remote lighting or power outlets, or where switches in same gang (two or more) serve different purpose (such as light, power, intercom, etc. ) or different areas (such as corridor and outside) furnish engraved JAII plates with 1/8" black letters indicating function of each switch or outlet. 5. Damp location receptacle finish plates: Stainless steel, N horizontal plate with short double covers, Sierra, or approved. 6. Wet location receptacle cover: Bell 1900 grey. 7. Telephone finish plates: Stainless steel, split cover, with split grommett of size as required for telephone cable. Sierra or approved. 8. Special plates: See drawings and other portions of specifica- tions for requirements. 9. Install GFI receptacles in toilets where outlets are shown. 10. Install IG outlets for computer circuit. Ib-t4 16130-03 EXECUTION A. All devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines. B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices not accepted. it C. Switches shall not be grouped or ganged in outlet boxes unless they can be so arranged that the voltage between adjacent switch does not exceed 300, or unless installed in boxes equipped with perman- ently installed barriers between adjacent switches. r !r i`. 1(c'IS PANELBOARDS SECTION 16134 16134-01 GENERAL A. Provide branch circuit panelboards as required. 16134-02 PRODUCTS A. BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELS: " 1. Type: Circuit breaker type with molded case bolted breakers and copper bussing or tinned aluminum. Breakers type "NLAB" for 120/208 volt systems. Multipole breakers to be common trip. Located single pole breakers at top of panel numbered consecu- tively down left side and continue down right side. Multipole breakers installed below single pole breakers with numbering continued down left side and then down right side. Spares and blanks to be at lowest positions. 2. Combination circuit breaker and ground fault interrupter; 10, 000 amp I.C. rating, single pole, 20 amp, bolted; Westinghouse Quicklag "Type B", Square D "Qwik-Gard" or equal. 3 . Construction: Flush or surface mounted as indicated with following components. a. Door with lock all keyed alike. National, flush panel type J11 lock, left or right as required. Provide one key for each panel. b. Flush mounted panels: Concealed mounting hardware for exterior trim and door. No exposed fastenings or holes per- mitted. Flush mounted panels located side by side are to be of same length. c. Surface mounted panels: Completely metal enclosed, V-611 high, floor mounted with removable front panels. Exposed trim fastenings and hardward permitted. d. Gutters minimum of 5" with 6" required at feeder end of panel or where feeder runs inside of gutters. Separate feeder lugs and terminals for each feeder connection with lugs as specified herein. Split door split bus panels to have 2" separation of sections. 4. Labeling: Provide phenolic laminated engraved plastic name- plate (black with white core and 1/4" letters) permanently attached to top center of interior trim. Nameplate to indicate panel, voltage and phase characteristics such as "Panel AA, 120/208 volt, 3 phase" . Panel labeling to correspondence to distribtuiton labeling. Multi-section panels to have indivi- dual nameplates for each section. No labels of any sort on panel exterior faces. 5. Panel schedules: Single column, 4" wide x 3/8" high per line, covered with minimum of . 018" thick clear rigid plastic instal- led in metal frame holder located on inside face of door. Panel typewritten circuit schedules to use assigned room names and numbers, not plan designations with every panel position schedules including spares. Circuit numbering to conform to plan circuit designations. Multi-section panels to have individual circuit schedules for each section. Ib'I(o �Yr f �r 16134-02 6. Provide breaker handle guards to prevent accidental shut off of equipment for circuit breakers supplying obviously constant circuits for clocks, time switches, computer, telephone systems, cable system, sound systems, and other like systems as directed. 7. Panel finish: a. At all finished areas Rodda Baking Enamel or equal. b. In unfinished or utility areas standard Industrial Gray. C. Paint sides, top and front of surface mounted panels. 8. Branch circuit panels must have 25% spare power load and circuits. B. TRIMS separately packed and p y p protected. C. LUGS: Per Section 16120, Conductors. Provide double or feed thru lugs at panel where feeders are extended to additional panels. D. Manufacture of branch panels and subdistribution panels same as specified for Main Distribution Panel. 16134-03 EXECUTIOn A. Marred, scratched or splattered panel trims and faces not accepted unless satisfactorily refinished. B. Panel interiors to be protected from dirt, plaster and moisture by covering with Visqueen or similar material and to be entirely free of foreign matter before acceptance. r. C. No low voltage wiring (less than 120 volt) to be installed in panel tubs or bottom wireway areas of floor mounted panels. No addi- tional barriers permitted to allow for low voltage wiring compart- ments unless otherwise noted. 14,47 RELAYS, CONTACTORS, TIME SWITCHES & PHOTO ELECTRIC SWITCHES SECTION 16135 16135-01 GENERAL Provide relays, contactors and time switches for control of power, lighting and equipment as indicated on drawings. 16135-02 PRODUCTS A. RELAYS: 1. General: Number of poles, throws, coil voltage, type of enclo- sure, locations and special requirements as specifically indicated on drawings or as required to accomplish control indicated. 2 . Magnetically heldrelays: 25 amps to 600 volts for all classes of loads. B. CONTACTORS: 1. General: Number of poles, coil voltage, type of enclosure, rR locations and special requirements as specifically indicated on the drawings or as required to accomplish control indicated. 2. Magnetically held contractor: Normally open, rated for all classes of loads to 600 volts A.C. capacities 30 to 300 amps, 1, 2 and 3 pole. Automatic Switch . 3 . Mechanically held contactors: Normally open rated for all classes of loads to 600 volts A.C. capacities 30 to 200 amperes, ={ 2 and 3 pole. C. TIME SWITCHES: Verify locations with Owner. 1. Seven day with power carryover, 120 volt, 40 amp. per pole, 4 pole single throw, normally open. Provided engraved plastic nameplate on outside of cover indicating use. 2 . Wind-UP By Pass Timers: Wall box mounting, 6 & 12 hour, "Off" type without hold feature with engraved stainless steel finish plate. Plate engraved to indicate hours. Mark-Time 90, 0024 - 6 hr. , 20 amap, 120 volt; 90, 001-12 hr. 20 amp, 120 volt or equal. D. Photoelectric Switch: Weatherproof, plastic housing, delayed circuit response, hermetically sealed cadmium cell, 1800 VA, (105-285) volt, 100 amp inrush current. Twist lock receptacle and universal mounting bracket. Ripley No. 6190 or American Electric Company No. 8090-1 16135-03 EXECUTION A. Install relays with due regard to noise transmission. Where located adjacent to quiet areas, provide sound isolation. See Section 16101-01 for noise control. B. Provide engraved plastic nameplates permanently attached to inside cover or door of time switches to indicate use. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16190 16190-01 GENERAL A. Provide adequate supports for all electrical wiring and equipment. B. The required strength of supporting equipment and size and type of anchors to be designed for a minimum of four times the weight of equipemtn or wiring supported including conduit hangers and conductors. C. Fiber anchors and lag shields not approved. D. All electrical equipment, conduit, boxes, etc. , to be supported from building structure independent of supporting systems provided by others unless specificaaly specified otherwise. E. The use of perforated tape or wire for fastening is not permitted unless specifically indicated otherwise. rr 16190-02 PRODUCTS A. FASTENERS: Concrete inserts, screws, bolts, flush anchors; hammer driven, trigger-fired, and powder actuated anchors. Powder driven anchors "Hilti", Omark, or approved. B. OUTLET BOX SUPPORTS: At wood stud walls support boxes with ad- justable bar hangers having channel cross section equal to Steel City 6010 series, or mounted on solid blocking. 4" square boxes &W located adjacent to wood studs may be side nailed and back braced with Steel City No. 50 box brace. At masonry walls where boxes are not cast in place, support with flush anchors. At ceilings support boxes with Steel City 6010 series or equal bar hangers. C. SURFACE MOUNTED CONDUIT RUNS: One hole malleable straps, Steel City, Appleton, T&B, Diamond, or approved. Conduit staples for 1/2" or 3/4" diameter raceways, regular steel annular threaded electroplated finish "Stronghold Line" or approved. Beam clamps, or other approved devices with suitable bolts. 11Kon Clips" as manufactured by Caddy Fastener Division of Erico Product, Inc. , or approved. Supports for multiple conduit made up of Steel City, Unitrust, Globe Strut, or Harvey "Alstrut" channels with conduit clamps. D. SUSPENDED CONDUIT RUNS: Adjustable hangers for suspension of separately located 1 1/2" or larger conduits, Steel City C-149 with E-170 adjustable swinging hanger flange and threaded steel rod of adequate size, or approved. w E. ADJUSTABLE TRAPEZE HANGERS to support groups of parallel conduits. Typical trapeze to consist of following: Steel City B-905 steel channel, H-119 square washer, C-105 strap, 3/8" rod and required ism ceiling flange. Trapezes of components manufactured by Unitrust, Globe Strut, Harvey Alstrut, or approved, may be used. 16190-03 EXECUTION A. Hammer driven, trigger fired and powder actuated anchors may not be used in the following locations at concrete construction: In slabs or walls less that 4" thick; in joist or beams which are less than 8" wide; and within 3" of any edge or opening. B. At concrete or masonry walls where boxes are not cast-in-place, support with flush anchors, or power driven anchors where per- mitted. C. Conduit staples may be used for mounting conduit on frame construc- tion in furred spaces, concealed spaces or at other locations on frame construction. D. Support all conduit within 18" of each box, coupling, elbow and panel and at spacings of not more the 6' along runs. re u { i's) SECTION 16210 STANDBY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 16210-01 GENERAL (Diesel generator will be installed at a later date by owner but contractor will install automatic load transfer con- J;gol (See PRODUCTS. B) . A. Provide for standby diesel fueled electric generating set at Room 210 (Maintenance Building) . The unit to be installed at a future 6r date (nic) and will have automatic starting equipment, batteries, charging equipment, control unit, muffler, engine starting aid, fuel connections, unit mounted output circuit breaker, transfer w switch and power and control wiring. B. Electric Generating Set Submittals: Provide for electric generat- ing set indication location of roughing-in for fuel and electrical connections and mounting for steel base, on shop drawing. 16210-02 PRODUCTS A. Diesel Fueled-Electric Generating Set: (future installation) 1. General: Engine and generator to be the product of one company and be the sole responsibility of that company and it authorized dealer. The diesel fired generating set is to be factory assembled and tested as manufactured. Unit designed and provided with control and accessories for operation in an ambient temperature of 110 degree F. maximum and -10 degrees F. minimum. Electric Generating set to be rated for continuous service of 30 kw, and 37.5 KVA at 0.8 powerfactor, 120/203 volt, three phase, 4 wire wye. 2. Diesel fueled engine: 4 cycle; overhead valve; water cooled with radiator fan and water pump. Engine four cylinder, with piston displacement not less than 254 cu. in. , with minimum rating of 63 bhp at 1800 rpm. 3. Engine Equipment: a. Fuel System: Twenty gallon diesel "Day Tank" with flow switch and 12 volt, motor driven, diaphram type fuel transfer pump mounted in housing. b. Starting: Equip engine with a 12 volt electric starting system of sufficient capacity to crank the engine at a speed which will allow full starting of the engine. Furnish factory mounted 2-6 volt, 135 ampere hour lead-acid heavy duty battery with electrolite. Provide a suitable battery charging generator with sufficient capacity to recharge the battery back to normal starting requirements quickly and an automatic battery trickle charger (2 amp capacity) to main- tain the battery at full capacity. Battery charger install- ed in transfer panel. c. Starting Aid: Provide an engineer mounted, thermostatically it controlled immersion type engine coolant heater to insure a minimum coolant temperature of 120 degrees F. in a minimum ambient of 10 degrees F. Heater 1.5 kw, 120 volts, single phase A.C. d. Engine Instruments: Provide engine with engine mounted instrument panel containing the following gauges for engine surveillance and maintenance: (1) Oil pressure gauge. (2) Coolant temperature gauge. Ifo21 16210-02 (3) Battery charge rate ammeter. (4) Alarm lights as specified in safety controls below. e. Engine Controls: Provide complete engine start-stop control to start engine from power failure. Provide a cranking limiter to pen the starting circuit in approximately 45 to 90 seconds if the engine is not started within that time. Engine control to also include a 3 position selector switch with the Run-Stop-Remote positions, high engine temperature, low oil pressure, and overspeed shutdown with signal light and alarm terminals. See Safety Controls below. f. Air Cleaners: Provide engine with one or more dry type (or oil bath) air cleaners. g. Governor: Gear driven, mechanical flyweight, adjustable with 5% maximum speed regulation and overspeed shutdown. h. Ignition System: 12 volt battery with radio suppression. i. Lubrication System: Positive displacement lube oil pump, full pressure lubrication to all bearings; full flow oil filter properly located for easy servicing; pressure relief valve, oil pressure gauge, oil level indicator , low oil pressure shutdown. j . Bearing: Replaceable main and connecting rod bearings. k. Valves: Overhead design with valve rotators, and replace- able valve seat inserts. 1. Safety Controls: Equip engine with automatic safety controls to shut down the engine in event of low lubricating oil pressure, high jacket water temperature, engine overspeed, or overcrank and make electrical contacts for alarm lights on the control panel. m. Lubrication oil and antifreeze: Antifreeze ethylene-glycol fo -10 degrees protection. Lubrication oil as required. 4 . Alternator: a. Construction: Four pole, revolving field design with tempera- ture compensated solid state voltage regulator and brushless rotating rectifier exciter system. Stator directly connected to the engine flywheel housing with rotor driver through a semi-flexible driving flange to insure permanent alignment. Insulation system Class F as defined by NEMA MGA-1. 65. Alternator output 120/208 volt three phase, four wire wye, wound 12 lead reconnectible. b. Performance: Frequency regulation not to exceed 3- hertz from no load to rated load. Voltage regulation within plus 3 or minus 2% of rated voltage from no load to full rated load. Instantaneous voltage dip to be less 13% of rated voltage when full, three phase load at rated power factor is applied to the alternator. Recovery to stable operation to occur within 2 seconds. Stable or steady state operation defined as operation with terminal voltage remaining constant within plus or minus one percent of rated voltage. Provide a rheostat to provide minimum of plus or minus 5% voltage adjustment from rated value. Temperature rise to be within NEMA MG1-22.40 definition. i{ 1(0-22 16210-02 r.. c. Instrument Panel: Shock mounted on the generating set by the manufacturer and containing panel lighting, manual reset circuit breaker, frequency meter, running time meter, voltage adjusting rheostate, A.C. ammeter (dual range, indicating current each phase) , meter switch, voltmeter-ammeter phase selector with an off position. 5. Generator Set Mounting: Welded steel base equipped with vibra- tion isolators, battery mounting compartment, and provisions for bolting to concrete base. 6. Exhaust system: Furnish critical application engine muffler. Muffler arranged for mounting above housing and painted with heat resistant paint. 7. Provide 60 amp, 4 pole, SN main line with breaker. installed by B. Automatic Load Transfer Control: (Furnished by Owner and/ this contract. 1. General: Transfer switch Underwriter Laboratories listed (Standard 1008) for all classes of load. 60 ampere, 3 pole, 6w 600 volt rated for continuous duty enclosures in a nonventilated NEMA 1 enclosure. Components listed below: 2. Rating and Performance: Transfer switch portion of the control designed, built and tested to close on an inrush current up to and including twenty (20) time the continuous rating of the switch without welding or excessive burning of the contacts. The transfer switch capable of switching load up to and including fifteen (15) times the continuous rating to the switch and capable of enduring six thousand (6000) cycles of operating, at rated current, at a rate of six (6) cycles per minute, with- out failure. One cycle shall consist of one complete opening and closure of both sets of contacts on an inrush current of ten (10) times the continuous rating of the switch. 3 . Construction: The complete automatic load transfer control enclosed in a NEMA 1 enclosure with a swing-out service panel and a key-operated door lock. Transfer swich mechanically and electrically interlocked to positively prevent the load from being simultaneously energized by normal power and emergency power. Each set of contacts of the double break design for fast arc suppression. The contacts to consist of solid silver cadmium. Individual heat resistant contact chambers provided to completely enclose the contacts. 4 . Undervoltage Protection: Solid state voltage sensitive devices to monitor the normal power source and signal emergency power to start and assume load on a partial loss of power on any phase or where feedback voltages exist. Devices with calibrated dial adjustments and temperature compensated for a maximum deviation of +/-2 volts, from -25F to -175F. 5. Time delay to start emergency power: Provide time delay relay, adjustable from 1.5 seconds to 15 seconds to prevent the emergency power from needless starting and stopping during periods of momentary voltage fluctuations of the normal power source. Ito'23 } . 16210-02 6. Time delay to retransfer load. Provide a time delay relay, adjustable from 2 minutes to 60 minutes to delay retransferring the load to normal power after normal power has been returned to service. Relay provided for (1) overriding the initial voltage fluctuations of the returning normal power and (2) providing a predetermined minimum period of operating time for emergency power. If the emergency set should fail during the delay period, the time delay to be bypassed and the load instantly retransferred to normal power. 7 . Automatic exerciser: Provide means to automatically start and run the standby generating set for a set period of time for the purpose of testing or exercising the complete engine, alternator and load transfer control. After completetion of the set period of time for testing and exercising the standby generating set is to be automatically shut down. Periods for testing or exercising adjustable in multiples of 15 minutes per period with the period repeated on any combination of days over a cycle of 14 days before recycling. During the period of testing or exercising, emergency power shall assume the load. 8. Meters: Provide voltmeter and selector switch to measure volt- age of each phase, and ammeter with selector switch to measure current in phase conductor. 9. Neutral Bar: Provide full size copper neutral bar in transfer switch. 16210-03 EXECUTION A. Provide roughing-in information for location of engine generator set. Provide roughing-in information for location of diesel supply lines. B. Verify exact location of generator set and electrical rough-in with Owner. J3 wt 4 ItoZ 5 a UNDERGROUND SERVICE SECTION 16411 y 16411 GENERAL A. Provide for an underground service from PGE pole #349 at --the railroad tracks to the building service equipment as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work distribution for under- ground service to be as follows: 0 B. PRIMARY (above 600 volts) : 1. Items provided and installed by Portland General Electric. a. Primary cables and terminations. b. Pad mounted transformer. 2. Work by General Contractor: Concrete transformer pad complete with gravel fill below pad. 3 . Work by Electrical Subcontractor: AW a. Trenching and backfilling for primary cables per Portland General Electric Co. requirements. b. 4" non-metallic conduit under all paved areas with rigid ,,, galvanized conduit elled up into primary section of pad mounted transformer. Provide Pull-Line in all empty conduits. C. SECONDARY SERVICE: 1. Work by Portland General Electric Co. : a. Furnishing and installing meter at Main Distribution Panel. b. Connection of secondary service conductors at the pad mounted transformer. 2. Items furnished by Portland General Electric Company for in- stallation by electrical subcontractor. a. Current transformers for installation in the current trans- former and metering sections of the Main Distribution Panel. 3. Items provided by electrical subcontractor: a. Meter base. Transformer pad grounding as required by PGE. b. Underground secondary service conduits between transformer pad and current transformer and metering compartment of the Main Distribution Panel. 16411-02 PRODUCTS A. RACEWAYS: Rigid galvanized with non-metallic raceways used only at locations where allowed. See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings. B. CONDUCTORS: See Section 16120 and drawings. C. PULL LINE: See Section 16101-F, Future Provisions. 16411-03 EXECUTION A. Provide trench of depth as required to allow serving utility to install primary burial cables 42" below finish grade. Provide 6" of sand fill below primary conductors and 18" above. w �w 1G-Z5 Fr ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT SECTION 16420 16420-01 GENERAL A. Provide a Main Distribution Panel as shown on drawings containing all components as indicated. B. Submit complete shop drawings for approval prior to construction. 16420-02 PRODUCTS A. MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL: Floor mounted, free standing, indoor type, without doors, dead front, switchboard construction. Size and configuration of panel to conform to space available. 1. Breakers: Molded case unless otherwise noted, with bolted connections and having interrupting capacities and trip size as required by PGE. 2. Internal connections: Made with bus bars adequately supported horizontally and vertically to withstand short circuit currents of 50,000 amps without distortion. All bussing copper based on 1000 amps per square inch or aluminum at 568 amps per square inch. Lugs: See Section 16120, Conductors. 3 . Sized to allow proper entrance of feeder and service conductors. 4. Finish: Standard factory industrial gray applied over 2 coats of rust resisting primer. 5. Labeling: Provide laminated engraved black plastic nameplates with white letter permanently attached to panel exterior. Size of nameplates and lettering as directed. Label all distribution breakers, main breakers, sub-breakers and panel sections to pro- perly identify all components. In addition provide a master nameplate indicating project name and date and the name of the Architects, Electrical Engineer and Electrical Contractor. B. Main distribution panel must have 25% spare panel load and circuits. fl C. MANUFACTURE: ITE Imperial, Square D, General Electric, Zinsco, Westinghouse, or approved. D. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH to be supplied by owner and installed and connected by contractor. (The reason for this is because the generator must be compatible with this transfer switch) . 16420-03 EXECUTION A. Maintain openings into and through the building as required for installation of equipment and coordinate installation with other pirme contractors. B. Protect panel from dirt, plaster and moisture by covering with Visqueen or similar material during construction and leave panel entirely free of foreign matter at time of final acceptance. C. Marred, scratched or splattered trims or faces will not be accept- ed. Repain and refinish surfaces to leave panel in new condition at time of acceptance. I� 26 GROUNDING SECTION 16450 16450-01 GENERAL A. Provide grounding of all electrical equipment, raceways, enclosures and cabinets for clock, telephone, fire alarm, etc. , in accord with code rules and establish safety practices. B. Provide grounding for system neutrals. C. Receptacle grounding terminal to be bonded to raceway system per code. r D. Provide grounding conductor in all multi-outlet raceways and in underfloor ducts. 16450-02 PRODUCTS A. Grounding conductors (other than neutrals) copper with green insulation or identified with permanent green banding wherever exposed at terminals, pull boxes, panels, etc. Grounding conduc- tors when run beyond equipment or enclosures to be enclosed in raceway. B. Grounding connections to be case solderless type. C. Ground rods: Copperweld or approved, length and diameter as per code. 16450-03 EXECUTION A. System ground to be made from the neutral bus at the Main Distibu- tion Panel to the nearest 1" or larger cold water pipe. See plumbing drawings for cold water pipe stub provided for grounding connection. r. B. Grounding conductor in multi-outlet raceways and underfloor ducts to be bonded to branch circuit or feeder conduits unless otherwise noted, and connected to grounding terminals of receptacles. �r C. Provide grounding conductor for Panel between neutral bus in panel and neutral bus at the Main Distribution Panel. D. Coordinate grounding at pad mounted transformer with serving utility. rrr E. Grounding in Accounting Room as directed by equipment supplier. F. Provide grounding conductor for computer outlet (s) to the main distribution panel ground bus. i4p-z7 x FEEDER CIRCUITS SECTION 16480 16480-01 GENERAL Provide all feeders as shown on drawings. 16480-02 PRODUCTS A. FEEDER CONDUCTORS: See Section 16120, Conductors. B. FEEDER BUSWAY: See Section 16125, Busways. C. FEEDER RACEWAYS: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings 16480-03 EXECUTION A. Feeders to be concealed in all finished areas and run overhead or underground at Contractor's option unless otherwise noted. Feeders in Maintenance Building and between Office and Maintenance Building to be underground. B. All feeder conductors to be continous from origin to panel or h equipment without running splice in intermediate pull or splice box. Unless otherwise noted, each feeder raceway is to contain only those conductors constituting a single feeder. C. Feeder raceways to enter directly opposite to terminal lugs where possible. lb-28 rr BRANCH CIRCUITS SECTION 16481 rr, 16481-01 GENERAL. Provide branch circuits to all outlets, devices, motors, appliances and electrical equipment unless otherwise noted. 16481-02 PRODUCTS rwr A. All branch circuit conductors copper, No. 12 minimum unless other- wise noted. See Section 16120, Conductors. B. RACEWAYS: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings. Raceways cast in concrete or encased in concrete to be rigid galvanized. 16481-03 EXECUTION o A. Install branch circuit wiring in raceways throughout project unless otherwise noted. it B. See equipment schedules, architectural, mechanical and plumbing drawings for equipment locations. Verify all roughing-in require- ments prior to installation of branch circuits. C. See Section 16101, General Methods & Materials, for general wiring requirements. D. Numbering of branch circuits in panelboards to conform to plan designations. E. Branch circuit raceways in hazardous areas are to be cast in concrete or run in cavities of masonry except as required at the service island to feed overhead outlets and equipment. Coordinate installation with masonry subcontractor. it kw 6W 16.29 f( EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS SECTION 16482 16482-01 GENERAL f A. Provide all electrical work for plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning and other trades unless otherwise noted. B. Verify extent, quantity, capacity, etc. and test all circuits for fusing, continuity and control. C. Determine voltage and phase of each item before connecting, and if characteristics are not proper for energy available immediately notify Owner. D. Connect to all equipment as noted and scheduled on drawings. E. Provide all cords, cord caps, circuit protection, disconnect switches and necessary devices required for proper connection of equipment. F. Control wiring between starter, electrically operated control components, etc. furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Verify location of all control devices with mechanical drawings and temperature control contractor and make connections as required. All control devices furnished by Mechanical Contractor are to be set in place by him unless otherwise noted. Mechanical Contractor to furnish complete set of drawings indicating all terminal designations and connec- tions to be made by Electrical Contractor. Coordinate installation with Mechanical Contractor prior to roughing-in. 16482-02 PRODUCTS A. GENERAL: Provide all cords, cord caps, circuit protection, dis- connect switches and necessary devices required for proper connection of equipment. See other sections of specifications for requirements of these items. B. DISCONNECT SWITCHES: Heavy duty unfused unless otherwise noted. Disconnect switches for fractional horsepower, 120 volt motors may be single pole, motor rated toggle switches. Enclosures for disconnect switches as shown or required for conditions encountered. C. RECEPTACLES: See drawings and Section 16130, Wiring Devices. D. CORD CAPS: See drawing requirements. Provide cord caps to match receptacles provided. E. CONDUCTORS: See Section 16120, Conductors, and drawings. G. RACEWAYS: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings. 16482-03 EXECUTION A. Verify exact location and method of connection to each piece of equipment prior to roughing-in. Where roughing-in is different from that shown onthe drawings, verify requirements with Owner before proceeding. B. Motor rotations to be checked and connected for proper direction. 16-30 W INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES SECTION 16510 16510-01 GENERAL A. Provide lighting fixtures of type and wattage indicated on drawings by letter and number shown adjacent to lighting outlet symbol. A fixture typical for location is to be installed at every lighting outlet whether specifically shown or not. B. Fixtures to be provided complete with lamps, ballasts, reflectors, diffusers, lenses, shielding, hangers, accessories and fittings. C. Submit a list of fixtures, complete with catalog numbers, manufacture and drawings or photographs for approval. D. See Section 16010-03 "Approval of materials equal to those provided W in the specifications", for requirements of substitute materials. 16510-02 PRODUCTS A. All fixtures to be of a recognized, standard manufacture bearing Underwriter approval label. 1W B. LAMPS: See Light Fixture Schedule for lamp specifications. C. BALLASTS: 1. Rapid start 430 ma: Premium "Class P", CBM approved, designed and tested so they do not exceed 90 degree C operating in a 65 degree C heat box. Temperature test conducted at a minimum of 25 degree C over CBM and UL testing procedures. Ballasts guaranteed not to overheat the capacitor insulting oil beyond the capacitor manufacturer's warranty limits. General Electric Super Premium, Advance Kool Koil Mark III , or approved. 2. Metal Halide: High power factor, constant wattage general electric, advance or approved. 3. Voltage: Provide ballast of proper voltage for operation of fixtures with circuiting shown on drawings. Verify. D. FIXTURE LENGTHS: Furnish units of lengths shown on drawings. For continuous runs furnish end plates, connectors and all required fittings. E. CEILING MOUNTED FIXTURES: Verify mounting conditions. Where fixtures are to be mounted on low density cellulose fiber ceilings, fixtures to be Underwriters Laboratory approved for direct mounting. If direct mounting fixtures are not available, provide 1 1/2" spacers. F. HANGERS: aw 1. Stem mounted fixtures suspended from aligner canopies with stems of lengths as shown on drawings or as specified. At mechanical and equipment rooms fixture stems to be adjusted as required to coordinate installation of light fixtures with mechanical 16510-02 equipment, piping and duct work. Verify stem length with Architect prior to installtion. Where stem lengths specified are obviously in error, adjust to suit room conditions encountered. 2. Surface ceiling mounted fixtures, flanged type fluorsescent troffer fixtures, and recessed incandescent fixtures may be supported from structural members of hung ceilings. Provide all channels, supporting devices and hangers as required for connection to hung ceiling. G. Fixture wire to be of type and size approved for maximum heat conditions encountered. H. Recessed incandescent and metal halide fixtures with integral outlet boxes to be UL approved for feed thru wiring per the National Electrical Code. Where approved fixtures with integral outlet boxes are not available, provide fixtures with flex connection to separate branch circuit outlet boxes. I. FIXTURE TYPES: (See Schedule on Sheet A-17) 16510-03 EXECUTION A. Fixtures thoroughly cleaned, assembled, lamped and installed in place. {5 B. Coordinate installation of fixtures with other prime contractors, and verify all roughing-in requirements prior to installation. C. All fixtures to be illuminated at time of acceptance. See lamp guarantee requirements quirements of Section 16020-04. D. All recessed fixtures to be flex connected to branch circuit outlet box. Connections to conform to National Electrical Code. E. Fixtures located in mechanical and store rooms to be coordinated with mechanical ductwork, piping and equipment. 16-32 rr EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES SECTION 16530 w 16530-01 GENERAL A. Provide lighting fixtures of type and wattage indicated on drawings by letter and number shown adjacent to lighting outlet symbol. A fixture typical for location is to be installed at every lighting outlet whether specifically shown or not. B. Fixtures to be complete with lamps, ballast, reflectors, diffusers, lenses, shielding, hangers, poles and accessories and fittings. C. Submit a list of fixtures, complete with catalog numbers, manufac- ture and drawings or photographs for approval. See Section 16010-03 "Approval of Materials Equal to Those Provided in Specification" for requirements of substitute materials. D. Concerete bases for post top light fixtures to be provided by General Contractor. 16530-02 PRODUCTS A. All fixtures to be of a recognized standard manufacturer bearing Underwriteres approval label for damp or wet locations as required by Code. B. LAMPS: See Light Fixture Schedule. It , C. BALLASTS: 1. Flourescent: Low temperature of requirements of Section 16510-02-C. 2 . Metal -Halide: Low temperature, high power factor, constant wattage General Electric, Advance, or approved. 3. Voltage: Provide ballast of proper voltage for operation of fixtures. Verify. D. FIXTURE TYPES: r (See Schedule on Sheet A-17) . 16530-03 EXECUTION i. A. Deliver bolt rings for post top light fixtures to General Contractor for casting into concrete bases or masonry columns. Poles to be set straight and plumb and bases grouted as required. B. See architectural drawings for exact location of all outside lighting fixtures. C. All recessed fixtures to be flex connected to branch circuit outlet box. Connect to conform to National Electrical Code, or fixtures U.L. approved for direct and feed thru wiring. Ic�-33 DIMMER SYSTEM SECTION 16601 16601-01 GENERAL Provide a remotely controlled, manually adjustable, solid state, semi- conductor type Metal Halide dimming system for Multi-Use Room 102. System consisting of power unit, intensity control, separate "On-Off" switch and associated wiring. Metal Halide fixtures with dimming ballast specified under Section 16530, Interior Lighting Fixtures. 16601-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: 1. Power unit: Surface mounted, 120 volt solid state, semi- conductor type, UL listed . 2. Intensity control: Flush wall mounting with engraved s.s. finish plate. 3. "On-Off" switch: See Section 16130, Wiring Devices. r; 4. Raceways: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings. 5. Conductors: See Section 16120, Conductors. 16601-03 EXECUTION Complete system to be installed per manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Verify. h CLOCK SYSTEM SECTION 16740 16740-01 GENERAL Clock system to consist of 120 volt clock hangers, 120 volt plug-in synchronous clocks and associated wiring. Clocks are non-system and require manual resetting of each clock after power interruption or for change to "Daylight Savings Time". 16740-02 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: (Contractor to provide outlets)(Owner provides clocks) (3 ) 1. Clocks: 120 volt, non-system, synchronous, plug-in, 12" diameter, semi-recessed with matte black case, black hands and numberals, white face. Simplex 78-45-120V. 2. Clock hanger outlet: 2-9/16" deep, 8-1/8" octagon, with 120 volt receptacle. . Simplex 5928. 16740-03 EXECUTION Owner will install clocks. Contractor will install electrical outlets (3) . Clocks will be located in multi-purpose room, general office, and crew room. ��0•34 fYw TELEPHONE SECTION 16750 16750-01 GENERAL A. Provide a system of empty conduit, boxes, terminal cabinets, etc. , as indicated on drawings for installation of telephone wiring and equipment by Owner. B. Coordinate the installation with Serving Utility prior to roughing- in. C. Telephone service to be underground from property line to telephone terminal located in Telephone Equipment Room. Provide 3" conduit with pullwire. iw 16750-02 PRODUCTS A. Raceways for service cable from designated point outside building to terminal location to be non-metallic with long sweep rigid galvanized ells. �r B. Raceways within building minimum 3/411. See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings for requirements. " C. PULL LINES: See Section 16101-01-F, Future Provisions. D. WALL OUTLETS: 1. At concrete or masonry walls minimum of 4" square with single gang device cover and split telephone finish plate per Section 16130. 2. At frame partitions or where outlets are located in blank panels of cabinets or casework, provide 4" square with single gang device cover and split telephone finish plate per Section 16130. E. UNDERFLOOR DUCTS AND SERVICE FITTINGS: See Section 16111. ow. 16750-03 EXECUTION A. Verify location of all telephone outlets with architectural drawings prior to roughing-in. Where outlets occur at built-in counters or desks, coordinate with other trades. r ' B. Verify installation requirements with Serving Utility. Stub conduit up nominally 6" above floor or below ceiling at terminal facilities provided by telephone company and lock into metal template with locknuts and insulating bushings. Template formed metal pan with no sharp corners. ,, C. Conduit bends to be large radius field bends or factory ells. 16750-03 D. At wall outlets at frame construction the telephone connector to be placedinside wall cavity and not in surface mounted box located over telephone outlet. Thru wall box and conduits at these locations to be properly supported. E. Provide pull line in all empty raceways to facilitate future installation of conductors by Onwer. No pull lines required in underfloor duct system. J. Location and type of- ceiling speakers by onwer f- telephe system t-.- be ver+fiee1. Pr-! -e-r to installat -Entire reging system inshallabim coordinated wibit trades. CABLE TV SYSTEM SECTION 16770 16770-01 GENERAL A. Provide a complete cable TV system. B. Cable service to be underground from property line to cable terminal location in telephone equipment room. C. Provide 2" conduit with pullwire. D. Provide raceway with cable #RG-6 Quad. shielded plus #RG-6 one piece connectors for each cable outlet. (Willamette Cable Co. ) . RADIO SYSTEM SECTION 16780 16780-01 GENERAL A. Provide a complete radio raceway and wiring system. `r B. Install a 3/4" conduit with a Belden #8729 cable from each outlet to the radio terminal in the telephone equipment room. Leave 8 feet of wire at each end. (Connections by others) . F ELECTRIC HEATING SECTION 16880 16880-01 GENERAL A. Provide electric heating units as required, including a 2-KW baseboard heater in the mechanic ' s room and radiant heaters in the shop area. r, r i